Project Design Guide

Version: 8.1.1
Document Number: 09330811

Fourth Edition, September 2007, version 8.1.1
To ensure that you are using the documentation that corresponds to the software you are licensed to use, compare this version number with the software version shown in “About MicroStrategy...” in the Help menu of your software. Document number: 09330811 Copyright © 2007 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved. If you have not executed a written or electronic agreement with MicroStrategy or any authorized MicroStrategy distributor, the following terms apply: This software and documentation are the proprietary and confidential information of MicroStrategy Incorporated and may not be provided to any other person. Copyright © 2001-2007 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved. THIS SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR LIMITED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER MICROSTRATEGY INCORPORATED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE AND NONINFRINGMENT, QUALITY OR ACCURACY. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT MICROSTRATEGY, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED WITH THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event will MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Software be liable to you on account of any claim for damage, including any lost profits, lost savings, or other special, incidental, consequential, or exemplary damages, including but not limited to any damages assessed against or paid by you to any third party, arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, even if MicroStrategy, Inc. or any such other person or entity has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for the claim by any other party. In addition, MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved in the creation, production, or distribution of the Software shall not be liable for any claim by you or any other party for damages arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, based upon principles of contract warranty, negligence, strict liability for the negligence of indemnity or contribution, the failure of any remedy to achieve its essential purpose, or otherwise. The entire liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. and your exclusive remedy shall not exceed, at the option of MicroStrategy, Inc., either a full refund of the price paid, or replacement of the Software. No oral or written information given out expands the liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. beyond that specified in the above limitation of liability. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. The information contained in this manual (the Documentation) and the Software are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by MicroStrategy, Inc. MicroStrategy, Inc. reserves the right to make periodic modifications to the Software or the Documentation without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision. Copying, duplicating, selling, or otherwise distributing any part of the Software or Documentation without prior written consent of an authorized representative of MicroStrategy, Inc. are prohibited. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. It is acknowledged that the Software and Documentation were developed at private expense, that no part is public domain, and that the Software and Documentation are Commercial Computer Software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to them. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAR 252.227-7013 et. seq. or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software—Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor is MicroStrategy, Inc., 1861 International Drive, McLean, Virginia 22102. Rights are reserved under copyright laws of the United States with respect to unpublished portions of the Software. The following are either trademarks or registered trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated in the United States and certain other countries:
MicroStrategy, MicroStrategy 6, MicroStrategy 7, MicroStrategy 7i, MicroStrategy 7i Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy 7i Olap Services, MicroStrategy 8, MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy Administrator, MicroStrategy Agent, MicroStrategy Architect, MicroStrategy BI Developer Kit, MicroStrategy Broadcast Server, MicroStrategy Broadcaster, MicroStrategy Broadcaster Server, MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Platform, MicroStrategy Consulting, MicroStrategy CRM Applications, MicroStrategy Customer Analyzer, MicroStrategy Desktop, MicroStrategy Desktop Analyst, MicroStrategy Desktop Designer, MicroStrategy eCRM 7, MicroStrategy Education, MicroStrategy eTrainer, MicroStrategy Executive, MicroStrategy Infocenter, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal Edition, MicroStrategy MDX Adapter, MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, MicroStrategy Objects, MicroStrategy OLAP Provider, MicroStrategy SDK, MicroStrategy Support, MicroStrategy Telecaster, MicroStrategy Transactor, MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Business Analyzer, MicroStrategy World, Alarm, Alarm.com, Alert.com, Angel, Angel.com, Application Development and Sophisticated Analysis, Best In Business Intelligence, Centralized Application Management, Changing The Way Government Looks At Information, DSSArchitect, DSS Broadcaster, DSS Broadcaster Server, DSS Office, DSSServer, DSS Subscriber, DSS Telecaster, DSSWeb, eBroadcaster, eCaster, eStrategy, eTelecaster, Information Like Water, Insight Is Everything, Intelligence Through Every Phone, Your Telephone Just Got Smarter, Intelligence To Every Decision Maker, Intelligent E-Business, IWAPU, Personal Intelligence Network, Personalized Intelligence Portal, Query Tone, Quickstrike, Rapid Application Development, Strategy.com, Telepath, Telepath Intelligence, Telepath Intelligence (and Design), MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The E-Business Intelligence Platform, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Enterprise, The Intelligence Company, The Platform For Intelligent E-Business, The Power Of Intelligent eBusiness, The Power Of Intelligent E-Business, The Scalable Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Internet, Industrial-Strength Business Intelligence, Office Intelligence, MicroStrategy Office, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy Web MMT, MicroStrategy Web Services, Pixel Perfect, MicroStrategy Mobile and MicroStrategy Integrity Manager are all registered trademarks or trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated. All other products are trademarks of their respective holders. Specifications subject to change without notice. MicroStrategy is not responsible for errors or omissions. MicroStrategy makes no warranties or commitments concerning the availability of future products or versions that may be planned or under development. Patent Information This product is patented. One or more of the following patents may apply to the product sold herein: U.S. Patent Nos. 6,154,766, 6,173,310, 6,260,050, 6,263,051, 6,269,393, 6,279,033, 6,501,832, 6,567,796, 6,587,547, 6,606,596, 6,658,093, 6,658,432, 6,662,195, 6,671,715, 6,691,100, 6,694,316, 6,697,808, 6,704,723, 6,707,889, 6,741,980, 6,765,997, 6,768,788, 6,772,137, 6,788,768, 6,792,086, 6,798,867, 6,801,910, 6,820,073, 6,829,334, 6,836,537, 6,850,603, 6,859,798, 6,873,693, 6,885,734, 6,888,929, 6,895,084, 6,940,953, 6,964,012, 6,977,992, 6,996,568, 6,996,569, 7,003,512, 7,010,518, 7,016,480, 7,020,251, 7,039,165, 7,082,422, 7,113,993, 7,127,403, 7,174,349, 7,194,457, 7,197,461, 7,228,303, 7,260,577, 7,266,181 and 7,272,212. Other patent applications are pending.

Various MicroStrategy products contain the copyrighted technology of third parties. This product may contain one or more of the following copyrighted technologies: Graph Generation Engine Copyright © 1998-2007. Three D Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. Actuate® Formula One. Copyright © 1993-2007 Actuate Corporation. All rights reserved. XML parser Copyright © 2003-2007 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Xalan XSLT processor. Copyright © 1999-2007. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Xerces XML parser. Copyright © 1999-2007. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. FOP XSL formatting objects. Copyright © 2004-2007. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Portions of Intelligence Server memory management Copyright 1991-2006 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved. International Components for Unicode Copyright © 1999-2007 Compaq Computer Corporation Copyright © 1999-2007 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright © 1999-2007 IBM Corporation Copyright © 1999-2007 Hummingbird Communications Ltd. Copyright © 1999-2007 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2007 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2007 The Open Group All rights reserved. Real Player and RealJukebox are included under license from Real Networks, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2007. All rights reserved.

CONTENTS
Description of Guide ................................................................ xiii About this book .............................................................................xv How to find business scenarios and examples .......................xv Prerequisites .......................................................................... xvi Who should use this guide..................................................... xvi Resources.................................................................................... xvi Documentation....................................................................... xvi Education ............................................................................. xxiii Consulting ............................................................................ xxiii International support ............................................................ xxiii Technical Support ................................................................. xxv Feedback .................................................................................... xxx

1. BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform

Introduction.................................................................................. 1 Business intelligence architecture ................................................. 2 Source systems for data collection .......................................... 3 Extraction, transformation, and loading process...................... 4 Data warehouse for data storage and relational design .......... 5 The MicroStrategy platform ........................................................... 7 MicroStrategy metadata........................................................... 8 MicroStrategy Intelligence Server .......................................... 11 MicroStrategy Desktop........................................................... 11 MicroStrategy Web and Web Universal ................................. 13 MicroStrategy project ............................................................. 14 The project design process.......................................................... 15

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

v

Contents

Project Design Guide

2. The Logical Data Model

Introduction................................................................................ 17 Facts: Business data and measurements.................................... 21 Attributes: Context for your levels of data.................................... 22 Attribute elements: Data level values..................................... 23 Attribute relationships ............................................................ 24 Hierarchies: Data relationship organization ................................. 25 Sample data model...................................................................... 26 Building a logical data model ....................................................... 26 User requirements ................................................................. 27 Existing source systems ........................................................ 28 Converting source data to analytical data.............................. 28 Logical data modeling conventions.............................................. 33 Unique identifiers ................................................................... 34 Cardinalities and ratios .......................................................... 35 Attribute forms ....................................................................... 36

3. Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

Introduction................................................................................ 39 Columns: Data identifiers and values .......................................... 41 Tables: Physical groupings of related data.................................. 41 Uniquely identifying data in tables with key structures........... 42 Lookup tables: Attribute storage ............................................ 43 Relate tables: A unique case for relating attributes ............... 45 Fact tables: Fact data and levels of aggregation ................... 46 Homogeneous versus heterogeneous column naming.......... 49 Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage......................................................................................... 51 Highly normalized schema: Minimal storage space............... 52 Moderately normalized schema: Balanced storage space and query performance.......................................................... 54 Highly denormalized schema: Enhanced query performance........................................................................... 56 Design trade-offs ......................................................................... 59 Schema type comparisons .......................................................... 60

4. Creating and Configuring a Project

Introduction................................................................................ 63 Project connectivity components ................................................. 64 MicroStrategy metadata......................................................... 64 Metadata shell ....................................................................... 65 Project source ........................................................................ 65

vi

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Contents

Database instance ................................................................. 67 Project.................................................................................... 67 Summary of project connectivity ............................................ 68 Creating a project ........................................................................ 68 Creating the metadata repository ................................................ 71 Connecting to the metadata repository and data source ............. 71 Connecting to the metadata repository .................................. 72 Connecting to a data source .................................................. 72 Creating the project ..................................................................... 73 Creating a test or prototype project using Project Builder...... 74 Creating a production project using Project Creation Assistant ................................................................................ 75 Creating facts and attributes........................................................ 82 Configuring additional schema-level settings .............................. 83 Deploying your project and creating reports ................................ 84

5. The Building Blocks of Introduction................................................................................ 85 Business Data: Facts Creating facts............................................................................... 87 Simultaneously creating multiple, simple facts ...................... 88 Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts .............. 91 The structure of facts ................................................................... 96 How facts are defined ................................................................. 97 Mapping physical columns to facts: Fact expressions ........... 98 Fact column names and data types: Column aliases ................ 105 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions.................................................................................. 107 Defining a join on fact tables using table relations............... 110 Defining a join on fact tables using fact relations................. 114 Forcing facts to relate to attributes: Using cross product joins ........................................................................ 116 Lowering the level of fact data: Fact degradations .............. 118 Disallowing the reporting of a fact at a certain level............. 122

6. The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes

Introduction.............................................................................. 125 Creating attributes ..................................................................... 129 Simultaneously creating multiple attributes.......................... 129 Adding and modifying attributes .......................................... 134 Unique sets of attribute information: Attribute elements ............ 140

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

vii

Contents

Project Design Guide

Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms ......... 143 Attribute form properties ...................................................... 146 Attribute form expressions ................................................... 147 Modifying attribute data types: Column aliases ................... 156 Attribute forms versus separate attributes ........................... 158 Attribute relationships ................................................................ 159 Viewing and editing the parents and children of attributes .............................................................................. 161 Supporting many-to-many and joint child relationships ....... 163 Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles ......... 175 Specifying attribute roles ..................................................... 177 Attributes with more than one ID column: Compound attributes .................................................................................... 183 Example: Creating compound attributes.............................. 184 Collections of attribute forms: Form groups............................... 186 Supporting compound attributes .......................................... 187 Displaying and organizing related forms.............................. 188 Using attributes to browse and report on data........................... 189 Setting how attribute forms are displayed by default ........... 191

7. Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes

Introduction.............................................................................. 193 Creating user hierarchies........................................................... 194 Types of hierarchies .................................................................. 196 System hierarchy: Project schema definition ....................... 197 User hierarchies: Logical business relationships ................. 197 Hierarchy organization............................................................... 198 Hierarchy structure............................................................... 199 Viewing hierarchies: Hierarchy Viewer ................................ 200 Configuring hierarchy display options........................................ 200 Controlling the display of attribute elements ........................ 201 Filtering attributes in a hierarchy.......................................... 203 Entry point............................................................................ 205 Hierarchy browsing .............................................................. 206 Using the Hierarchy Viewer and Table Viewer .......................... 211 Using the Hierarchy Viewer ................................................. 211 Using the Table Viewer........................................................ 213

8. Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project viii

Introduction.............................................................................. 215 Updating your MicroStrategy project schema............................ 216

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Contents

Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog ...................................................................................... 218 What should I know before I use the Warehouse Catalog? .............................................................................. 219 Accessing the Warehouse Catalog...................................... 219 Adding and removing tables for a project ............................ 220 Managing warehouse and project tables ............................. 221 Modifying data warehouse connection and operation defaults ................................................................................ 226 Customizing catalog SQL statements.................................. 233 Troubleshooting table and column messages ..................... 239 Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables ............. 241 When to use aggregate tables............................................. 242 Determining the frequency of queries at a specific level...... 246 Considering any related parent-child relationships .............. 246 Compression ratio................................................................ 247 Creating aggregate tables ................................................... 248 The size of tables in a project: Logical table size................. 249 Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping...... 250 Server versus application partitioning .................................. 250 Metadata partition mapping ................................................. 251 Warehouse partition mapping .............................................. 254 Metadata versus warehouse partition mapping ................... 255

9. Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons

Introduction.............................................................................. 257 Creating transformations ........................................................... 258 Expression-based versus table-based transformations ....... 259 Building a table-based transformation ................................. 260 Building an expression-based transformation...................... 261 Transformation components ...................................................... 263 Transformation metrics and joint child attributes ....................... 265

A. MicroStrategy Tutorial Introduction.............................................................................. 267 What is the MicroStrategy Tutorial?........................................... 267 MicroStrategy Tutorial data model............................................. 271 Geography hierarchy ........................................................... 272 Products hierarchy ............................................................... 274 Customers hierarchy............................................................ 276 Time hierarchy ..................................................................... 277 Promotions hierarchy ........................................................... 278

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

ix

.. ................................. 298 Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy .............. 285 Time schema .................................................................................................................................. 343 Importing OLAP cubes................................ 280 Geography schema ......... 317 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy...................... 327 Connecting to SAP BW servers on Windows .............. 311 Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy ......... 286 Promotions schema ...... 328 Connecting to SAP BW servers on UNIX and Linux............................................. 308 SAP BW structures .................................................................... 338 Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers........................................ 292 Understanding MicroStrategy architecture................. 284 Customers schema ...... 349 Creating metrics from OLAP cube data with MDX and compound metric techniques ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 288 B........................................ 291 MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources ..... 297 Understanding the SAP BW terminology ................ 340 Configuring the XMLA Provider ....................................................................... 302 Supporting SAP BW variables ........................................................................ Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Introduction....... 283 Products schema .. 337 Configuring the XMLA Provider ... 287 Inventory fact tables........................................................................................ 287 Sales fact tables ............................................................................................................................................. 294 Authentication ...................................................................................................................... 334 Configuring the XMLA Provider ................ 322 Connecting to SAP BW servers................. 330 Connecting to Essbase servers .................................. 288 Miscellaneous fact tables.................................................................................................................... 344 Mapping OLAP cubes ............. 341 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy.. 334 Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers................. 311 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy...............................................................................Contents Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial schema .............................. 359 x © 2007 MicroStrategy....................... Inc........................................

.................. 399 Big Decimal.................................... 403 Index ............................................................................................. 377 Business case 3: Slowly changing dimensions.................................................................... 427 © 2007 MicroStrategy......................... 370 How should I use logical tables? .................................. 378 Business case 4: One-to-many transformation tables .......................................................... 395 MicroStrategy data types ......................Project Design Guide Contents C........................................... 395 Mapping of external data types to MicroStrategy data types... Logical Tables Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 400 Using the Big Decimal data type............................................. 375 Logical view examples..................................................... 373 Using SQL for logical views ..................... 369 Logical tables.............................................. 376 Business case 1: Distinct attribute lookup table................................................................... 371 Creating logical tables ................................................................................................. 401 Glossary .. Inc............................................................................................. 376 Business case 2: Attribute form expression across multiple tables .............. xi .................. Data Types Introduction............ 397 Format types........................................................... 390 D........................................... 389 Business case 5: Outer joins between attribute lookup tables.... 398 Data type and format type compatibility.......

Inc.Contents Project Design Guide xii © 2007 MicroStrategy. .

Creating and Configuring a Project. xiii . Chapter 4. explores logical data modeling and how it can help you identify the different elements within your business data and plan your project. and modifying a project in MicroStrategy and covers a wide range of project-related topics. provides a brief introduction to business intelligence architecture and some of the main components within the MicroStrategy platform. BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform. • • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. creating. describes components of the physical warehouse schema such as columns and tables and explores how you can map components from the logical data model to components in the database to form the physical warehouse schema. Chapter 2. Inc. Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model. The Logical Data Model. Chapter 3. including the following: • Chapter 1. describes the major components involved in project creation and guides you through the process of creating a project in MicroStrategy.PREFACE Description of Guide The MicroStrategy Project Design Guide provides comprehensive information on planning.

Preface Project Design Guide • Chapter 5. Appendix B. . Microsoft® Analysis Services. or Hyperion® Essbase® for use within MicroStrategy. Chapter 7. which includes a metadata and warehouse. and how to create logical tables and views in MicroStrategy. • • xiv © 2007 MicroStrategy. Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons. MicroStrategy Tutorial. The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts. discusses logical tables. describes methods you can implement to better optimize and maintain your project for both the short and long term. Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project. provides information on the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Logical Tables. This chapter also covers all the steps necessary to create attributes for your project. Chapter 6. Appendix C. This chapter also covers all the steps necessary to create facts for your project. discusses the different types of transformations in MicroStrategy and describes how you can create transformations in your project. Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources. • • • • The appendixes contain the following additional reference information. and explains how you can create user hierarchies to help organize and enhance your project. The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes. which you may or may not require depending on your specific needs: • Appendix A. provides a conceptual look at the structure of attributes and explores different types of attributes and how they relate to your business data. and a set of demonstration applications designed to illustrate the features of the MicroStrategy platform. describes the structure of facts and explores different types of facts and how they relate to your business data. Chapter 8. Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. Inc. provides information about connecting to an OLAP Cube source such as SAP® BW. Chapter 9. the different types of logical tables. discusses the different types of hierarchies in MicroStrategy.

many of the concepts discussed are accompanied by business scenarios or other descriptive examples. metadata. and project. each from a different business area. Business scenarios can be found in the Analytics Modules. provides information about the different data types in MicroStrategy. Inc. which are a set of sample analytics. About this book This book is divided into chapters that begin with a brief overview of the chapter’s content. and describe the user roles the information in this book was designed for. How to find business scenarios and examples Within this guide.Project Design Guide Preface • Appendix D. Each module comes with a sample data model and a collection of packaged reports that allow dozens of analytical variations. About this book xv . The Analytics Modules are part of a product bundle called the MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK). The following sections provide the location of additional examples. human resources. which is MicroStrategy’s sample warehouse. Detailed examples of advanced reporting functionality can be found in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Data Types. and customer analysis. For examples of reporting functionality. Information about the MicroStrategy Tutorial can be found in the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. see the MicroStrategy Tutorial. © 2007 MicroStrategy. list prerequisites for using this book. Example analysis includes such business areas as financial reporting.

Inc.Preface Project Design Guide Prerequisites Before working with this document. create. you should be familiar with: • • the information provided in the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide the nature and structure of the data you want to use for your business intelligence application Who should use this guide This document is designed for all users who require an understanding of how to design. the following business intelligence application users should read this guide: • • Project Designers Database Administrators Resources Documentation MicroStrategy provides both manuals and online help. as described below. these two information sources provide different types of information. In short. and modify a MicroStrategy project using the MicroStrategy platform. Manuals: MicroStrategy manuals provide • • • introductory information concepts checklists xvi Resources © 2007 MicroStrategy. .

and Analysis Products • MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide Information to install and configure MicroStrategy products on Windows. and additional resources. you can download it from www. Manuals for Query. Adobe Acrobat Reader 4. UNIX.Project Design Guide Preface • • examples high-level procedures to get started Online help: MicroStrategy online help provides • • detailed steps to perform procedures descriptions of each option on every software screen Manuals The following manuals are available from your CD-ROM or the machine where MicroStrategy was installed. Resources xvii .com. as well as basic maintenance guidelines. • MicroStrategy Quick Start Guide Overview of the installation and evaluation process. configuring. Reporting. If you do not have Acrobat Reader installed on your computer.0 or higher is required to view these documents. Linux. The procedure to access them is below. Inc. and HP platforms. and using the MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition of the software. MicroStrategy Overview • Introduction to MicroStrategy: Evaluation Guide Instructions for installing. © 2007 MicroStrategy. • MicroStrategy Upgrade Guide Instructions to upgrade existing MicroStrategy products.adobe.

filters. metrics.Preface Project Design Guide • MicroStrategy System Administration Guide Concepts and high-level steps to implement. PowerPoint®. Topics include reports. advanced schemas. format. and troubleshoot a MicroStrategy business intelligence system. attributes. • MicroStrategy Project Design Guide Information to create and modify MicroStrategy projects. • MicroStrategy Mobile User Guide Instructions for using MicroStrategy Mobile to view and analyze data. Data Mining Services. building on information in the Basic Reporting Guide and Advanced Reporting Guide. • MicroStrategy Office User Guide Instructions for using MicroStrategy Office to work with MicroStrategy reports and documents in Microsoft® Excel. and Outlook. and prompts. tune. Covers installation and configuration of MicroStrategy Mobile and how a designer working in MicroStrategy xviii Resources © 2007 MicroStrategy. • MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide Instructions for advanced topics in the MicroStrategy system. Word. Inc. deploy. and distribute business data. and project optimization. and perform other business tasks with MicroStrategy reports and documents on a mobile device. hierarchies. • MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide Instructions to design and create Report Services documents. metrics. consolidations. Freeform SQL reports. OLAP Cube reports. and prompts. filters. Query Builder reports. custom groups. maintain. transformations. . building on information in the Basic Reporting Guide. and how to analyze data in a report. and understand facts. • MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide Instructions to get started with MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. Includes the basics for creating reports. to analyze.

• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server System Administrator Guide Concepts and high-level steps to implement. maintain. • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Application Designer Guide Fundamentals of designing Narrowcast Server applications. and troubleshoot MicroStrategy Web Services. • MicroStrategy Web Services Administration Guide Concepts and tasks to install. Resources xix . and troubleshoot Narrowcast Server. Inc. attribute forms. • MicroStrategy Functions Reference Function syntax and formula components. Manuals for Information Delivery and Alerting Products • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Getting Started Guide Instructions to work with the tutorial to learn Narrowcast Server interfaces and features.Project Design Guide Preface Desktop or MicroStrategy Web can create effective reports and documents for use with MicroStrategy Mobile. configure. • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Upgrade Guide Instructions to upgrade an existing Narrowcast Server. © 2007 MicroStrategy. filters. • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Installation and Configuration Guide Information to install and configure Narrowcast Server. examples of functions in business scenarios. instructions to use functions in metrics. tune. tune.

• Narrowcast Server SDK Guide Instructions to customize Narrowcast Server functionality. 2 Click the link for the desired manual. . To access installed online documentation 1 From the Windows Start menu. and embed Narrowcast Server functionality within other applications. Documents the Narrowcast Server Delivery Engine and Subscription Portal APIs. which is sold as part of the MicroStrategy SDK. MicroStrategy. and the Narrowcast Server SPI. integrate Narrowcast Server with other systems. and so on. choose Programs. • MicroStrategy Web SDK The Web SDK is available in the MicroStrategy Developer Library. customization scenarios. then Product Manuals. xx Resources © 2007 MicroStrategy. code samples. A Web page opens with a list of available manuals in PDF format. Inc. including details about architecture. object models.Preface Project Design Guide Manuals for Analytics Modules • • • • • • Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK) Installation and Porting Guide Customer Analysis Module Reference Sales Force Analysis Module Reference Financial Reporting Analysis Module Reference Sales and Distribution Analysis Module Reference Human Resources Analysis Module Reference Software Development Kits • MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) Information to understand the MicroStrategy SDK.

click the Bookmarks and Page from the View menu. Online help MicroStrategy provides several ways to access online help: • • • Help button: Use the Help button at the bottom of most software screens to see context-sensitive help. F1 key: Press F1 to see context-sensitive help addressing the function or task you are currently performing. Inc. When you select one of these guides. the File Download dialog box opens. Resources xxi . If bookmarks are not visible on the left side of an Acrobat (PDF) document. Select Open this file from its current location. and click OK. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Help menu: Select Contents and Index to see the main table of contents for the help system.Project Design Guide Preface 3 Some documentation is provided in HTML help format.

indicates variable information to be replaced by the user Example: The aggregation level is the level of calculation for the metric. lists. options. xxii Resources © 2007 MicroStrategy. and menus that are the focus of actions or part of a list of such GUI elements and their definitions • text to be entered by the user Example: Click Select Warehouse. Inc. . Type bold Indicates • button names. dialog boxes. + A keyboard command that calls for the use of more than one key (for example. The following table lists these conventions. check boxes.Preface Project Design Guide Documentation standards MicroStrategy online help and PDF manuals (available both online and in printed format) provides standards to help you identify concepts and procedures. A warning icon alerts you to important information such as potential security risks. these should be read before continuing. italic • new terms defined within the text and in the glossary • names of other product manuals • when part of a command syntax. UPPERCASE • keyboard command key (such as ENTER) • shortcut key (such as CTRL+V) Example: To bold the selected text. Example: Type copy c:\filename d:\foldername\filename Courier font • • • • • • calculations code samples registry keys path and file names URLs messages displayed in the screen Example: Sum(revenue)/number of months. Example: Type cmdmgr -f scriptfile.scp and press ENTER. press CTRL+B. SHIFT+F1) A note icon indicates helpful information for specific situations.

Inc. Offerings include complex security architecture designs. Resources xxiii .com/Education. visit www.Project Design Guide Preface Education MicroStrategy Education Services provides a comprehensive curriculum and highly skilled education consultants. support for date formats. and statistics databases MicroStrategy Intelligence Server MicroStrategy Web server MicroStrategy Desktop client Web browser © 2007 MicroStrategy. Consulting MicroStrategy Consulting Services provides proven methods for delivering leading-edge technology solutions.com/Consulting. performance and tuning. metadata. collectively known as a configuration: • • • • • warehouse. currency symbols. Many customers and partners from over 800 different organizations have benefited from MicroStrategy instruction. strategic planning. and more. visit www. It also includes the availability of translated interfaces and documentation. decimal formats. Support for a locale typically includes native database and operating system support. For a detailed description of education offerings and course curriculums. The level of support is defined in terms of the components of a MicroStrategy business intelligence environment. International support MicroStrategy supports several locales.microstrategy. For a detailed description of consulting offerings.microstrategy. A MicroStrategy business intelligence environment consists of the following components. project and testing strategies and recommendations. and more.

3 The user language preference that was set previously in version 7. In addition. MicroStrategy also provides limited support for heterogeneous configurations (where some of the components may lie in different locales). Repair or maintenance installation on a system on which MicroStrategy application has been installed before All subsequent executions of the installation routine are displayed in the language that you selected the first time you installed the product on the system. Please contact MicroStrategy Technical Support for more details.2. Once the product is installed.Preface Project Design Guide MicroStrategy is certified in homogeneous configurations (where all the components lie in the same locale) in the following languages: English (US). xxiv Resources © 2007 MicroStrategy. the Online Help is displayed in the same language that the user selects in the language prompt of the installation routine. Inc. The user language in the product interface is also the language that you selected the first time you installed the product on the system. The user language in the product interface is the language that you select during installation.3 is the language of display of the installation routine and the user language of the product interface. Upgrading an earlier installation from version 7. A translated user interface is available in each of the above languages. Japanese. The following table lists the language selection possibilities for different installation cases.2. German. French. Portuguese (Brazilian). Spanish. Korean. Italian. . translated versions of the online help files and product documentation are available in several of the above languages. Chinese (simplified) and Swedish. Installation Fresh installation on a system in which MicroStrategy application has never been installed before Result The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard prompts you to select the language from the drop-down list.

asp © 2007 MicroStrategy.microstrategy. The installation routine is displayed in the selected language.2.2 or earlier. and release notes. However. Completely uninstalling all the MicroStrategy products and installing the same version or a newer version If you uninstall all the products and install either the same version or a higher version again. Resources xxv . During installation. the installation Online Help is displayed in English only. the user language of the product interface language remains the same as the one set in the product interface before running the upgrade installation.1. unless overridden by the command line parameter. it has no effect on the default language of the product interfaces. are displayed in the language that you selected during the upgrade installation. the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard prompts you to select the language from the drop-down list. all subsequent executions of the installation routine for maintenance or for upgrade. Besides.com/support/ k_base/index. online help. readme files.Project Design Guide Preface Installation Upgrading an earlier installation from version 7. you should: 1 Consult the product guides. Note: Even if you select a language from the language prompt in the installation routine. 2 Consult the MicroStrategy Knowledge Base online at http://www. Paths to access each are described above. including 7. Technical Support If you have questions about a specific MicroStrategy product. Inc.x Result The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard prompts you to select the language from the drop-down list.

Refer to the terms of your purchase agreement to determine the type of support available to you. xxvi Resources © 2007 MicroStrategy. To ensure the most effective and productive relationship with MicroStrategy Technical Support.com/ Support/Policies. 3 Attempt to reproduce the issue and determine whether it occurs consistently. 3 If the resources listed in the steps above do not provide you with a solution.com/Support/ Expiration. 2 Verify that the system is using a currently supported version of MicroStrategy software by checking the Product Support Expiration Schedule at http://www. Inc. MicroStrategy Technical Support may be contacted by your company’s Support Liaison. A Support Liaison is a person whom your company has designated as a point-of-contact with MicroStrategy’s support personnel. . Ensure issues are resolved quickly Before logging a case with MicroStrategy Technical Support. 4 Minimize the complexity of the system or project object definition to isolate the cause.Preface Project Design Guide A technical administrator in your organization may be able to help you resolve your issues immediately.microstrategy. review the Policies and Procedures document posted at http://www. the Support Liaison may follow the steps below to ensure that issues are resolved quickly: 1 Verify that the issue is with MicroStrategy software and not a third party software.microstrategy.asp. contact MicroStrategy Technical Support directly. Your company may designate two employees to serve as their Support Liaisons. All customer inquiries and case communications must come through these named individuals. Your company may request to change their Support Liaisons two times per year with prior written notice to MicroStrategy Technical Support.

North America E-mail: support@microstrategy. Resources xxvii . If your Support Liaison is unable to reach MicroStrategy Technical Support by phone during the hours of operation. send e-mail or fax.com Fax: (703) 842–8709 Phone: (703) 848–8700 Hours: 9:00 A. Phone: • United Kingdom: +44 (0) 208 396 0085 • Benelux: +31 20 346 9210 • Finland: +35 8 9 6937 9620 • France: +33 1 41 91 86 49 • Germany: +49 69 95096206 • Ireland: +35 3 1242 1522 • Italy: +39 02696 33 456 • Spain: +34 91 406 90 10 • International distributors: +44 (0) 208 396 0080 Hours: • United Kingdom: 9:00 A. Inc.M. Monday-Friday except holidays Europe.M. and how to contact MicroStrategy Technical Support.com Web: https://support. and Africa (EMEA) © 2007 MicroStrategy.M.microstrategy. or log a case using the Online Support Interface. GMT. the Middle East. Eastern Time (1400–0000 GMT). Monday–Friday except holidays E-mail: eurosupp@microstrategy.M. Monday-Friday except holidays • Mainland Europe: 9:00 A.M.Project Design Guide Preface 5 Determine whether the issue occurs on a local machine or on multiple machines in the customer environment.M.com Web: https://support. they can leave a voicemail message. CET. when. 6 Discuss the issue with other users by posting a question about the issue on the MicroStrategy Customer Forum at https://forums.–6:00 P.com.microstrategy.–7:00 P.com Fax: +44 (0) 208 396 0001 The European Technical Support Centre is closed on certain public holidays.microstrategy. These holidays reflect the national public holidays in each country. The table on the following page shows where.–6:00 P.

microstrategy. In Europe. BST (Sao Paulo). Australia. In North America. JST (Tokyo). During the course of troubleshooting and researching issues. Inc.com Fax: +81 3 5456 5464 Phone: • Korea: +82 2 560 6565 • Singapore (supporting Singapore.8969 • Japan (supporting Japan. Monday–Friday except holidays Latin America Support Liaisons should contact the Technical Support Center from which they obtained their MicroStrategy software licenses or the Technical Support Center to which they have been designated. Malaysia. Pakistan.com Fax: +55 11 3044 4088 Phone: LATAM (except Argentina): +55 11 3054 1010 Argentina: 0 800 444 MSTR Hours: 9:00 A. Required information when calling When contacting MicroStrategy Technical Support. Taiwan. China.Preface Project Design Guide Asia Pacific E-mail: apsupport@microstrategy. national holidays. Hong Kong.M. and Latin America.–6:00 P.6303.M. This can eliminate security conflicts and improve case resolution time.S. India. New Zealand.microstrategy. we recommend you designate Support Liaisons who have permissions to be MicroStrategy project administrators. these holidays reflect many U.com Web: https://support. Although not a requirement. Monday-Friday except holidays E-mail: latamsupport@microstrategy.M. . Asia Pacific. and Sri Lanka): +65.–7:00 P. MicroStrategy Technical Support personnel may make recommendations that require administrative privileges on the MicroStrategy projects. and all other Asia Pacific countries not listed in this section): +81 3 3511 6720 Hours: 9:00 A. or that assume that the designated Support Liaison has a security level that permits them to fully manipulate the MicroStrategy projects and has access to potentially sensitive project data such as security filter definitions. these holidays reflect the national public holidays in each country. The individual Technical Support Centers are closed on certain public holidays.com Web: https://support.M. please provide the following information: • xxviii Resources Personal information: © 2007 MicroStrategy.

they should also be prepared to provide the following: • • • • street address phone number fax number e-mail address To help the Technical Support representative work to resolve the problem promptly and effectively. Resources • • xxix . and be ready to provide it when inquiring about an existing case software version and product registration numbers of the MicroStrategy software products you are using case description: What causes the condition to occur? Does the condition occur sporadically or each time a certain action is performed? Does the condition occur on all machines or just on one? © 2007 MicroStrategy. and steps taken to troubleshoot the case thus far • Business/system impact If this is the Support Liaison’s first call. e-mail addresses) • Case details: Configuration information. Inc. including MicroStrategy software product(s) and versions Full description of the case including symptoms. error messages(s).Project Design Guide Preface Name (first and last) Company and customer site (if different from company) Contact information (phone and fax numbers. be prepared to provide the following additional information: • case number: Please keep a record of the number assigned to each case logged with MicroStrategy Technical Support.

The Support Liaison may call MicroStrategy Technical Support at any time to inquire about the status of the issue. what was its exact wording? What steps have you taken to isolate and resolve the issue? What were the results? • system configuration (the information needed depends on the nature of the problem. Inc. not all items listed below may be necessary): computer hardware specifications (processor speed.Preface Project Design Guide When did the condition first occur? What events took place immediately prior to the first occurrence of the condition (for example. RAM. the Support Liaison and the MicroStrategy Technical Support representative should agree on certain action items to be performed. or a software upgrade)? If there was an error message. and so on) network protocol used ODBC driver manufacturer and version database gateway software version (for MicroStrategy Web-related problems) browser manufacturer and version (for MicroStrategy Web-related problems) Web server manufacturer and version If the issue requires additional investigation or testing. If the Technical Support representative is responsible for an action item. a database move. Feedback Please send any comments or suggestions about user documentation for MicroStrategy products to: xxx Feedback © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Support Liaison should perform any agreed-upon actions before contacting MicroStrategy Technical Support again regarding the issue. disk space. . a major database load.

Feedback xxxi . please include the name and version of the products you are currently using. Your feedback is important to us as we prepare for future releases.Project Design Guide Preface documentationfeedback@microstrategy. © 2007 MicroStrategy.com Send suggestions for product enhancements to: support@microstrategy. Inc.com When you provide feedback to us.

Inc.Preface Project Design Guide xxxii Feedback © 2007 MicroStrategy. .

1 . Business intelligence (BI) systems facilitate the analysis of volumes of complex data by providing the ability to view data from multiple perspectives. An optimum business intelligence application: • • • Gives users access to data at various levels of detail Allows users to request information and have it delivered to them accurately and quickly Provides a foundation for the proactive delivery of information to system subscribers © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. how the MicroStrategy platform interacts with your business data to provide a wide range of functionality. specifically.1 1. it is important to understand how business intelligence systems work and. BI ARCHITECTURE AND THE MICROSTRATEGY PLATFORM Introduction Before planning and creating a project in MicroStrategy.

SAP BW. and loading (ETL) process A data warehouse—typically an online analytical processing (OLAP) system A business intelligence platform such as MicroStrategy • • • The diagram above illustrates the common setup for standardizing data from source systems and transferring that data into MicroStrategy. page 5. see Data warehouse for data storage and relational design. Business intelligence architecture A BI architecture has the following components: • A source system—typically an online transaction processing (OLTP) system. For more information on how MicroStrategy can access your data sources. but other systems or files that capture or hold data of interest are also possible An extraction. Inc. Excel files. transformation. . Hyperion Essbase. MicroStrategy can also access data from text files. as well as some of the components within the MicroStrategy platform that allow you to create and analyze your business intelligence. and other data sources. 2 Business intelligence architecture © 2007 MicroStrategy. Microsoft Analysis Services.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide This chapter introduces you to the basic architecture of BI systems.

This is in contrast to data warehouses which are often designed for reading data for analysis with a minimum number of updates. including health care. and order processing. Each of these business services has a different and specific workflow. deposits. Data is aligned by application. A source system is usually the most significant site of online transaction processing (OLTP). For more information on data warehouse design. Business intelligence architecture 3 . that is. inventory. a different source system—another file on the server—keeps track of each customer’s contact information. telecommunications. An example of data that benefits from this type of optimization is the number of credit card transactions that an OLTP system might record in a single day. as the system records huge volumes of data every day. Meanwhile. by business activities and workflow. A bank is an example of a business with many source systems. or deletions. Inc.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 Source systems for data collection Source systems refer to any system or file that captures or holds data of interest. For example. e-commerce. and therefore has many source systems to support these services. website usage. and many others. suppose one source system—a database file on the bank’s server—keeps track of deposits and withdrawals as they occur. insertions. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Data formats are not necessarily uniform across systems. • • • Recall the example of a bank that relies on several source systems to store data related to the many services the bank offers. Data history is limited to recent or current data. see Data warehouse for data storage and relational design. page 5. OLTP systems are databases or mainframes that store real-time processing data and have the following characteristics: • Data access is optimized for frequent reading and writing. This processing is relied upon daily by nearly every industry. manufacturing. An average bank offers several services such as account activity updates and loan disbursement. Transactional processing involves the simple recording of transactions and other business data such as sales.

2 The data is transformed and prepared to be loaded into the data warehouse. However. and account balances. and money market account information. loan status. transformation. including the customer's ATM activity. Extraction. account balances. the customer information stored in each of these different systems must be consolidated. you can withdraw or deposit money as well as check on balances. to get a money order. Transformation procedures can include converting data types and names. eliminating unwanted data. Inc. correcting typographical errors. The ETL process consolidates data so it can be stored in a data warehouse. and similar processes to standardize the format and structure of data. transformation. loan status. 3 The data is loaded into the data warehouse. and loading process The extraction. transformation. The ETL process involves the following steps: 1 Data is gathered from various source systems. This is because the operational systems supporting these two services are designed to perform specific tasks. such as a customer's ATM activity. you must enter the bank and perform the transaction with a bank teller. This process can be explained with the example of a bank that wants to consolidate a variety of information about a particular customer. If a bank wants to see a unified view of a particular customer.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide At an automated teller machine (ATM). Since 4 Business intelligence architecture © 2007 MicroStrategy. and loading (ETL) process represents all the steps necessary to move data from different source systems to an integrated data warehouse. and these two services require different operational systems. filling in incomplete data. This consolidation is achieved using the extraction. Each of these different sets of data is likely gathered by different source systems. and loading (ETL) process. .

growth patterns. the data warehouse also provides the foundation for a robust online analytical processing (OLAP) system. are generally designed and optimized for transactional processing. and OLAP cubes. Data is rarely inserted. Data warehouse for data storage and relational design A well-designed and robust data warehouse is the source of data for the decision support system or business intelligence system. The most common action is the selection of data for analysis. and then loads the data into the data warehouse. transforms it until it is standardized and consistent. For more information on accessing data stored in alternative data sources. Most data warehouses have the following characteristics: • Data access is typically read-only. Business intelligence architecture 5 . see Storing and analyzing data with alternative data sources. In this case. These relational databases can be queried directly with Structured Query Language (SQL). percent-to-total contributions. However. whereas data warehouses are usually designed and optimized for analytical processing. the ETL process extracts the data from the different banking source systems. Analytical processing involves activities such as choosing to see sales data by month and selecting the applicable metric to calculate sales trends. This is in contrast to most © 2007 MicroStrategy. updated.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 each source system can have its own naming conventions. It enables its users to leverage the competitive advantage that the business intelligence provides. In combination with MicroStrategy tools and products. trend reporting. or deleted. such as OLTP systems. Excel files. You can integrate different types of data sources with MicroStrategy such as text files. page 6. MicroStrategy does not require that data be stored in a relational database. and profit analysis. Data warehouses are usually based on relational databases or some form of relational database management system (RDBMS) platform. a language developed specifically to interact with RDBMS software. Inc. the data that comes from one system may be inconsistent with the data that comes from another system. The source systems described above.

A data warehouse can be thought of as one type of data source. page 4. which are a common type of data warehouse. A data warehouse is populated with data from the existing operational systems using an ETL process. For more information on the steps of the project design process. usually two to five years. and loading process. Data history extends long-term. transformation. • • Storing and analyzing data with alternative data sources Along with integrating with relational databases. Microsoft Analysis Services. A data source is any file. system. Inc. reporting. and loading process. and analysis. see Source systems for data collection. Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model. which are referred to as 6 Business intelligence architecture © 2007 MicroStrategy. Defining a project’s logical data model and physical warehouse schema are important steps in preparing your data for a MicroStrategy project.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide OLTP source systems which must be able to handle frequent updates as data is gathered. page 4). and Hyperion Essbase. as explained in Extraction. . page 3. see Chapter 2. The following are different data source alternatives which MicroStrategy can integrate with: • OLAP cube sources: In MicroStrategy you can integrate with sets of data from SAP BW. The Logical Data Model and Chapter 3. For more information on source systems. transformation. or storage location which stores data that is to be used in MicroStrategy for query. MicroStrategy can also integrate with a number of alternative data sources. The structure of data in a data warehouse and how it relates to your MicroStrategy environment can be defined and understood through a logical data model and physical warehouse schema. and refers specifically to using a database as your data source. • • Data is aligned by business subjects. Data formats are uniformly integrated using an ETL process (see Extraction.

you can query. For more information on using text files and Excel files with the Freeform SQL and Query Builder features. MicroStrategy can integrate with these data sources while simultaneously accessing a relational database effectively. and OLAP analysis MicroStrategy Desktop.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 OLAP cube sources. The MicroStrategy platform 7 . analyze. Windows-based environment providing a complete range of analytical functions designed to facilitate the deployment of reports MicroStrategy Web and Web Universal. page 8—a repository that stores MicroStrategy object definitions and information about the data warehouse MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. MicroStrategy can report against these alternative data sources while concurrently accessing a relational database to integrate all of your data into one cohesive project. reporting. see Appendix B. and report on data stored in text files and Excel files. The MicroStrategy platform A business intelligence platform offers a complete set of tools for the creation. deployment. • Text files and Excel files: With MicroStrategy’s Freeform SQL and Query Builder features. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. support. page 13—a highly interactive user environment and a low-maintenance interface for reporting and analysis • • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. and maintenance of business intelligence applications. As with OLAP cube sources described above. Some of the main components of the MicroStrategy platform include: • MicroStrategy metadata. page 11—an analytical server optimized for enterprise querying. Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources. For more information on connecting to and integrating OLAP cube sources in MicroStrategy. Inc. page 11—an advanced.

. MicroStrategy metadata MicroStrategy metadata is a repository that stores MicroStrategy object definitions and information about your data warehouse. refer to the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. see the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. page 14—where you build and store all schema objects and information you need to create application objects such as reports in the MicroStrategy environment. as shown in the following diagram. To learn how to administer and tune the MicroStrategy platform.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide • MicroStrategy project. The information is stored in a proprietary 8 The MicroStrategy platform © 2007 MicroStrategy. which together provide a flexible reporting environment The MicroStrategy platform components work together to provide an analysis and reporting environment to your user community. Inc. The sections that follow provide a brief overview of each of these components. For more detailed information about these and the other components that make up the MicroStrategy platform.

Inc. and other objects which are stored in the Schema Objects folder in MicroStrategy Desktop’s folder list. and so on. attributes. metrics. You can build and manipulate several fundamentally different kinds of objects in MicroStrategy. The metadata also stores the definitions of all objects created with MicroStrategy Desktop and Web such as templates. These schema objects are often created and managed by a MicroStrategy architect: Facts relate numeric data values from the data warehouse to the MicroStrategy reporting environment. reports. and project administration. these objects. which are analytical calculations that are displayed on a report. facts. attributes. The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts. Facts are discussed in more detail in Chapter 5. • Configuration objects—Objects that provide important information or governing parameters for connectivity. report creation in MicroStrategy is achieved through using various types of objects which represent your data as report building blocks. see the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 format within a relational database. The metadata maps MicroStrategy objects—which are used to build reports and analyze data—to your data warehouse structures and data. The number of units sold is one example of a fact. Schema objects include facts. hierarchies. views. and so on. and hierarchies are three essential pieces to any business intelligence application. The MicroStrategy platform 9 . As a general rule. and columns. groups. Facts. users. Schema objects—Objects that are created in the application to correspond to database objects. are all created and stored in the metadata repository. Examples include database instances. user privileges. but are created by a project architect or administrator to configure and govern the platform. which are described below. For more information about creating and administering configuration objects. • © 2007 MicroStrategy. configuration objects are created and maintained with the managers in MicroStrategy Desktop within the Administration icon. such as tables. In general. Facts are used to create metrics. These objects are not used directly for reporting.

One of the most common examples of a hierarchy is a time hierarchy which includes attributes such as Year. page 13. documents. Hierarchies are discussed in more detail in Chapter 7. metrics. Month. custom groups. Hierarchies are groupings of attributes so that they can be displayed to reflect their relationships to other attributes. and so on. MicroStrategy metadata also facilitates the retrieval of data from the data warehouse when using MicroStrategy applications. In the example of regional sales in the Southeast.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide Attributes represent the business context in which fact data is relevant. Information on creating application objects is in the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide and MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Attributes are used to define the level at which you want to view the numeric data on a report. Quarter. The metadata enables the sharing of objects across MicroStrategy applications by providing a central repository for all object definitions. Inc. Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. All application objects can be created and maintained in MicroStrategy Desktop. Application objects are created using schema objects as building blocks. For more information about MicroStrategy Web. templates. MicroStrategy Intelligence Server evaluates the most efficient data retrieval scenario to provide excellent query performance. Attributes are discussed in more detail in Chapter 6. It converts user requests into SQL queries and 10 The MicroStrategy platform © 2007 MicroStrategy. see MicroStrategy Web and Web Universal. Application objects include reports. These groupings can help users make logical connections between attributes when reporting and analyzing data. Reports and documents can also be created and managed in MicroStrategy Web. filters. • Application objects—Objects used to provide analysis of and insight into relevant data. . and prompts. The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes. Southeast represents the attribute or context of the sales data.

© 2007 MicroStrategy. For information on how to install and configure MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. The MicroStrategy platform 11 . MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop is an advanced. See the MicroStrategy Functions Reference for details about these functions. refer to the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. MicroStrategy Desktop provides the project designer functionality essential to creating both schema and application objects necessary to serve the user communities of both MicroStrategy Desktop and Web.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 translates the results of those SQL queries back into MicroStrategy objects such as reports and documents which can be easily analyzed and understood. You can also add and define your own functions. Inc. refer to the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. and OLAP analysis. The important functions of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server are: • • • • Sharing objects Sharing data Managing the sharing of data and objects in a controlled and secure environment Protecting the information in the metadata MicroStrategy Intelligence Server also provides a library of over 150 different sophisticated mathematical and statistical functions. MicroStrategy Intelligence Server MicroStrategy Intelligence Server is an analytical server optimized for enterprise querying. For a detailed description of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server functionality and tuning recommendations. reporting. Windows-based environment providing a complete range of analytical functionality designed to facilitate the deployment of reports.

schema objects must first exist. However. Facts. and MicroStrategy Office. For example. hierarchies. Inc. • After reports have been created. Projects are discussed in Chapter 4. It provides a unified environment for creating and maintaining business intelligence projects.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide Desktop enables you to model applications using an intuitive. One of the other functions of MicroStrategy Desktop is to create projects. filters. thus providing access to your data. Tables in MicroStrategy are references to tables in your data warehouse. without making any alterations to the database. report designers and analysts can deploy them through different interfaces. You can change the structure of a business hierarchy by re-ordering it. For information about the various components that comprise MicroStrategy Desktop. refer to the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. and other schema objects are the building blocks for application objects such as reports and documents. before application objects are created. including MicroStrategy Desktop. The following examples highlight some ways in which Desktop allows you to model your business intelligence applications: • Every report or query can automatically benefit from the tables you include in an application. graphical interface. Application objects such as reports are used to analyze and provide insight into the relevant data. and metrics. Desktop provides the ability to modify one aspect of the application without affecting the others. Desktop is where you can manage application objects such as reports. This modification is necessary if you have new requirements that require you to add or remove new levels of data in a hierarchy. 12 The MicroStrategy platform © 2007 MicroStrategy. Schema objects allow application objects to interact with the data warehouse to access the data for analysis. which are in turn used to design reports. The change automatically takes effect in the application. attributes. Creating and Configuring a Project. If you need to change how to view your business information or how the data is modeled. MicroStrategy Web. . facts are used to create metrics.

Using the Web interface. quick deployment. For information on advanced Desktop functionality. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. and rapid customization potential. and share data through any web browser on many operating systems. For more information about deploying MicroStrategy Web. refer to the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. Additional MicroStrategy definitions.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 For more information about creating application objects such as reports in MicroStrategy Desktop. Red Hat® Linux®. MicroStrategy Web Universal is a version of MicroStrategy Web that provides the added benefits of also working with: • • • Operating systems such as Sun Solaris™. analyze. IBM AIX®. users can access. Sun ONE®. and HP-UX Application servers such as BEA WebLogic™. industry-leading analysis. making it easy for users to make informed business decisions. Oracle®. The MicroStrategy platform 13 . see the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. MicroStrategy Web provides ad-hoc querying. including many project-related terms. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. page 64. are discussed in Project connectivity components. MicroStrategy Web and Web Universal MicroStrategy Web provides users with a highly interactive environment and a low-maintenance interface for reporting and analysis. IBM WebSphere®. and Apache Tomcat All web servers and browsers supported by MicroStrategy Web MicroStrategy Intelligence Server must be running for users to retrieve information from your data warehouse using MicroStrategy Web products.

which together provide a flexible reporting environment. and so on. A project also represents the intersection of a data source. A project: • • Determines the set of data warehouse tables to be used. metrics. sales distribution. prompts. Projects are often used to separate data from a data warehouse into smaller sections of related data that fit user requirements. • • A project can contain any number of reports in addition to a number of other objects that support simple and advanced reporting requirements. Security objects include security filters. and so on. attributes. Contains all schema objects used to interpret the data in those tables.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide MicroStrategy project A project is where you build and store all schema objects and information you need to create application objects such as reports in the MicroStrategy environment. privileges. inventory. hierarchies. Inc. security roles. and 14 The MicroStrategy platform © 2007 MicroStrategy. and reports that you can create using schema objects such as attributes and facts. you may have a project source separated into four different projects with analysis areas such as human resources. Contains all reporting objects used to create reports and analyze the data. projects appear one level below project sources in the Folder List. Schema objects are discussed in later chapters in this guide. For example. including application objects such as filters. access control. Reporting objects include metrics. . and therefore the set of data available to be analyzed. and user community. Conceptually. In MicroStrategy Desktop. Report objects are covered in the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide and the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. metadata repository. and so on. filters. reports. Schema objects include facts. a project the environment in which all related reporting is done. A project can contain many types of objects. Security and other project-level administrative features are discussed in the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. Defines the security scheme for the user community that accesses these objects.

• The procedures associated with these concepts are explained in Creating the project. In the project.Project Design Guide BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform 1 customer satisfaction. determined by the project source through which you create the project. you can then create schema objects based on the columns and tables in the warehouse. one of the connections you create is between the project and your data warehouse. The project design process 15 . This allows all of your users in the human resources department to use the human resources project and they do not have to look through inventory data that they are not interested in. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. The project design process When you create a project in MicroStrategy Desktop. The project’s warehouse location is specified by associating it with the appropriate database instance. Some key concepts to understand before you begin creating a project are as follows: • A project is created within a specified metadata repository. page 73.

It is important to keep this in mind as you design your project and plan for the next phase of development. . and project creation. Designing a project is very rarely a single. linear process.1 BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform Project Design Guide The diagram below shows this high-level view of data modeling. 16 The project design process © 2007 MicroStrategy. schema design and implementation. which are each covered in the following chapters: Notice that the project design process includes a feedback loop. As projects are deployed and tested. Inc. new user requirements and project enhancements require modification to the initial project design.

This is different from the physical data model or warehouse schema. A logical data model is similar in concept to using a map and an itinerary when going on a trip. You also need a plan that is visible and laid out correctly. Inc. For example. THE LOGICAL DATA MODEL Conceptualizing your business model and the data on which to report Introduction Devising a model of your business data can help you analyze the structure of the data. which arranges data for efficient database use. a simple logical data model for a retail company can organize all necessary © 2007 MicroStrategy. This chapter describes one of the major components of data modeling: the logical data model. You need to know where you are going and how to get there.2 2. A logical data model is a logical arrangement of data as experienced by the general user or business analyst. how its various parts interact. The logical data model graphically depicts the flow and structure of data in a business environment. providing a way of organizing data so it can be analyzed from different business perspectives. and can also help you decide what you intend to learn from the data. 17 .

As the MicroStrategy platform does not require you to define dimensions explicitly. The reason that a logical data model must be independent of technology is because technology is changing so rapidly.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide facts by store. which are three common business perspectives typically associated with a retail business. While a multidimensional data model must have at least one dimension. If you are familiar with multidimensional data modeling. The scope and complexity of a logical data model depends on the requirements of the reporting needs of the user community and the availability of source data. a logical data model may or may not have any explicitly defined dimensions. 18 © 2007 MicroStrategy. and you do not need to start over completely. the more complex the logical data model becomes. product. This is the key concept of the logical data model. and time. Logical data models are independent of a physical data storage device. but the blueprint remains the same. The more sophisticated and complex the reporting requirements and source data. logical data modeling is similar to multidimensional data modeling. the word logical is a more accurate term than multidimensional. . What occurs under the logical data model can change with need or with technology. Inc.

and relationships of data in a technical. 19 . conceptual. This process can help you think about the various elements that compose your company’s business data and how those elements relate to one another. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 The logical data modeling process produces a diagram similar to the one shown in the following diagram: A logical data model represents the definition. or business environment. characteristics. Inc.

This is usually one of the first steps in designing a project. page 21 Attributes: Context for your levels of data. . Inc. A logical data model is a graphic representation of the following concepts: • • • Facts: Business data and measurements. and also general instructions and guidelines for creating these models. page 25 20 © 2007 MicroStrategy.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide Devising a logical data model for your business intelligence environment allows you to then consider various ways to physically store the business data in the data warehouse. the elements that exist within them. page 22 Hierarchies: Data relationship organization. as shown in the following diagram: This chapter provides conceptual information about logical data models.

For example. and Account Balance are some examples of facts you can use as business measurements. Facts allow you to access data stored in a data warehouse and they form the basis for the majority of users’ analysis and report requirements.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 Facts: Business data and measurements One of the first things you do when you create a logical data model is to determine the facts. Inventory. They can come from different source systems and they can have different levels of detail.CALL_CTR_ID in (5. data. facts exist as columns within the fact tables. such as SUM and AVG. you can capture sales data in one system and track it daily. while you capture stock and inventory data in another system and track it weekly. For example.EMP_ID) WHERE a22. To those familiar with SQL. in the following SQL statement. Conceptually. you can think of facts as business measurements.ORDER_AMT) EMP_NAME FROM ORDER_FACT a21 JOIN LU_EMPLOYEE a22 ON (a21.EMP_ID = a22. Facts are the building blocks used to create business measurements or metrics from which to derive insight into your data. Inc. Sales. the ORDER_AMT column in the warehouse may correspond to the Order Amount fact in the MicroStrategy environment: SELECT sum(a21. or variables that are typically numeric and suitable for aggregation. The rest of data modeling consists mostly of providing context for the data that facts provide access to. 12) © 2007 MicroStrategy. facts are schema objects that relate data values (typically numeric data) from the data warehouse to the MicroStrategy reporting environment. In MicroStrategy. facts generally represent the numeric columns in database tables on which you perform SQL aggregations. In a data warehouse. 9. Facts: Business data and measurements 21 .

They are used to answer business questions about facts at varying levels of detail. if your sales data is stored at the day level. such as national. or a single store Attributes provide context and levels for convenient summarization and qualification of your data to help answer the type of questions listed above. consider the sales figures of your company. while ORDER_AMT is the fact. To those familiar with SQL. For example. If you were informed that your company had sales of $10. attributes generally represent the non-numeric and non-aggregatable columns in database tables.000. regional. refer to Chapter 5.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide In addition. Attributes allow you to answer questions about a fact and provide a context for reporting and analyzing those facts. . local. you can gather little useful information.ORDER_AMT) represents a metric. Metrics are discussed in detail in the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts. 22 Attributes: Context for your levels of data © 2007 MicroStrategy. which are business calculations often built using facts. a Month attribute allows you to see the same sales data summarized at the month level. For example. you would need to know more about the source of that sales figure such as: • • • • A time frame for the sales Who and how many people contributed to the sales total What products were sold from which departments The scope of the sale. Fore a more complete discussion about facts. These columns are used to qualify and group fact data. To make the sales figure meaningful. Inc. Attributes: Context for your levels of data After the facts are determined. sum(a21. the attributes must be identified.

2005 and 2006 are elements of the Year attribute while New York and London are elements of the City attribute. Attribute elements: Data level values Attribute elements are the unique values or contents of an attribute. sum(a11. © 2007 MicroStrategy.200203) GROUP BY al1. page 36. max(a12.MONTH_DESC) MONTH_DESC.MONTH_ID Attribute forms contain additional descriptive information about a given attribute and are discussed in terms of the logical data model in Attribute forms. Attribute elements also allow you to qualify on data to retrieve specific results. in the following SQL statement. the MONTH_ID column in the warehouse maps to the Month attribute in the MicroStrategy environment: SELECT a11.200202.MONTH_ID in (200201. For a complete discussion about attributes.MONTH_ID MONTH_ID. a Customer attribute allows you to see sales data at the customer level and you can qualify on the elements of the Customer attribute to see sales data for groups such as customers with last names beginning with the letter h. attributes are used to build the report and the attribute elements are displayed in rows or columns on the executed report. For example.MONTH_ID = a12. Attributes: Context for your levels of data 23 . On a report. Inc. For example.TOT_DOLLAR_SALES) DLRSALES FROM MNTH_CATEGORY_SLS a11 join LU_MONTH a12 on (a11.MONTH_ID) WHERE a11. refer to Chapter 6.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 For example. The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes.

Attribute elements are discussed in more detail in Unique sets of attribute information: Attribute elements. there is no interaction between data. as the project designer. as well as how each of them relates to the other attributes. The relationships give meaning to the data by providing logical associations of attributes based on business rules. they are necessary in understanding attribute relationships. Every direct relationship between attributes has two parts—a parent and a child. are essential to the logical data model. Without relationships. page 140. which are associations between attributes that specify how attributes are connected. . Inc. Attribute relationships. to have a solid understanding of all the attributes in the project.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide The following diagram shows some examples of attributes and attribute elements. A child must always have a parent and a parent can have multiple children. Attribute relationships Building an effective project in MicroStrategy requires you. The parent attribute is at a 24 Attributes: Context for your levels of data © 2007 MicroStrategy. By recognizing and understanding the elements of an attribute. and therefore no logical structure. Although attribute elements are not included in the logical data model. you can better design your data model and project.

if you want to create a report that shows information about customer purchases in a particular year. Inc. For example. Year is the parent attribute and Quarter is the child. which represent the level at which a fact is stored. Month. Year and Quarter are attributes that are usually directly related to each other. However. For example. In a logical data model. Therefore. page 26 below. you can group the attributes Year. One year has many quarters and both attributes are in the Time hierarchy. attributes. page 159. along with more detailed information about attribute relationships. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Attributes are either related or unrelated to each other. A graphical example of how facts. are discussed in Attribute relationships. Examples of related and unrelated attributes. in a relationship between Year and Quarter. Year and Customer are attributes that are usually not in the same hierarchy and are not directly related to each other. there must be some way to determine how these two attributes are related. and hierarchies are related and form a complete logical data model is shown in the section Sample data model. It is the existence of a fact that ties the Time hierarchy to the Customer hierarchy.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 higher logical level than the child is. hierarchies contain attributes that are directly related to each other. In this case. They are identified by multiple attributes. For example. the fact is a customer purchase. and Day to form the Time hierarchy. Hierarchies: Data relationship organization 25 . Hierarchies: Data relationship organization Hierarchies in a logical data model are ordered groupings of attributes arranged to reflect their relationship with other attributes. Attributes in one hierarchy are not directly related to attributes in another hierarchy. facts exist at the intersection of hierarchies. Usually the best design for a hierarchy is to organize or group attributes into logical business areas. Year and Customer are related through a fact.

2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide For a complete discussion about hierarchies. relationships. The following diagram is an example of a logical data model: Building a logical data model The first thing you must do before creating a logical data model is study the factors that influence your design. and hierarchies—a logical data model begins to take shape. Inc. refer to Chapter 7. Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. . attributes. Some of the things to consider when creating a logical data model are • • • User requirements Existing source systems Converting source data to analytical data 26 Sample data model © 2007 MicroStrategy. Sample data model When all of the components are placed in a single diagram—facts.

Lower-level managers are typically more interested in data about their particular areas of responsibility. you can derive additional data not found in the source systems. additional user requirements can be encountered after deploying a project as users encounter areas for enhancement. to satisfy user requirements. Sometimes. These managers may want reports about their specific region or store over short-and long-terms. you must consider all the potential users and how to accommodate their varied requirements. page 28. When creating the logical data model. where additional questions and concerns arise with each draft of the logical data model. Developing such a model involves the following: • • • Identification of user requirements Design of solutions Evaluation of those solutions Logical data modeling is a reiterative process. as explained in Existing source systems. new user requirements may require you to modify the logical data model to better support the type of analysis and the retrieval of data that users demand. company executives are typically interested in overall trends and may want reports showing data aggregated across the company and over a long period of time. In some cases. User requirements are an important part of the initial project design process. However. In some cases. lack of data in the source systems can limit user requirements.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 User requirements The primary goal of logical data modeling is to meet the needs of your users’ reporting requirements. For example. Your user community can consist of people with vastly different requirements. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. Building a logical data model 27 .

Conversely. Existing data is usually abundant. most logical models begin with an examination of the source data once existing systems are developed and 28 Building a logical data model © 2007 MicroStrategy. State and region do not appear in the existing source data and so you need to extract them from another source. you may not find all the facts and attributes to meet your needs within the data itself. . consisting of a large number of facts and attributes. You must determine what facts and attributes in the existing data are necessary for supporting the decision support requirements of your user community. an insurance company’s transactional system records data by customer and city. you can build the logical data model based heavily on current user requirements. Inc. but a substantial portion of the work in creating a suitable logical data model involves determining what additional components are required to satisfy the needs of the user community. users also want to see data at the monthly or yearly level. attributes. Converting source data to analytical data If there are no existing systems and you are just beginning your data warehousing initiative. Although some data may not exist in a source system. In this case. you can plan additional attributes to provide the levels at which you intend to analyze the facts in your data model. and relationships. although data is stored at a daily level in the source system. The existing data should suggest a number of facts. However. User requirements should drive the decision on what to include and what to exclude. but the business analysts want to see data for different states or regions. While a review of your data is initially helpful in identifying components of your logical data model.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide Existing source systems Understanding what data is available is an important step in creating a logical data model. this does not mean that it should not be included in the logical data model. everything you find in the source data does not necessarily need to be included in the logical data model. Additionally. For example.

item. Inc. The source data usually has some sort of documented physical structure. can be © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 32 The details in these steps are related to using an existing source system. the steps to create a logical data model are as follows: • • • • Step 1: Identify the facts. meaning that a sale takes place in a particular store. For example. Remember that facts can be calculated and are usually numeric and aggregatable. in this guide the logical data model also takes into account how your data can be integrated into MicroStrategy to develop a business intelligence solution. sales facts are often stored at the store. sales and profit figures. however. most OLTP systems have an entity relationship diagram (ERD). for a particular item. on a particular day. However.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 implemented. or day level. page 30 Step 3: Determine attribute relationships. for example. For example. determine the business level at which each fact is recorded. Building a logical data model 29 . Whether you start from nothing or have an existing source system to use. A logical data model is similar in concept to an ERD. Step 1: Identify the facts Using your existing data. page 29 Step 2: Identify the attributes. An ERD provides a graphical representation of the physical structure of the data in the source system. in retail models. make a list of all data that can be represented as facts in MicroStrategy. page 31 Step 4: Define hierarchies. After you have all the facts listed. which lets you easily recognize tables and columns and the data stored in those columns. A product inventory fact.

Step 2: Identify the attributes Uncover attributes by considering the levels at which you would like to view the facts on your reports. your users are interested in analyzing data at more than just at the day level.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide stored at the region. but such considerations should be taken into account during your initial project design initiative. item. in the existing data there may be fact data recorded only at the day level. This analysis requires MicroStrategy to aggregate the sales data from the day level to the year level. you can include an aggregate table that stores sales data at the year level (see Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables. For example. This information may only be apparent to you after you deploy your project and you determine that a high percentage of your users are viewing sales data at the yearly level. or week level. 30 Building a logical data model © 2007 MicroStrategy. This practice is sometimes a reaction to user requirements established after project deployment. Start by looking at the levels at which each fact is recorded and build from there. . They also want to view their data at the year. However. page 241). You can then design a Year attribute for your project. Inc. and week levels. These business levels become the attributes in your logical data model (see Step 2: Identify the attributes. page 30). To improve performance and meet the requirements of the majority of your users. month.

Additionally. This one-to-many relationship specifies that. Opportunity Open Date. Building a logical data model 31 . These attributes are all related to the Opportunity attribute because they all answer questions about opportunity information. It is usually unnecessary to bring all data from the source system into the analytical environment. For example. and Month has a one-to-many relationship to Day. you must then determine which attributes are related to each other. for every year. in the Sales Force Analysis Module of the MicroStrategy BIDK opportunity information is stored with an Opportunity attribute which is directly related to the attributes Opportunity Close Date. in the diagram below. Only include facts and attributes that can serve your user community. you should determine the type of relationship. Primary Competitor. Step 3: Determine attribute relationships Once you have identified your data to be defined as attributes in MicroStrategy. and for every month. several dates exist.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 Be careful not to include more facts and attributes than necessary. you can always add more attributes and facts later. several months exist. if necessary. For example. Year has a one-to-many relationship to Month. Inc. and so on. From the reverse perspective the same relationship specifies that. Logical data modeling is an iterative process. for a number of dates (in a © 2007 MicroStrategy.

. such as an ERD.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide form such as 12/01/2005). Step 4: Define hierarchies Hierarchies provide a structure for your data and can help your users easily and intuitively browse for related attributes and include them in a report. and so on) and not directly connected to a year (Dec 2005. page 24. and so on) then the relationship would become many-to-many. Attribute relationships are discussed in detail in Attribute relationships. This example may not accurately define how you store time information. In the context of a logical data model. Jan 2006. you can organize all time-related attributes into the Time hierarchy. If you define the attribute Month as simply the month name (Dec. You can 32 Building a logical data model © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. only one month exists (in a form such as Dec 2005). If you have documentation for the existing data. Jan. and for a number of months. Consider the Year to Month attribute relationship type of one-to-many. it is likely that the documentation provides some additional details about the nature of the data and any inherent relationships. only one year exists. For example. think of hierarchies as logical arrangements of attributes into business areas.

Depending on the complexity of your data and the nature of your business. It is possible that all the data is directly related. help with system maintenance. Although the user community is the ultimate beneficiary of a © 2007 MicroStrategy. Logical data modeling conventions There are numerous logical data modeling conventions you can use to enhance your logical data model. Inc. Again. the requirements of your user community should help you determine what hierarchies are necessary. and make for a more robust logical data model. you may have very few hierarchies or you may have many. Logical data modeling conventions 33 .Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 have a Customer hierarchy containing all attributes related to your customers and a Supplier hierarchy for all attributes related to supplier data. in which case you may have one big hierarchy. These include: • • • Unique identifiers Cardinalities and ratios Attribute forms These logical modeling conventions can provide cues for system optimization opportunities.

Each convention adds more information about the data to the logical data model. This information can help define primary keys in the physical warehouse schema (see Uniquely identifying data in tables with key structures. Unique identifiers denote the key that maps an attribute to its source data in the source system. when applicable. . administrators.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide well-optimized and maintained system. This additional information can be particularly useful to a person learning about the system. these conventions are primarily intended for project designers. page 42). and advanced report designers. Remember that facts are usually identified by multiple attributes and therefore will have multiple unique identifiers. Some attributes rely on more than 34 Logical data modeling conventions © 2007 MicroStrategy. The following diagram shows a logical data model with unique identifiers added. Unique identifiers An additional modeling convention is to add unique identifiers for each attribute and fact. Inc.

which are discussed in Chapter 7. Cardinalities and ratios Another enhancement to the logical data model is the addition of cardinalities and ratios for each attribute. Inc. Cardinalities help the database administrator estimate the size of the data warehouse and help project designers determine the best paths for users to navigate through the data using hierarchies in MicroStrategy. which requires both the Item_ID and Class_ID columns to uniquely identify its elements. Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. Logical data modeling conventions 35 . For example. Ratios can be particularly helpful when trying to © 2007 MicroStrategy. note the Item attribute.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 one ID column to identify its elements. Cardinality is the number of unique elements for an attribute and ratios are the ratios between the cardinalities of related attributes.

For example. Inc.2 The Logical Data Model Project Design Guide decide where creating aggregate tables will be most effective. The following diagram shows a logical data model which includes cardinalities and ratios. This additional information can be invaluable to database administrators and project designers. Note the cardinalities in the upper right corner of each attribute rectangle and the ratios next to some of the relationships between attributes. . Attribute forms Including attribute forms in your logical data model can help you get a more complete view of all of the information that is made available in your project. this is because this information varies and is unpredictable. 36 Logical data modeling conventions © 2007 MicroStrategy. it is impossible to determine how many customers have different dates of birth in the warehouse. Also note that the cardinality of some attributes such as Date of Birth are unknown.

each with a one-to-one relationship to the Customer attribute. you could have included each of these pieces of information as separate attributes. In reality. Logical data modeling conventions 37 . you create an attribute called Customer to represent customers in your system.Project Design Guide The Logical Data Model 2 Attribute forms contain additional descriptive information about a given attribute. these attributes simply provide additional information about the Customer attribute. you store the following information about your customers: • • • • • Customer number (some numeric code used to uniquely identify customers) First name Last name Address Email address In your logical data model. and in the data. Inc. and it is part of the Customer hierarchy. When a one-to-one relationship exists between an attribute and one of its descriptions. Each element of the Customer attribute represents a different customer. though. they do not represent different levels within the Customer hierarchy. For example. you can model these additional © 2007 MicroStrategy.

2

The Logical Data Model

Project Design Guide

pieces of descriptive information as attribute forms. The following diagram shows how you add attribute forms to a logical data model:

Attribute forms are discussed in terms of their role in MicroStrategy in Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms, page 143.

38 Logical data modeling conventions

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3
3.

Physical Warehouse Schema

WAREHOUSE STRUCTURE FOR YOUR LOGICAL DATA MODEL

Introduction
As discussed in the previous chapter, the logical data model can help you think about the logical structure of your business data and the many relationships that exist within that information. The physical warehouse schema is based on the logical data model. It is a detailed graphic representation of your business data as it is stored in the data warehouse. The physical warehouse schema organizes the logical data model in a method that makes sense from a database perspective. In contrast, the logical data model is a logical arrangement of data from the perspective of the general user or business analyst. For more information on what a logical data model is and how to create one, see Chapter 2, The Logical Data Model. The logical data model is only concerned with logical objects of the business model, such as Day, Item, Store, or Account. Several physical warehouse schemas can be derived from the same logical data model. The structure of the schema
39

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

Project Design Guide

depends on how the data representing those logical objects are to be stored in the warehouse. For example you can store logical objects in the same table, in separate tables, duplicated across several tables, or in some other arrangement. While the logical data model tells you what facts and attributes to create, the physical warehouse schema tells you where the underlying data for those objects is stored. The physical warehouse schema describes how your data is stored in the data warehouse and how it can be retrieved for analysis. Creating a physical warehouse schema is the next step in organizing your business data before you create a project, as shown below:

The key components that make up the physical warehouse schema are columns and tables. Columns and tables in the physical warehouse schema represent facts and attributes from the logical data model. The rows in a table represent attribute elements and fact data.

40

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

3

Columns: Data identifiers and values
Columns are fields in the warehouse that contain attribute and fact data. The types of columns are: • ID columns contain attribute element identification codes. These codes are typically numeric because computers can process numbers much more rapidly than text. All attributes must have an ID column. Description columns contain descriptions (text or numeric) of attribute elements. Description columns are optional. An ID column can serve a dual purpose as both an ID and description. Date is one example of an attribute that usually does not have a description column. The majority of attributes typically have an ID column and at least one description column. If an attribute has many attribute forms—additional descriptive information about a given attribute—they are represented by additional description columns. • Fact columns contain fact data.

Tables: Physical groupings of related data
The different types of tables are • • • Lookup tables: Attribute storage, page 43 Relate tables: A unique case for relating attributes, page 45 Fact tables: Fact data and levels of aggregation, page 46

While each type of table may function differently within the data warehouse, each type of table can be assigned a primary key that uniquely identifies the elements within the given table.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Columns: Data identifiers and values

41

3

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

Project Design Guide

Uniquely identifying data in tables with key structures
In relational databases, each table has a primary key that creates a unique value identifying each distinct data record or row. This applies to every type of table within the data warehouse. The types of keys that can be assigned to a table include: • • Simple key requires only one column to identify a record uniquely within a table. Compound key requires multiple columns to identify a unique record.

Which key structure you use to identify a unique attribute in a table depends on the nature of your data and business requirements. The following diagram shows how the different key structures can be used to identify a calling center.

The simple key shows how you can identify a calling center with only its Call_Ctr_id. This means that every calling center has its own unique ID. In the compound key, calling centers are identified by both Call_Ctr_id and Region_id. This means that two calling centers from different regions can share the same Call_Ctr_id. For example, there can be a calling center with ID 1 in region A, and another calling center with ID 1 in region B. In this case, you cannot identify a unique calling center without knowing both the Call_Ctr_id and the Region_id. Simple keys are generally easier to handle in the data warehouse than are compound keys because they require less storage space and they allow for simpler SQL. Compound

42 Tables: Physical groupings of related data

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

3

keys tend to increase SQL query complexity, query time, and required storage space. However, compound keys have a more efficient ETL process. Which key structure you use for a particular attribute depends entirely on the nature of the data and your system. Consider what key structures work best when creating lookup tables in the physical warehouse schema.

Lookup tables: Attribute storage
Lookup tables are the physical representation of attributes. They provide the ability to aggregate data at different levels. Lookup tables store the information for an attribute in ID and description columns (see Columns: Data identifiers and values, page 41). Depending on how you choose to organize the physical schema, a lookup table can store information for one or more related attributes. If a table only stores data about one attribute, it is said to be a normalized table. If a table holds data about multiple attributes, it is said to be a denormalized table. The following diagram shows the different ways in which you can organize the same attribute information. Notice that the denormalized table holds the exact same data as the normalized tables. While the denormalized table consolidates

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Tables: Physical groupings of related data

43

3

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

Project Design Guide

information about attributes within one table, the normalized tables each contain only a subset of all of the information about the attributes.

You can use either structure for any table in the physical warehouse schema, though each structure has its advantages and disadvantages, as explained in the following sections and outlined in the table in Schema type comparisons, page 60.

Attribute relationships and lookup table structure
Attribute relationships are a major factor in determining the structure of lookup tables in a physical warehouse schema. In general, the following guidelines apply: • One-to-one relationships usually denote the existence of an attribute form. The description column of an attribute form should simply be included as an additional column in the attribute’s lookup table. Many-to-many relationships usually require the use of a relate table distinct from either attribute lookup table. A relate table should include the ID columns of the two attributes in question. For more information on how to use relate tables, see Relate tables: A unique case for relating attributes, page 45.

44 Tables: Physical groupings of related data

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

3

Relate tables: A unique case for relating attributes
While lookup tables store information about attributes, relate tables store information about the relationship between two attributes. Relate tables contain the ID columns of two or more attributes, thus defining associations between them. Relate tables are often used to create relationships between attributes that have a many-to-many relationship to each other. With attributes whose direct relationship is one-to-many—in which every element of a parent attribute can relate to multiple elements of a child attribute—you define parent-child relationships by placing the ID column of the parent attribute in the lookup table of the child attribute. The parent ID column in the child table is called a foreign key. This technique allows you to define relationships between attributes in the attributes’ lookup tables, creating tables that function as both lookup tables and relate tables as shown in the following diagram:

In the case of a many-to-many relationship—in which multiple elements of a parent attribute can relate to multiple elements of a child attribute—you must create a separate relate table as shown in the following diagram:

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Tables: Physical groupings of related data

45

3

Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model

Project Design Guide

Fact tables: Fact data and levels of aggregation
Fact tables are used to store fact data. Since attributes provide context for fact values, both fact columns and attribute ID columns are included in fact tables. Facts help to link indirectly related attributes. The attribute ID columns included in a fact table represent the level at which the facts in that table are stored. For example, fact tables containing sales and inventory data look like the tables shown in the following diagram:

For more details on the level of aggregation of your fact data, see Fact table levels: The context of your data, page 48.

46 Tables: Physical groupings of related data

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The following diagram shows an example of a fact table and base fact columns: • Derived fact columns are created through a mathematical combination of other existing fact columns. Also. and Discount fact columns. including Item_Mnth_Sls and City_Ctr_Sls. © 2007 MicroStrategy. the derived fact Tot_Dollar_Sales is created using the Qty_Sold. Unit_Price. Tables: Physical groupings of related data 47 . the derived fact exists in several tables.Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 Base fact columns versus derived fact columns The types of fact columns are base fact columns and derived fact columns: • Base fact columns are represented by a single column in a fact table. The following diagram shows an example of a fact table and how you can create a derived fact column from base fact columns: In the example. Inc.

The disadvantage is that derived fact columns require more storage space and more time during the ETL process. which translates into simpler SQL and a speedier query at report run time. . see How facts are defined. Metrics allow you to perform calculations and aggregations on fact data from one or more fact columns. The Sales and Inventory facts can be analyzed at the item.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide Because facts in different fact tables are typically stored at different levels. and Call_Ctr_id columns in the table above represent practical levels at which sales and inventory data can be analyzed on a report. Fact table levels: The context of your data Facts and fact tables have an associated level based on the attribute ID columns included in the fact table. There are advantages and disadvantages to consider when deciding if you should create a derived fact column. Day_id. You can create the same type of data analysis in MicroStrategy with the use of metrics. The advantage of storing derived fact columns in the warehouse is that the calculation of data is previously performed and stored separately. For more information on the different types of facts in MicroStrategy and how they are defined. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. The Item_id. Inc. and call center levels because those levels exist as ID columns in the fact table. the following image shows two facts with an Item/Day/Call Center level. 48 Tables: Physical groupings of related data © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 97. day. For example. derived fact columns can only contain fact columns from the same fact table. For more information on what metrics are and how to create them.

Fact tables should only include attribute ID columns that represent levels at which you intend to analyze the specific fact data. and in one source system regions are identified by column name Region_id and in the other the column name is Reg_id.Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 You do not need to include more lookup column IDs than are necessary for a given fact table. as shown in the diagram below. Homogeneous versus heterogeneous column naming Suppose the data warehouse has information from two source systems. For example. These naming inconsistencies occur because source systems use different naming conventions to name the data they collect. Inc. The levels at which facts are stored become especially important when you begin to have complex queries with multiple facts in multiple tables that are stored at levels different from one another. and when a reporting request involves still a different level. This is called heterogeneous column naming. they store the same data: information about regions. this is because analyzing inventory data at the customer level does not result in a practical business calculation. Though the Region_id and Reg_id columns have different names. © 2007 MicroStrategy. notice that the table above does not include the Customer_id column. You must be able to support fact reporting at the business levels which users require. Tables: Physical groupings of related data 49 .

For consistency.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide The data for the Lookup_Region table came from a different source system than the data for the Lookup_Call_Ctr and the source systems have different naming conventions. heterogeneous columns must be mapped to their corresponding facts and attributes. When you define facts and attributes in MicroStrategy Desktop. if you create a Region attribute given the tables in the example above. In this case. the Region_ID column has the same name in both tables. you must map both the Region_id and Reg_id columns to the attribute so all information about regions is calculated correctly and displayed on reports when the Region attribute is used. In order for reports to retrieve accurate and complete results. as shown in the following diagram: 50 Tables: Physical groupings of related data © 2007 MicroStrategy. it is a good idea for columns that contain the same data to have the same column name. This explains why the same information about regions is represented by two columns with different names. consider the heterogeneous column names that may exist in your source systems. Inc. For example. . This is called homogeneous column naming.

Inc. is used to organize the physical schema to enhance query performance while maintaining and acceptable amount of data storage space. These schema types are: • • • Highly normalized schema: Minimal storage space Moderately normalized schema: Balanced storage space and query performance Highly denormalized schema: Enhanced query performance Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage © 2007 MicroStrategy. A fact column may or may not have the same name in different tables.Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 Just as it is possible for the same attribute data to exist in different lookup tables. How you choose to structure the warehouse depends on the nature of your data. and the requirements of your user community. Typically. one of the schema types. as shown below: Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage There are many ways to structure your data warehouse and no method is inherently right or wrong. 51 . it is also possible for the same fact data to exist in different fact tables. or a combination of them. the available storage space.

lookup tables contain unique developer-designed attribute keys.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide In each of these schemas a base fact table and any number of aggregate fact tables are used (For more information on aggregate fact tables. They also contain attribute description columns. such as Call_Ctr_id. Fact table keys consist of attribute keys relevant to the level of data stored in the table. The sections below are not meant to be an exhaustive list of all possible schema types. page 241). the number of joins required to build your queries affects the performance of those queries. The most obvious drawback is that redundant data requires more storage space to hold the same amount of data as a system with no redundancy. Data redundancy also makes updating data a more intensive and difficult process because data resides in multiple places. but as with any operation performed on your data warehouse. the sections below are meant to give a description of the most common or general schema types that are used to develop a physical warehouse schema. The schema examples that follow show data at the Item/Call Center/Date level. Dist_Ctr_id. Inc. When comparing the different schema types. Dist_Ctr_desc. such as Call_Ctr_desc. and Region_id. see Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables. . and 52 Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage © 2007 MicroStrategy. With no data redundancy. However. • Highly normalized schema: Minimal storage space The following diagram is an example of a highly normalized schema. you should keep in mind the following concepts: • Redundant data can cause a couple of drawbacks. data only has to be updated in a single place. as shown in the figure below. • Joins are SQL operations that are required to combine two tables together in order to retrieve data. These operations are necessary. In highly normalized schemas.

© 2007 MicroStrategy. Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage 53 .Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 Region_desc. such as Dist_Ctr_id in the Lookup_Call_Ctr table. the lookup table for an attribute contains the ID column of the parent attribute. Also. Inc.

. numerous joins are required to retrieve information about the higher-level tables. When accessing higher-level lookup tables such as Lookup_Region in the example above. However. multiple tables must be joined until the required column is found. The difference 54 Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage © 2007 MicroStrategy. Moderately normalized schema: Balanced storage space and query performance The following diagram shows an example of a moderately normalized schema. Inc.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide The following diagram shows what physical lookup tables look like in the warehouse: One benefit of using a highly normalized schema is that it requires minimal storage space in the warehouse because of it uses smaller lookup tables than the other schema types. This schema type has the same basic structure as the highly normalized schema. there is a drawback to using only small tables in the data warehouse. This is because each table contains only a small amount of information about a given attribute. therefore.

Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 here is the higher-level attribute ID columns are present within all tables of related attributes. Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage 55 . Region_id is included in the Lookup_Call_Ctr table. For example. Inc. © 2007 MicroStrategy.

With 56 Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using a moderately normalized schema provides a balance between the pros and cons of normalized and denormalized schema types. Because the ID columns of both the parents and grandparents of an attribute exist in multiple tables. since some tables contain the same ID columns (as shown above with the Region_ID column). A highly denormalized schema has the same basic structure as the other two schema types. the tables within this type of schema take up some redundant storage space in the warehouse. Highly denormalized schema: Enhanced query performance The following diagram is an example of a highly denormalized schema. fewer joins are required when retrieving information about an attribute. Inc. . However.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide The fact table structure within a moderately normalized schema is identical to that of the highly normalized schema. The following diagram shows what the physical lookup tables look like in the warehouse.

For example. However. not only are higher-level attribute ID columns present within all related tables. this schema type requires the largest amount of storage space within the warehouse because of its large lookup tables. Region_desc is included in the Lookup_Call_Ctr table.Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 this type. Using a highly denormalized schema further reduces the joins necessary to retrieve attribute descriptions. © 2007 MicroStrategy. and Region along with Sales Dollars in the same report while only having to join the Lookup_Call_CTR and Fact_Sales tables. Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage 57 . Distribution Center. you can include the descriptions of Call Center. High denormalized schemas also cause the highest level of data redundancy. This is possible because Lookup_Call_CTR contains all information (including description data) for Call Center as well as for Distribution Center and Region. but the description columns are present as well. Inc. For example.

. Arranging the warehouse schema this way produces a star schema. In a star schema. only one lookup table is used to contain all of the attribute IDs and description columns for a given hierarchy. the amount of join operations are reduced by using a star schema. as shown below: As with any schema type model there are advantages and disadvantages to using a star schema. the lookup tables are consolidated so that every attribute ID and description column for a given hierarchy exists in one table. star schemas can often 58 Schema types: Data retrieval performance versus redundant storage © 2007 MicroStrategy.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide Star schema: Consolidating lookup tables When using the highly denormalized schema. A star schema can also reduce the amount of storage space necessary in a highly denormalized schema. In this type of schema. However. each hierarchy (for example. however. it is possible to eliminate most of the lookup tables and leave just a few. Recall that in a highly denormalized schema. geography) consists of several lookup tables. as shown below. As with a highly denormalized schema type. Inc.

Design trade-offs Constructing a logical data model and physical warehouse schema is an iterative process of compromises and trade-offs. This results in an increased load on the warehouse. You must decide which factors are most important in your particular environment and weigh them against the other factors. If you try to satisfy every single user requirement from the simplest to the most complex.Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 require large lookup tables that can take a more time to search than the smaller tables that are used in the other schema types. Design trade-offs 59 . Inc. The following diagram shows the three major requirements that must be balanced to create an effective system. However. you will have to create an extensive data model and schema to support those requirements. slower query performance. SQL queries directed at a consolidated table require the use of a DISTINCT operator and these types of queries tend to be very © 2007 MicroStrategy. and greater maintenance for the database administrator. if you have the storage space necessary to accommodate data in a star schema it may seem that you would never want to normalize your schema. For example. Each of these categories affects the others.

You can even use different schema types within the same hierarchy. The table below compares the different schema types. In addition to the previous points. page 241. page 60.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide expensive in terms of database resources and processing time. Schema type comparisons One way to achieve a balance of the various trade-offs in your schema design is to use a variety of schema types in your physical warehouse schema. you may need higher level lookup tables to take advantage of aggregate tables. Inc. Schema Type Highly normalized schema Lookup Table Structure • Attribute ID • Attribute description column • ID column of parent • Attribute ID • Attribute description column • ID column of parent • ID column of grandparents Advantages Minimal storage space and minimal data redundancy which makes updating data less intensive than for the other schema types Greatly reduces the number of joins necessary to relate an attribute to its grandparents as compared to a highly normalized schema Disadvantages Requires numerous joins to retrieve information from higher-level lookup tables Moderately normalized schema Requires some redundant storage 60 Schema type comparisons © 2007 MicroStrategy. which are discussed in Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables. For more comparisons between the different schema types described in this chapter. see the following section Schema type comparisons. The use of a resource-intensive DISTINCT query could therefore negate any performance gain achieved by reducing the number of joins between higher-level lookup tables. One hierarchy can be highly normalized while another can be highly denormalized. .

Inc. Schema type comparisons 61 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. As facts and attributes are the cornerstones of the reports you intend to create using MicroStrategy. you can learn about these same schema objects in terms of how they exist in the MicroStrategy environment.Project Design Guide Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model 3 Schema Type Highly denormalized schema Lookup Table Structure • Attribute ID • Attribute description column • ID column of parent • description column of parent • ID column of grandparents • description column of grandparents • Consolidates an entire hierarchy into a single lookup table Advantages Further reduces joins necessary to retrieve attribute descriptions as compared to a moderately normalized schema Disadvantages Requires the most storage space and redundant data requires a more intensive process to update Star schema • Further reduces joins necessary to retrieve attribute descriptions as compared to a moderately normalized schema • Requires less storage space and data redundancy than a highly denormalized schema and thus data is easier to update Large lookup tables can negatively affect query performance when searching tables and requiring DISTINCT operations to be performed Now that you have gained an understanding of data modeling and the roles of facts and attributes. it is essential to understand the structure of each of these schema objects before creating a project.

.3 Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model Project Design Guide 62 Schema type comparisons © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc.

This chapter guides you through the first few major steps involved in creating a project in MicroStrategy. Inc.4 4. access the MicroStrategy Tutorial provided with the MicroStrategy platform. BI Architecture and the MicroStrategy Platform. see Chapter 1. you are ready to create a project in MicroStrategy. The Tutorial is a sample data warehouse and demonstration project you can use to learn about the various features of the MicroStrategy platform. To see a sample project. 63 . It is ready to be used and requires no additional configuration tasks. For more information about the © 2007 MicroStrategy. CREATING AND CONFIGURING A PROJECT Introduction Once you create a logical model of your business data and arrange the data within the data warehouse. For definitions and descriptions of the components within the MicroStrategy platform that allow you to create and analyze your business intelligence applications.

Project connectivity components This section defines some of the basic terminology used in project creation in MicroStrategy Desktop. The RDBMS for the metadata and warehouse do not need to be the same.4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide Tutorial. It is intended to familiarize you with some of the terms discussed in this guide. . MicroStrategy metadata All schema objects. refer to the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. configuration objects. application objects. Metadata is stored in a relational database with a predefined structure. and project settings are stored in the MicroStrategy metadata. Inc. see Appendix A. To view the structure of the MicroStrategy Tutorial. MicroStrategy Tutorial. 64 Project connectivity components © 2007 MicroStrategy.

then MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy strongly suggests you always connect to the metadata through Intelligence Server because of the security and scalability it provides. To view the readme from the Start menu select Programs. Inc. Project source The project source is a configuration object which represents a connection to a metadata repository. and then select ReadMe. It is highly recommended that you never use direct mode connection in a production environment. © 2007 MicroStrategy. which creates the blank tables and populates some of the tables with basic initialization data. You should not connect directly to the metadata unless you are implementing a prototype environment. In MicroStrategy Desktop. Project connectivity components 65 . login.Project Design Guide Creating and Configuring a Project 4 You can find the list of supported RDBMS platforms in the readme file that is installed with MicroStrategy products. A connection to a metadata repository is achieved in one of two ways: • Direct or two-tier mode ( ): Connects to the metadata by specifying a DSN. page 71. and password to a metadata repository. the project source appears in the Folder List with an icon that varies depending on the type of connection it represents. This first step in the project creation process is outlined in Creating the metadata repository. You create the metadata shell with the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. Metadata shell Before you can populate the metadata repository with data. the necessary tables to hold the data must be present. The metadata shell is the set of blank tables that are created when you initially implement a MicroStrategy business intelligence environment.

A four-tier connection is a Server (three-tier) connection in conjunction with MicroStrategy Web deployed on a web server. After the connection to the metadata is established. the same metadata repository can be accessed by multiple project sources. Intelligence Server. The following diagram illustrates Server connectivity between a MicroStrategy metadata repository. every object definition you create within this project source is stored in this metadata. schema objects. Inc. A project source may contain any number of projects. MicroStrategy Desktop is the second tier. Intelligence Server manages all connections to databases. and Intelligence Server is the third tier. and ensures metadata integrity. which in turn governs and validates the connection to the metadata. and configuration objects from any number of projects defined within this project source (see MicroStrategy metadata. For these reasons. This includes application objects. page 8 for definitions of these object types). This is the type of connection used to create a production-ready project in MicroStrategy. The project metadata is the first tier. However. enforces security. 66 Project connectivity components © 2007 MicroStrategy. and MicroStrategy Desktop. . A project source connects to a single metadata repository.4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide • Server or three-tier mode( ): Connects to the metadata by pointing to an Intelligence Server definition. Intelligence Server is a necessary part of any production project.

page 14. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. and user community. Project A project is where you build and store all schema objects and information you need to create application objects such as reports in the MicroStrategy environment. Connecting to a data source through a database instance is explained in detail in Connecting to a data source. Project connectivity components 67 . metadata repository. For information on database instances. you specify the data source location by creating and selecting a database instance with the appropriate connection parameters. A project also represents the intersection of a data source. When you define a project. see MicroStrategy project. For more information on what a project is in MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Creating and Configuring a Project 4 Database instance The database instance is a configuration object that represents a connection to a data source. see the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. page 72.

you can begin to build an understanding of how these various pieces work together to provide an integrated business intelligence environment as shown in the following diagram. Inc.4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide Summary of project connectivity With a firm understanding of the MicroStrategy metadata. and projects. . These steps provide you with a high-level view of the project creation process. 1 Creating the metadata repository The metadata repository contains the objects and definitions associated with your project. project sources. database instances. Creating a project The following procedure describes the main steps to create a MicroStrategy project. Bear this process in mind as you proceed through the rest of this guide. It acts as the 68 Creating a project © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Project Design Guide

Creating and Configuring a Project

4

intermediary between your business data and your reporting environment. Therefore, the first step in the project creation process is to create a metadata repository. For detailed instructions, see Creating the metadata repository, page 71. 2 Connecting to the metadata repository and data source Once the metadata repository is created and populated with initialization data, you must establish connections to both the metadata repository and data source. For detailed instructions, see Connecting to the metadata repository and data source, page 71. 3 Creating the project Having created a metadata repository and established the necessary connections between the different parts of your MicroStrategy environment, you are ready to create the basic definition of your project. For detailed instructions, see Creating the project, page 73. 4 Creating facts and attributes Schema objects such as facts and attributes are the basic components of the logical structure of a project. The business data your user community wants to report on is represented by schema objects in MicroStrategy. Therefore, it is necessary to setup schema objects before reports can be created. This step is covered in Creating facts and attributes, page 82 of this chapter. You can use Query Builder or Freeform SQL to create schema objects as you design reports. For more information for these features, see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating a project

69

4

Creating and Configuring a Project

Project Design Guide

5 Configuring additional schema-level settings Once you create the initial schema objects, you can configure additional schema-level settings that allow you to add complexity and depth to objects in your project and to the project as a whole. For example, you can create advanced facts and attributes to retrieve specific result sets. You can also use attributes to create time-series analysis schema objects called transformations and implement various tools to optimize and maintain your project over time. For information about: • • • Advanced fact creation, see Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts, page 91. Advanced attribute creation, see Adding and modifying attributes, page 134. Hierarchies and hierarchy creation, see Chapter 7, Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. Transformations and transformation creation, see Chapter 9, Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons. Project optimization and maintenance, see Chapter 8, Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project. The steps listed above relate to the process of creating a project which connects to a database or other data source such as a text file or Excel file. MicroStrategy also supports connecting to data stored in SAP BW, Microsoft Analysis Services 2000 and 2005, and Hyperion Essbase systems. When integrated with MicroStrategy, these systems are referred to as OLAP cube sources. You can connect to any of these OLAP cube sources to report and analyze the data concurrently within a project that also connects to a database, or you can create a a standalone connection to your OLAP cube source (see Appendix B, Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources).

70 Creating a project

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Creating and Configuring a Project

4

Creating the metadata repository
Your first step in project creation is to create a metadata repository. This repository stores all the objects necessary to support your project. You can create an empty metadata repository in the database location of your choice using the Metadata Tables option in the Configuration Wizard. Before proceeding to the next section, make sure your metadata repository exists in a non-Microsoft Access database. An Access database is unsuitable for a production project. Create a metadata repository using the guidelines outlined in the Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server chapter of the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. When you create the metadata repository, MicroStrategy creates a default configuration in the repository. The default configuration populates the tables with the basic data required for the metadata, such as the default project folder structure and basic connection information. These tables are populated with your project information during the project creation step in the Project Creation Assistant, outlined in Creating the project, page 73. For instructions on creating a metadata repository in a database, see the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide.

Connecting to the metadata repository and data source
Once you have created a metadata repository, your next step is to connect MicroStrategy Desktop to the metadata repository and to your data source.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating the metadata repository

71

4

Creating and Configuring a Project

Project Design Guide

Connecting to the metadata repository
You connect to the metadata repository in MicroStrategy Desktop or Web through a project source. Recall that a project source is a pointer to a metadata repository. It connects either through a DSN that points to the appropriate database location or by pointing to an instance of Intelligence Server which, in turn, points to the metadata repository location. To configure Intelligence Server and establish a server connection between the metadata, Intelligence Server, and MicroStrategy Desktop, follow the steps in the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide.

Connecting to a data source
A data source contains the business data from which you intend to gain analytical insight. Once you connect to the metadata repository through Intelligence Server, your next step is to create a connection to the data source to which your project can connect. You connect to the data source by creating a database instance in MicroStrategy Desktop. Create a database instance using the procedures outlined in the Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server chapter of the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. When you create a project, you must assign a database instance to that project. A project specifies only one database instance at a time, but a database instance can be assigned to multiple projects.

72 Connecting to the metadata repository and data source

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Creating and Configuring a Project

4

MicroStrategy also allows you to connect to your SAP BW, Microsoft Analysis Services, and Hyperion Essbase data sources. For information about connecting to these OLAP cube sources, see Appendix B, Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources.

Creating the project
You can now begin building the MicroStrategy project that connects to the metadata repository and data source. Project creation involves creating a basic project definition and creating your project’s first schema objects. There are several methods for creating and editing a project, which includes: • Creating a test or prototype project using Project Builder With Project Builder, you can build project prototypes for proof-of-concept tests with your own data. Project Builder is best suited for creating a test project, and it is not intended to create production projects. • Creating a production project using Project Creation Assistant This section guides you through the creation of a production-ready MicroStrategy project. The following table compares the main features of both the Project Creation Assistant and Project Builder. Use the table to determine the project creation tool that best suits your needs.
Features Intended audience Project type Complexity Project Creation Assistant Advanced users Production-ready or other large projects Extensive features require more project design knowledge Project Builder Newer users Test or basic projects Easier to use but fewer features

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating the project

73

4

Creating and Configuring a Project

Project Design Guide

Features

Project Creation Assistant Advanced; can create the following objects and more: • multiple tables, attributes, and facts at once • attributes with many-to-many and joint child relationships A variety of databases and other data sources

Project Builder Limited; cannot be used to create multiple schema objects at once, but can be used to create basic hierarchies and metrics

Functionality

Metadata repository type Metric and report creation

Microsoft Access

No, must be done after project creation Yes, basic metrics and reports only

Creating a test or prototype project using Project Builder
Project Builder is a wizard that allows you to create simple MicroStrategy projects quickly and efficiently. Project Builder was created with speed in mind; thus it provides only a subset of the features and functionality of the Project Creation Assistant. It allows you to rapidly create user hierarchies and simple metrics and reports. With Project Builder, you can build project prototypes for proof-of-concept tests with your own data and simple yet functional projects. To create a project for your production environment, it is highly recommended you follow the steps outlined in Creating a production project using Project Creation Assistant, page 75. The Project Creation Assistant can add greater functionality and capability to your project in your production environment. To learn more about Project Builder, proceed through this section. You can also refer to the Introduction to MicroStrategy: Evaluation Guide and the Project Builder online help (press F1 from within Project Builder).

Using Project Builder
By default, Project Builder uses a Microsoft Access database for the metadata repository. A Microsoft Access database is suitable for creating the metadata repository for a prototype

74 Creating the project

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Creating and Configuring a Project

4

project, but not a production project. You should not use Microsoft Access for anything other than a proof-of-concept or demonstration type of application. You can use Project Mover to move a demonstration project into a production-ready database (see the System Administration Guide.) Project Builder contains the following options that assist you in creating a prototype project: • My Database allows you to name the project and select the database that contains the business information you want to analyze with the project you create. My Business Model allows you to identify relationships that define the business information in your database. Project Builder uses this structure to help you analyze the data. My Reports allows you to use the attributes and metrics you defined using My Business Model, to create a variety of reports. These reports are based on pre-defined templates. You can also preview and run the reports. You can learn about creating and designing reports in more detail in the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. To access Project Builder from the Start menu select Programs, then MicroStrategy, then Desktop, and then select Project Builder.

Creating a production project using Project Creation Assistant
This section describes how to create a Server-connected (three-tier) project for your production setup using MicroStrategy Desktop. It is assumed you intend to implement Intelligence Server in your business intelligence environment as the means of connecting to your project as opposed to using a two-tier setup.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating the project

75

4

Creating and Configuring a Project

Project Design Guide

Creating a project using the Project Creation Assistant in MicroStrategy Desktop provides advanced functionalities and greater complexity to your project than Project Builder. It allows you to create a new project and add the following objects to it or to an existing project: • • • Tables Facts Attributes

With the Project Creation Assistant you create and configure a project and some of the essential schema objects that reside within it. The intended audience for this tool includes experienced project creators who have planned all their facts, attributes, and data relationships. This information is covered elsewhere in this guide. For a listing of information covered in specific chapters, see Planning your project below. The main advantage of the Project Creation Assistant over Project Builder is its ability to create multiple schema objects at once. Since you can efficiently add multiple tables and develop numerous attributes and facts, it is especially useful for large projects which contain many tables and schema objects. With the Project Creation Assistant you can also create attributes with many-to-many relationships.

Planning your project
Before using the Project Creation Assistant, you should plan your project and consider the following: • The logical data model you intend to use for this project; logical data models are covered in Chapter 2, The Logical Data Model. The tables to use in the project; physical warehouse schema models are covered in Chapter 3, Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model. The facts to include in the project and the data types used to identify them; facts are covered in Chapter 5, The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts.

76 Creating the project

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Creating and Configuring a Project

4

The attributes to create in the project and the data types used to identify them, including: The description column name for each attribute. Any other attribute forms for each attribute. The child attributes for each attribute. Attributes are covered in Chapter 6, The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes.

Creating a new project using the Project Creation Assistant
Once you have planned your project and completed the prerequisites, you can use the Project Creation Assistant to build the project and populate the metadata based on the data structures present in your data warehouse. The steps of the Project Creation Assistant are: 1 Initialize/create the project. Initializing the project means giving the project a name and selecting the metadata repository in which to create the project—that is, the project source. After you specify these settings, the shell of a project is created in the metadata. This configures the folder structure and default connectivity settings. Be aware that this process can take some time to complete. 2 Select tables from the Warehouse Catalog. In this step, you use the Warehouse Catalog to specify which data warehouse tables to include in your project. 3 Create facts. 4 Create attributes. You should complete all the steps in the Project Creation Assistant at the same time. While you can save an incomplete project definition, you cannot finish creating it later with the Project Creation Assistant. Instead, you must complete it using the
© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating the project

77

The New Project page opens. To create a project source which connects to your data through Intelligence Server. select Create New Project. see the Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server chapter of the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. Inc. see the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. The default document directory for a project is the directory location to store all HTML documents. and default document directory location for the project. The Project Creation Assistant opens. 4 Enter the name. To create a new project using the Project Creation Assistant 1 Log in to a project source in MicroStrategy Desktop. description. 78 Creating the project © 2007 MicroStrategy.4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide appropriate interface. as shown below: 3 Click Create project. For more details on how to setup HTML documents for a project. Fact Creation Assistant. 2 From the Schema menu. such as the Warehouse Catalog. or Attribute Creation Assistant. .

The language check prevents these inconsistencies and ensures that the language display is consistent across the project. select Enable the guest user account for this project. and relationship tables to use in your new © 2007 MicroStrategy. 6 From the Project Source drop-down list.Project Design Guide Creating and Configuring a Project 4 5 To support anonymous authentication mode for guest users for this project. it can lead to inconsistencies in the language display. you select the lookup. select the project source in which you created the database instance to connect to your metadata repository. When you create a new project. When these properties do not match. Proceed to the next section to determine the tables to be used in your project. The Warehouse Catalog queries the data source and lists the tables and columns that exist in it. The Project Creation Assistant creates an empty project in the metadata repository. 8 Enter a valid login ID and password and click OK. Adding tables using the Warehouse Catalog The warehouse tables for a project determines the set of data available to be analyzed in the project. The Login dialog box opens. the language of the local machine (the LOCAL_MACHINE registry key). The Warehouse Catalog lists all the tables in the data source to which you are connected through your database instance and to which your database login has read privileges. Inc. fact. you cannot proceed to the next step. Creating the project 79 . a language check ensures that the language settings of the user profile of the local machine (the CURRENT_USER registry key). 7 Click OK. If you are not authorized by your database or system administrator to create projects in the data source you have selected. From this list. You use the Warehouse Catalog to add warehouse tables to your project. and the Project locale property match.

aggregate tables. and tables are abstractions built on top of the tables and columns in the data source. You should also include all other tables needed to complete your project. The database instance selected in this dialog box determines which data source is accessed. they become schema objects known as logical tables in MicroStrategy. and are discussed in detail in Appendix C. Database instances and database logins are MicroStrategy objects that determine the warehouse to which a project connects. To learn more about these objects. Inc. and partition mapping tables. refer to the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. select Select tables from the Warehouse Catalog. You can edit your database instance by clicking Edit. MicroStrategy schema objects such as attributes. The database login you use must have read privileges so you are able to view the tables in the selected warehouse.4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide project. Once tables are selected from the data source and added to your project. The Warehouse Catalog opens. facts. including transformation tables. 80 Creating the project © 2007 MicroStrategy. . 2 Select a database instance from the drop-down list and click OK. The Warehouse Database Instance dialog box opens. Logical tables are representations of the tables that are available in the data warehouse. Logical Tables. To add and remove tables to the project using the Warehouse Catalog 1 In the Project Creation Assistant.

For example you can view rows in a table. and click > to add the selected tables. © 2007 MicroStrategy. specify a table prefix. copy a table. Creating the project 81 . select them from the right side and click < to remove them. The list on the right shows all the tables currently being used in the project. Inc. select the tables you want to add to the Warehouse Catalog. if any: 4 From the left side. Warehouse Catalog options 6 Right-clicking any table provides you with additional Warehouse Catalog functionality. see Managing warehouse and project tables. Click >> to add all the listed tables. or specify a database instance for a table. page 221. For more information on these abilities and how to use them.Project Design Guide Creating and Configuring a Project 4 3 The left side of the Warehouse Catalog lists all available tables and the number of rows each table contains. Click << to remove all the tables from your project. 5 To remove tables from your project.

The next step in the Project Creation Wizard involves creating schema objects: facts and attributes. and decide whether schema objects are mapped automatically or manually. 8 In the toolbar. This information is covered in Chapter 5. it is important to understand what facts and attributes are and the defining characteristics of each. For more information on these abilities and how to use them. For example. The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes. Creating facts and attributes This step in the project creation process involves using the Project Creation Assistant to create two kinds of schema objects: facts and attributes. The table definitions are written to the metadata. customize how tables and columns are read from the database system catalog. see Adding and removing tables for a project. . This process can take some time to complete. Inc. page 82 and Configuring additional schema-level settings. page 226. you can change the database instance. page 220. 82 Creating facts and attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. click Save and Close to save your changes to the Warehouse Catalog. page 83 to learn how to create these schema objects and configure additional schema-level settings for those objects. see Modifying data warehouse connection and operation defaults. display extra table and row information. After exiting the Project Creation Assistant. For steps to access the Warehouse Catalog to add tables to a project. The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts and Chapter 6. Before you create facts and attributes. however. you can still access the Warehouse Catalog to add additional tables.4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide 7 To set advanced options you can click Options on the Warehouse Catalog toolbar. Follow the instructions outlined in Creating facts and attributes.

edit. aggregate tables. Advanced configurations: These objects include transformations. attribute forms. This is covered in Adding and modifying attributes. and the Warehouse Partition Mapping Editor. • • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. This information is covered in Chapter 8. proceed to the chapters referenced above to complete the next steps in the project creation process. Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. and attribute form expressions. User hierarchies: The Hierarchy Editor allows you to create user hierarchies. and configure facts. which are schema objects used for time-series analysis. and partitioning and partition mappings: The Transformation Editor allows you to create transformations. Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project. Attribute definitions: The Attribute Editor allows you to create and edit attributes. page 91. Configuring additional schema-level settings 83 . which facilitate access to attribute and element browsing and drilling. Transformations are covered in Chapter 9. the Metadata Partition Mapping Editor. These settings include: • Fact definitions: The Fact Editor allows you to create. This is covered in Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts. The tools used to create aggregate tables and partitions are the Warehouse Catalog. page 134. Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons. Inc.Project Design Guide Creating and Configuring a Project 4 Configuring additional schema-level settings The final step in the project creation process involves configuring additional schema-level settings to add more analytical depth to your schema objects and optimize the project as a whole. This is covered in Chapter 7. Now that you have completed most of the key steps in creating a new project.

are beyond the scope of this guide. Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources. Facts are used to create metrics. and Hyperion Essbase data sources. Inc. For a complete discussion of metrics. see the Creating Freeform SQL reports chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. reports. for creating reports in MicroStrategy Web. and prompts. see Appendix B. see the MicroStrategy Web online help. Proceed to the chapters listed above to add analytical depth and more functionality to your project. • 84 Deploying your project and creating reports © 2007 MicroStrategy. Facts and attributes provide the backbone of the reports and documents created by report designers. that if you completed only the steps in this chapter. however. custom groups. Microsoft Analysis Services. the project you deploy will contain only basic facts and attributes. refer to the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide and the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Note the following: • MicroStrategy allows you to connect to your SAP BW. To learn more about how to deploy your project using MicroStrategy Web. For information on how to use your own customized SQL statements to create reports. and metrics and attributes are essential components of reports. .4 Creating and Configuring a Project Project Design Guide Deploying your project and creating reports After you create a project. and other report objects such as filters. filters. For information about connecting to OLAP cube sources. You can also begin creating reports in MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. For information about creating reports in MicroStrategy Desktop. Keep in mind. refer to the Deploying your Project with MicroStrategy Web chapter of the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. you can deploy it to your user community using MicroStrategy Web. Metrics. refer to the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. and other report objects.

Facts form the basis for metrics.5 5. 85 . Inc. facts are numeric data and attributes are contextual data for the facts. Facts and attributes are necessary to define projects. For example. and the store and month represent attributes. In this case. THE BUILDING BLOCKS OF BUSINESS DATA: FACTS Introduction Facts are one of the essential elements within the business data model. which are used in the majority of analyses and reports that users can create with MicroStrategy. The facts you create in MicroStrategy allow users to access data stored in the data warehouse. In a MicroStrategy project. facts are schema objects created by and shared between MicroStrategy users. They relate numeric data values from the data warehouse to the MicroStrategy reporting environment. As the project designer. you want to analyze the amount of sales at a certain store during January. © 2007 MicroStrategy. In the MicroStrategy environment. the amount of sales represents the fact. Facts generally represent the answers to the business questions on which users want to report.

5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide you must create projects that contain facts and attributes. Inc. as shown below. Each cell in the columns represents a specific piece of information. . Users can then use these facts and attributes as building blocks for metrics and reports. When fact information is requested for a report in MicroStrategy. These fact tables are composed of different columns. This data is used to create a metric (such as profit) which is a business measure. 86 © 2007 MicroStrategy. Facts are based on physical columns within tables in the data warehouse. Facts are stored in the data warehouse in fact tables. that column is accessed to retrieve the necessary data.

page 91 covers steps to add and modify both simple and advanced facts for an existing project. It is important to understand how to define facts because facts are the basis for almost all metrics. simple facts as part of the initial project design effort or later in a project’s life cycle. Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts. page 88 covers steps to create multiple. using different techniques and MicroStrategy interfaces: • Simultaneously creating multiple. as well as highlight some advanced fact design techniques and procedures. Creating facts • © 2007 MicroStrategy. While creating facts is a major step in the initial creation of a project. This section provides steps to create facts at different phases of the project design process. Facts such as Quantity and Item Cost could exist in a warehouse containing sales and distribution data. Creating facts A fact has two common characteristics: it is numeric and it is aggregatable. Facts also allow you to create advanced metrics containing data that is not stored in the warehouse but can be derived by extending facts. facts such as Tenure and Compensation Cost could exist in a data warehouse that contains human resources data. Facts are the actual data values stored at a specific fact level. The later sections discuss conceptual information on facts. Data warehouses contain different types of facts depending on the purpose of the data. simple facts. Examples of facts include sales dollars. it can often be necessary to modify and create facts throughout the life cycle of a project. page 87) of this chapter. facts do not describe data. The procedures to perform these tasks are discussed in the first section (Creating facts. and cost. units sold. profit. For example. facts are logical MicroStrategy objects that correspond to physical columns and tables. Unlike attributes. 87 .Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 Like other schema objects such as attributes. A fact entry level is the lowest set of attributes at which a fact is stored. Inc.

you can create multiple simple facts using the Project Creation Assistant and the Fact Creation Wizard. 88 Creating facts © 2007 MicroStrategy. fact creation and modification can be done throughout the entire life cycle of a project. page 91. utilizing the following MicroStrategy tools: • The Fact Creation Wizard is a step-by-step interface that is typically used when you first create a project. Inc. simple facts During your initial project design effort. The Project Creation Assistant utilizes the Fact Creation Wizard to help you create the facts for your initial project creation effort. which is discussed in Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide Simultaneously creating multiple. is used to add advanced features to facts that already exist or to create new simple or advanced facts as your project evolves. However. Facts can be created and modified using a number of various techniques. You can also access the Fact Creation Wizard in MicroStrategy Desktop from the Schema menu. • The Fact Editor. . It allows you to create multiple facts in a single creation process.

only columns whose data types are numeric or character-based are displayed in the Fact Creation Wizard as possible columns to use for your facts. Therefore. Creating facts . The Fact Creation Wizard opens. The Fact Creation Rules page opens. For example. a fact does not have description information. you can only select data types for the ID columns of your facts. Inc. If the naming conventions in your warehouse do not conform to the defaults in the Fact Creation Rules page. select Create facts. Rules help automate and govern the fact creation process.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 To create facts with the Fact Creation Wizard 1 In the Project Creation Assistant. as shown below: 2 Click Define Rules to set some basic fact creation rules. if you select Character and Numeric and leave the remaining check boxes cleared. Select the check boxes for the data types to be included when the wizard searches the data warehouse for available fact columns. Unlike most attributes which can access multiple columns of description information. 3 The Column data type area allows you to select the column data types that are available as possible fact ID columns. 89 © 2007 MicroStrategy. you may need to change these rules.

5 Click OK to accept your rule changes and return to the Fact Creation Wizard. page 129. 7 From the Available columns pane. with columns that are not currently being used in the project listed in the Available columns pane. The Column Selection page opens. Inc. . Fact column selection 6 Click Next. that is. 9 Click Next. select them from the Facts pane and click < to move them to the left side. Click >> to add all the listed columns. see Facts with different column names: Heterogeneous column names. Select the appropriate check boxes to create the desired default fact names. page 102. The Finish page opens. Note the following: – You can rename any fact to make its name more user-friendly by right-clicking the fact and selecting Rename. For more information about mapping facts to heterogeneous columns. Click << to remove all the columns in your project. The selected fact definitions are stored in the metadata.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide 4 The Fact name area allows you to determine how to create default fact names. 8 To remove fact columns from your project. select the fact columns to use for your facts and click > to add them to your project. heterogeneous columns). whether to replace underscores in the fact name with spaces and whether the first letter is capitalized. 90 Creating facts © 2007 MicroStrategy. – The Fact Creation Wizard cannot handle columns that hold the same information but have different column names (that is. see Simultaneously creating multiple attributes. To continue creating a project with the Project Creation Assistant. 10 Review the summary information in the Finish page and click Finish to create the facts.

Creating one or more simple facts with the Fact Creation Wizard Although the Fact Creation Wizard is primarily used to create most of a project’s facts during initial project creation. Inc. However. You can use the Fact Editor to edit existing facts and create fact expressions. level extensions.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts After you have created a project. for creating most of the facts for the project. © 2007 MicroStrategy. map multiple or heterogeneous columns. To create facts with the Fact Creation Wizard 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. it limits you to creating simple facts and does not allow you to edit existing facts. Typically. and configure other settings. you only use the Fact Creation Wizard as part of the initial project creation. you can use it to create one or more simple facts at the same time. log in to the project source that contains your project and expand your project. you can use either the Fact Creation Wizard or the Fact Editor to create new facts in your project: • With the Fact Creation Wizard you can: Create simple facts Create multiple facts quickly Add a large number of facts during project creation • With the Fact Editor you can: Create simple and advanced facts Edit existing facts and configure additional schema-level settings The Fact Creation Wizard can create multiple facts quickly and easily. column aliases. Creating facts 91 .

3 From the Schema menu. select the project to which to add additional facts. The Fact Creation Wizard opens. page 89. You can also use the Fact Editor to add extensions to those facts and configure additional settings within them to support various analytical requirements. Creating simple and advanced facts with the Fact Editor As your project evolves. select the project to which to add additional facts. log in to the project source that contains your project and expand your project. For more information about privileges. .5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide You must use a login that has Architect privileges. see Permissions and Privileges of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. 92 Creating facts © 2007 MicroStrategy. follow the procedures outlined in To create facts with the Fact Creation Wizard. To create a simple fact with the Fact Editor 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. 2 From the Folder List in MicroStrategy Desktop. see Permissions and Privileges of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. The following procedure describes how to use the Fact Editor to create a simple fact based on a single fact column in a table. you can create additional facts and modify existing facts with the Fact Editor. For more information about privileges. To use the Fact Creation Wizard to add facts. Inc. select Fact Creation Wizard. You must use a login that has Architect privileges. 2 From the Folder List in MicroStrategy Desktop.

– These mapping methods are different from the automatic mapping methods for the Warehouse Catalog. 4 From the Source table drop-down list. • Automatic mapping means that MicroStrategy scans all of the tables in the project and selects all tables with the columns used in the fact expression as possible source tables for the fact. select New. manually select the appropriate source tables for each fact. Manual mapping means that MicroStrategy scans all of the tables in the project and locates all tables with the columns used in the fact expression. • © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using automatic mapping in the Attribute Editor helps you decide which tables to map your facts to when creating a fact.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 3 From the File menu. drag and drop a fact column into the Fact expression pane. You can then remove any tables mapped automatically or select other tables. The Warehouse Catalog mapping methods (discussed in Mapping schema objects and calculating logical sizes for tables. select the source table for the fact. – If the same column name does not contain the same data across different tables. and then Fact. – If you are creating a constant expression that is not based on a physical column in a project table. Creating facts 93 . The source table is the table or logical view that contains the fact column on which you want to base a new fact. select Automatic or Manual. select the tables for which you want your constant expression to apply. The Fact Editor opens. You then select which of those tables are used as source tables for the fact. page 231) determine whether attributes or facts are automatically mapped to new tables when they are added after an attribute or fact is created. Inc. with the Create New Fact Expression dialog box displayed on top of it. 5 From the Available columns pane. 6 In the Mapping area.

e. page 105. page 107. In the Fact_Sales table. in the Fact_Discount table. Column aliases are discussed in Fact column names and data types: Column aliases. Fact definitions are discussed in How facts are defined. In other words. the MicroStrategy SQL Engine may use the incorrect column for the facts. 8 Use the tabs of the Fact Editor to define fact expressions. the columns contain different fact data in each table. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. For detailed information about the options on each tab within the Fact Editor. click Save and Close. When creating the Revenue fact. Sales). although the column name is the same in both tables (i. as described below. suppose you have a column named Sales. However. you must select the Manual mapping method so you can select the Fact_Discount table as a source table for the Discount fact. If you use the Automatic mapping method in both cases. and create extensions.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide For example. which exists in both the Fact_Sales table and the Fact_Discount table. create column aliases. Extensions: This tab allows you to create fact level extensions. Column Alias: This tab allows you to create a column alias for the fact. When creating the Discount fact. you must select the Manual mapping method so you can select the Fact_Sales table as a source table for the Revenue fact. Fact extensions are discussed in Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions. 7 Click OK to close the Create New Fact Expression dialog box. the Sales column contains discount data. 94 Creating facts © 2007 MicroStrategy. the Sales column contains revenue data. . • • 9 When your changes are complete. • Definition: This tab allows you to define fact expressions. Inc. page 97.

Enter a name for the fact and click Save. Inc. You can learn how to create more advanced facts in the various sections below. navigate to the location in which to save the fact. The fact is saved and the Fact Editor closes. Creating facts 95 . select Update Schema to update the project schema. open the folder that contains the fact to modify. 11 From the Schema menu. Modifying simple and advanced facts To modify an existing fact 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. 2 Double-click the fact to open the Fact Editor and edit the fact. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 10 In the Save As dialog box.

Fact level extensions allow facts stored in the data warehouse at one level to be reported at an unrelated level. Fact definitions are discussed in detail in How facts are defined. page 107. facts are made up of the following components: • The fact definition is composed of one or more fact expressions. page 97. even though it is stored at that level. Every fact must have at least one expression. . The column alias stores the column name MicroStrategy uses to generate SQL statements when creating temporary tables related to the fact. Level extensions are very effective for advanced data modeling scenarios.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide The structure of facts As shown in the diagram below. Every fact must have a column alias. • • 96 The structure of facts © 2007 MicroStrategy. Column aliases are discussed in detail in Fact column names and data types: Column aliases. Level extensions are discussed in detail in Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions. unless you create a new column alias. page 105. MicroStrategy selects a default column alias depending on the type of fact. Inc. Extensions can also prevent a fact from being reported at a certain level.

when you select the numeric column used to represent the fact. The fact definition is composed of at least one fact expression and basic information about the fact. expression. While the Unit Price fact only has one expression. see Creating facts. How facts are defined A fact definition contains properties that define a fact and its components. both the fact definition and column alias are automatically defined. The fact expression contained in the definition represents how the fact is calculated by MicroStrategy. For a discussion of the tools used to created facts and procedures on how to use them. the fact expression maps the fact to the All_Sales columns in the LU_ITEM and ORDER_DETAIL tables in the warehouse. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Level extensions are optional. In this case. How facts are defined 97 . which includes the fact’s name. page 87. However. multiple expressions can exist within a fact definition. Facts can be found in multiple tables in a warehouse schema. and source tables. and the source tables it uses. some facts use more advanced expressions to perform calculations on multiple columns of data to return a single fact. including the fact name. The following table provides an example of a fact definition. Fact Name Unit Price Expression All_Sales Source Tables LU_ITEM ORDER_DETAIL In the example. During project creation with the Fact Creation Wizard. expression. and often must be calculated differently from one table to the next. Inc.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 You create facts in MicroStrategy Desktop using the Fact Creation Wizard and the Fact Editor. the fact expression is simply the name of the column which holds the fact data.

Inc. fact expressions define how the fact is calculated. The mathematical operators that can be used in a fact expression are: • • • • Addition (+) Subtraction (-) Multiplication (*) Division (/) 98 How facts are defined © 2007 MicroStrategy. Mapping physical columns to facts: Fact expressions A fact expression maps facts to physical columns in the warehouse.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide Note the following: • • Each fact expression relates to one or more related tables that contain the fact. A fact definition must have one or more fact expressions. For each of the tables. Regardless of how it is defined. . a fact expression represents a mapping to specific fact information in the warehouse. The following image illustrates a column in the fact table and the associated fact expressions: Valid fact expressions are formulas constructed from fact columns with or without numeric constants or mathematical operators. These expressions can be as simple as a fact column name from the warehouse or as sophisticated as a formula containing multiple fact column names and numeric constants.

Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 Note the following: • You can use the Fact Editor to create fact expressions. page 91. some facts do not exist at all in the warehouse and are defined in other ways. For detailed information about metrics. if you want to build a metric defined as Sum(1). creates a derived fact. For example. although nothing is saved in a table column. as explained in the following sections. The implicit fact can have its expression defined as a constant value. These steps are covered in Creating and modifying simple and advanced facts. You may also find it helpful to use implicit facts when building metrics. Apply functions are discussed in the Pass-Through Expressions appendix in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. How facts are defined 99 . Inc. These temporary columns allow you to keep track of how many rows are returned for a certain attribute. you are creating a fact © 2007 MicroStrategy. you can use implicit fact expressions to create “temporary columns” in the database with a value of “1” for every row. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. A fact can also be defined using an ApplySimple function. or setting the expression to be an absolute value. where you can sum the column holding the constant to create a COUNT. Any operation on a column such as adding a constant. An implicit fact indicates a fact table from which to retrieve data. Derived facts and derived fact expressions A derived fact has its value determined by an expression that contains more than just a column in a table. However. adding another column’s values. • Most facts represent physical columns in the data warehouse. you can define a fact equal to the constant “1”. In other words. Implicit facts and implicit fact expressions Implicit facts are virtual or constant facts that do not physically exist in the database. For example.

a table in your data warehouse contains the following elements: Fact Table 1 Item Quarter Quantity_Sold Price You can create a new fact. Rather than creating a derived fact. the columns are used to answer the business question. by creating the following derived fact: Sales = Quantity_Sold * Price One advantage of creating a derived fact is that a derived fact allows one consistent fact to exist in the project in lieu of having to retrieve multiple intermediary facts from multiple tables.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide from information that is available in the data warehouse. Metrics allow you to perform calculations and aggregations on your fact data. For a more generalized procedure to create derived facts. Inc. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. Example: creating derived facts The Cost fact in the MicroStrategy Tutorial contains the derived fact expression Qty_Sold * Unit_Cost. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. you can create such analysis in MicroStrategy with the use of metrics. In this case. Using a single fact saves storage space and limits the number of SQL passes used in queries. 100 How facts are defined © 2007 MicroStrategy. This expression implies that columns containing data about the quantity of items sold and the price of those units can be multiplied to produce a useful business calculation. Sales. For more information on what metrics are and how to create them. “How much did it cost the company to create the items purchased by customers?” The following procedure describes how to create a derived fact that uses the derived fact expression described above. For example. .

The Fact Editor opens. The expression should appear as shown below: 10 Click OK. 2 Navigate to the My Personal Objects folder. log in to the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. click * (multiplication operator) to add it to the expression. point to New. © 2007 MicroStrategy. 7 From the Available columns list.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 To create a derived fact 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. 5 From the Available columns pane. double-click the QTY_SOLD column to add it to the Fact expression pane on the right. and then select Fact. double-click the UNIT_PRICE column to add it to end of the fact expression. 8 Under Mapping method. 4 From the Source table drop-down list. and open the My Objects folder. 3 From the File menu. 6 With the cursor in the Fact expression pane. select the ORDER_DETAIL table. Inc. with the Create New Fact Expression dialog box displayed on top of it. 9 Click Validate to check whether the syntax of the expression is correct. select Automatic. How facts are defined 101 . The derived fact expression appears in the Fact expression pane in the Fact Editor.

When you call for the information in a report through the use of a metric. two fact tables in a warehouse each contain columns for dollar sales. Table 1 contains a fact called Dollar_Sales. . you can refer the same fact to multiple columns with different column names and from different tables that identify the same quantitative value. resulting in an accurate representation of the fact in the report. 12 Enter a name for the derived fact and click Save. at this point. These two items represent the same information. With heterogeneous column names. creating a heterogeneous fact column name for dollar sales informs the system that the Dollar_Sales and Dollar_Sls columns represent the same fact. 13 When you create a fact for your project. the same fact can access columns with different column names. In the example below. both fact columns are used in the SQL. Facts with different column names: Heterogeneous column names In your warehouse. Inc. since this is only an example. 102 How facts are defined © 2007 MicroStrategy. Table 1 Year Dollar_Sales Table 2 Month Dollar_Sls MicroStrategy allows you to identify heterogeneous fact column names for each fact. In the example above. However.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide 11 From the File menu. it is not necessary to update the schema. The Save menu opens. you must update the project schema. Table 2 includes a fact called Dollar_Sls. select Save As.

you create the Units Sold fact and map its corresponding heterogeneous fact columns to it. select Automatic. The following procedure describes how to create the Units Sold fact that already exists in MicroStrategy Tutorial. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Fact Editor opens. In the procedure. You must map heterogeneous fact columns to their corresponding facts to ensure that accurate and complete data is displayed on reports. For a more generalized procedure to map heterogeneous fact columns. and then select Fact. Qty_Sold and Tot_Unit_Sales. double-click the QTY_SOLD column to add it to the Fact expression pane on the right. The Fact Editor opens and the fact expression you just created appears in the Fact expression pane. How facts are defined 103 . 3 From the File menu. 5 From the Available columns pane. 7 Click OK. they represent the same data and are therefore both mapped to the Unit Sold fact. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. and open the My Objects folder.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 Example: mapping heterogeneous fact columns The Units Sold fact in MicroStrategy Tutorial consists of two fact columns in the warehouse. This is one of the tables in which a heterogeneous fact column for the Units Sold fact exists. 2 Navigate to the My Personal Objects folder. Although these fact columns have different names and exist in different fact tables. 6 In the Mapping method area. with the Create New Fact Expression dialog box displayed on top of it. To create heterogeneous fact columns 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. point to New. log in to the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Inc. select the ORDER_FACT table. 4 From the Source table drop-down list.

since this is only an example. The Fact Editor opens and the fact expression you just created appears in the Fact expression pane. The Create New Fact Expression dialog box opens. Now the Units Sold fact you are creating maps correctly to its heterogeneous fact columns. . 13 From the File menu. 9 From the Source table drop-down list. The Save menu opens. you must update the project schema. 11 In the Mapping method area. it is not necessary to update the schema. at this point. double-click the TOT_UNIT_SALES column to add it to the Fact expression pane on the right. select Automatic. 8 Click New. 12 Click OK. select the CITY_CTR_SALES table.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide Now you must add the other heterogeneous fact column as separate expression for the Units Sold fact. This is the other table in which a heterogeneous fact column for the Units Sold fact exists. 15 When you create a fact for your project. select Save As. Inc. 10 From the Available columns pane. 14 Enter a name for the new fact and click Save. However. 104 How facts are defined © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Fact column names and data types: Column aliases 105 . #1)". you can define a fact to be the difference between two dates to perform a calculation such as the average number of days between a start and an end date. Inc. the data type for a fact is inherited from the data type of the column on which the fact is defined in the data warehouse.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 Fact column names and data types: Column aliases A column alias specifies both the name of the column to be used in temporary tables and the data type to be used for the fact. This syntax is specific to Microsoft SQL Server. The SQL you create may be different. By default. For example. However. there are cases where you may need to change this. You could create this fact using the following expression: ApplySimple("DateDiff(day. [Start_Date_Id]. [End_Date_Id]) The expression syntax is specific to your database type.#0. © 2007 MicroStrategy.

the result of the calculation. To avoid the possibility of an error due to conflicting data types. the difference between the two dates. The Column Editor . For a description of the different data types supported by MicroStrategy. 6 You can modify the following properties for the column alias: • Column name: The name for the column alias which is used in any SQL statements which include the fact column. see Appendix D. click Modify. To create a column alias for a fact This procedure assumes you have already created a fact with a valid fact expression for which to create a new column alias. The Column Editor . You can use the Fact Editor to create column aliases. If you did not change the data type of the column alias. The Fact Editor opens.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide The data type for this fact is automatically set to a Date data type because the Start_Date_ID and End_Date_ID have Date data types. . log in to the project source that contains the fact to create a new column alias for. This is used when a temporary SQL table needs to be created for the calculation. • 106 Fact column names and data types: Column aliases © 2007 MicroStrategy. you should modify the column alias for the fact to change the default Date data type to an Integer data type. Inc.Definition dialog box opens. However. 5 Select New to create a new column alias. This can cause an error for some database platforms. 4 In the Column alias area.Column Selection dialog box opens. 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. Data type: The data type for the fact. then the system uses a Date data type and tries to insert integer data into this column. that is. is an integer. 3 Select the Column Alias tab. Data Types. 2 Right-click the fact and select Edit.

see the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. the fact table shown below contains several attribute IDs. 9 Select Save and Close to save your changes. These attribute IDs imply that the fact is reported at the item and quarter levels by default. Inc. or time scale for your column alias. scale. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions Facts are stored at a particular business level in the warehouse. 7 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Column Editor .Column Selection dialog box.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 • Depending on the data type selected. Every fact is tied to a set of attributes that may or may not © 2007 MicroStrategy. including Item and Quarter. precision. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 107 . 8 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Fact Editor. For a detailed description on each of these properties. Fact Table 1 Item Quarter Quantity_Sold Price Level extensions are necessary when facts are stored in the data warehouse at one level and reported at different levels. The level of a fact is defined by the attribute IDs present in the table. you can specify the byte length. bit length. For example.

For example. That is. you have to extend the level of the Discount fact to the Call Center level. 108 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 118). For example if you have a cost fact at the level of a date attribute in a time hierarchy. If the entry level of a fact is at the lowest level of a hierarchy. you record a Discount fact at the Item/Date level. You can use level extensions to change a fact level and extend a fact level to a level in a completely different hierarchy. However. without the use of level extensions. MicroStrategy can aggregate the cost fact data to the level of the year attribute because it is in the same hierarchy as the date attribute and at a higher level. facts require level extensions to be related to any attributes that are at a lower logical level in the same hierarchy than the entry level for a fact (see Lowering the level of fact data: Fact degradations. all attributes at a higher logical level in the hierarchy are available for use as well.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide satisfy all users’ reporting requirements. which is an attribute from a different hierarchy. . Inc. To see if some call centers are selling significantly more items at a discount than other call centers. A fact extension is needed when a fact does not relate directly or indirectly to an attribute included on a report. discounts apply to particular items on particular days.

there is no way to make a connection between the fact data and the attribute. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 109 . a level extension must be defined for the fact. page 114 Forcing facts to relate to attributes: Using cross product joins. page 110 Defining a join on fact tables using fact relations. you are allowing facts or attributes that have been captured at one level to be extended to other levels to meet reporting requirements. Before a metric containing a fact can be used with an attribute that is not in or related to the attribute’s entry level. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Otherwise. By creating a level extension. Level extensions are not required like the fact definition and column alias. page 118 Disallowing the reporting of a fact at a certain level. Inc. lowered. and they tend to be used only in specific cases. You can use the Fact Editor to create level extensions. or disallowed to other attributes across the schema. a level extension must exist to relate the fact data to the attribute.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 Level extensions define how facts can be extended. page 122 You can find complete descriptions for each of these methods in the online help for the Level Extension Wizard in the Fact Editor. page 116 Lowering the level of fact data: Fact degradations. This is because if a fact is stored at a level unrelated to an attribute on a report. You can create fact level extensions by using any of the following methods: • • • • • Defining a join on fact tables using table relations.

An allocation expression is required to extend Freight to the Item level. For example. 110 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. the ORDER_DETAIL table is used to create the Freight fact extension to Item because: 1 The ORDER_FACT and ORDER_DETAIL tables both contain the Order attribute’s identity column to join the tables. The procedure also describes general principles of creating fact extensions which you can use to create fact extensions for the facts in your project. and ORDER_DETAIL contains the Item attribute’s identity column to extend the fact to Item. A fact extension can be used to relate a fact to an attribute using a fact table. In this example. The following procedure steps through how to create the fact extension that has been created for the Freight fact of the Tutorial project. you are creating a table relation to extend a fact. Inc. the Freight fact cannot be reported at the Item level. These two columns are used to allocate the fact expression in the procedure below. When you specify a table to join with a fact. Notice that the ORDER_FACT and ORDER_DETAIL tables include Order-level Units Sold and Item-level Units Sold columns respectively.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide Defining a join on fact tables using table relations A table relation defines a join on tables. the MicroStrategy Tutorial project includes a Freight metric. . This metric has a table relation fact extension to the Item attribute. 2 The Freight fact cannot simply be joined with a table containing Item information to return a meaningful freight value for each item. A fact extension is required to view freight values for each item included in an order. Since the ORDER_FACT table that defines Freight does not include the identity column for the Item attribute. The join is important as the table contains an attribute in the entry level and the attribute to which to extend.

or disallow the fact entry level 6 Enter a name and a description for your fact extension (already provided). Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 111 . dynamic fact relation. or a cross product join Disallow partially or completely the fact entry level: define a fact extension that does not allow a fact to be reported at a certain level (see Disallowing the reporting of a fact at a certain level. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Level Extension Wizard opens. 2 Browse to the Facts folder and double-click the Freight fact to edit it. The Extended Attributes page opens. 4 Select Extension to Item and click Modify. 3 Click the Extensions tab. To create a new fact extension you would click New. page 118) Extend the fact entry level: define a fact extension on a table relation. extend. Inc.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 To define a fact extension with a table relation 1 In Desktop. 5 Read the Welcome statement and click Next. However. and click Next. log in to the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. so select Extend the fact entry level. Then select whether you want to: • Lower the fact entry level: define a fact degradation (see Lowering the level of fact data: Fact degradations. The Fact Editor opens. To lower. this example steps through how the Freight fact extension Extension to Item was created. page 122) • • For this example you are creating a fact extension on a table relation. The General Information page opens.

112 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. and define the allocation expression 9 Select the table used to extend the fact to the new level. page 114). or manually select the attribute(s).5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide To select attributes to extend the fact to 7 Select the attributes you want to extend the fact to. For this example. The Join Type page opens. To select the table. 10 Select whether to allow Intelligence Server to dynamically select what attribute(s) to perform the join. Perform the extension through a cross product: select to apply a cross product join (see Forcing facts to relate to attributes: Using cross product joins. This allows the MicroStrategy Engine to select the table that includes the fact and join attributes you choose to create the fact extension (see Defining a join on fact tables using fact relations. • For this example select Specify the relationship table used to extend the fact. Click Next. For this example Item is already selected. Select the relationship table dynamically: select a fact and join attributes. Click Next. To extend the fact so that it can be reported at any level in a hierarchy. join attributes. The Join Attributes Direction page opens. page 116) . choose the lowest level attribute in that hierarchy. and click Next to continue defining your fact extension on a table relation. The Table Selection page opens. Since you know that you want to join the ORDER_FACT and ORDER_DETAIL tables using the Order attribute. select Order and click Next. allowing the fact to be reported at the new level. Inc. . The Extension Type page opens. the ORDER_DETAIL table is already selected. To select the type of fact extension 8 Select how you want to extend the fact: • • Specify the relationship table used to extend the fact: select a relationship table and join attributes.

[ORDER_ID]. [ORDER_DETAIL] a12. For this example. When the engine processes a report containing Order. max(a11.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 11 You can choose to join using the attribute. Notice that the expression returns an average freight amount per item of an order. The SQL for your reports may vary depending on the type of DBMS you use. sum(((a11.[ITEM_ID] group by a11. a12. the extension of Freight provides an estimate of the freight for each item of an order.[ITEM_NAME]) AS ITEM_NAME. Inc. Click Next.[FREIGHT] * a12.[ORDER_DATE]) AS ORDER_DATE. a12. 12 Enter an allocation expression that calculates the fact at the new level. Day.[ITEM_ID] AS ITEM_ID. Promotion level.[ITEM_ID] The SQL statement above is for an Access database. Employee. max(a13. The SQL generated for the report containing Order. Item. ((Freight * [Item-level Units Sold]) / [Order-level Units Sold]).[ORDER_ID] AS ORDER_ID. not an exact calculation. Take a moment to review the allocation expression. and Freight (metric mapped to the Freight fact) is: select a11. it joins ORDER_FACT and ORDER_DETAIL and considers the resulting table as one logical fact table at the Item. so you do not have to click the Join against arrow to change the default. Therefore.[ORDER_ID] and a12. A more detailed description of why this occurs follows this procedure.[ORDER_ID] = a12. Item. The Allocation page opens. Order. and Freight.[QTY_SOLD])) AS WJXBFS1 from [ORDER_FACT] a11. © 2007 MicroStrategy. or join using the attribute and its children. the allocation expression is already provided.[ITEM_ID] = a13. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 113 . 13 Click Finish to create the fact extension.[QTY_SOLD]) / a11. [LU_ITEM] a13 where a11. In this case Order has no children.

since the MicroStrategy Engine is responsible for choosing the appropriate table to join. 114 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. rather than you having to select tables manually. Defining a join on fact tables using fact relations Fact extensions can be defined by a fact relation instead of a table relation. Inc. If you want to provide exact values of data at a certain level. With a fact relation. This allows more flexibility in defining the relations. review the values of the first order with an extra metric that calculates the number of each item type in an order shown below. the table join is possible on any table that contains the fact. The larger freight values occur because more than one of the item type was included in the order. This illustrates how fact extensions often provide an estimation of values at a different level rather than an exact calculation.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide To view how the fact extension is an estimation of freight values for each item of an order. . you most likely need to capture such data and store it in your data source. Notice that the Freight metric averages the amount of freight per item in an order.

You can define the fact relation in the Level Extension Wizard which you can access from the Fact Editor. you can create a fact relation using the Order Unit Sales fact.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 The following diagram shows the schema from the example in Defining a join on fact tables using table relations. The engine can make the following joins. page 110 after two summary tables are added to it. Next. This option is set in the step immediately after To select the type of fact extension. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 115 . Inc. © 2007 MicroStrategy. select the Select the relationship table dynamically option and specify the tables to use for the extension. Open the Order Unit Sales fact and extend it to either Distribution Center and Order or just Distribution Center. and Order Table 1 and Table 4 on Distribution Center Table 2 and Table 3 on Distribution Center Table 3 and Table 4 on Distribution Center The joins described above demonstrate how the join attributes can be either Distribution Center and Order or just Distribution Center. depending on the join attributes specified: • • • • Table 1 and Table 2 on Distribution Center. To extend the entry level of the Freight fact to Customer. The MicroStrategy Engine tries to join a table containing Freight to a table containing Order Unit Sales.

. a2. select a1. Cross products should only be used when no other way to extend the fact exists. a2.Freight) from TABLE3 a1.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide page 112 in the procedure above. sum(a1. 116 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. and Freight is shown below. Customer.DIST_CENTER = a2. Forcing facts to relate to attributes: Using cross product joins You can use a cross product join when a join does not exist and you need to force a fact to relate to an attribute by extending the fact. This method can produce incorrect data because data can be repeated and counted twice in some cases. The SQL generated for a report containing Distribution Center.DIST_CENTER group by a1.DIST_CENTER. Since this method can be inefficient.CUSTOMER The SQL statement above is for an Access database. TABLE4 a2 where a1. The cross product join is an extension that allows a single fact value to relate to all elements of an unrelated attribute.CUSTOMER. you are creating a Cartesian product of the lookup attribute. The SQL for your reports may vary depending on the type of DBMS you use. When you specify a cross product join to relate a fact to an attribute.DIST_CENTER. the set of join attributes must contain the entire key of the left-hand-side fact table (Table 3 in the example SQL above). if the only join attribute is Distribution Center. MicroStrategy does not recommend using the cross product join. you can specify the best fit as the join strategy so that the engine calculates the joins. In a best fit join. The tables and attributes you specify in the wizard determine the different types of joins that are created. as explained above. As with table relations.

DOLLAR_SALES) from TABLE1 a1. sum(a2. in the following schema. and Dollar Sales is: select a1. Open the Dollar Sales fact and extend it to the Distribution Center attribute. The MicroStrategy Engine always cross-joins the lookup tables of the attributes in the extension. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 117 .CUSTOMER. Next. This option is set in the step immediately after To select the type of fact extension. a cross product join must be used. a2. For this example. The SQL for your reports may vary depending on the type of DBMS you use. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Distribution Center does not relate to Dollar Sales: Table 1 Table 2 Order Customer Dollar Sales Distribution Center To report Dollar Sales by Distribution Center. page 112 of the procedure above.DIST_CENTER The SQL statement above is for an Access database. select the Perform the extension through a cross product option. The SQL generated for a report containing Customer. Inc. TABLE2 a2 group by a1. Distribution Center. you do not need to specify an allocation expression. You can define this cross product join in the Level Extension Wizard in the Fact Editor. Notice that no join attributes are specified.DIST_CENTER.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 For example.

facts. and metrics used in this example can all be found in this Analytics Module). Inc. This scenario may occur because you stored a fact at a level that is used most commonly in reports. This causes every employee to be listed with the same planned compensation value as the employee’s department. as shown below: The analytical value of this fact degradation is not immediately recognizable. you can create more meaningful analysis with other fact data that is 118 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. you must support those users who wish to view and analyze the same fact data at a lower logical level. the Human Resources Analysis Module of the MicroStrategy BIDK includes a Planned Compensation fact that is stored at the Department level. which lowers a fact level. However. is the logical opposite of aggregation.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide Lowering the level of fact data: Fact degradations Degradation. you must degrade the fact to a lower level. For example. now that Planned Compensation is available at the Employee level. The fact extension does not use an allocation expression to degrade Planned Compensation to the Employee level. and has a fact degradation to the Employee level (the attributes. . However. To view fact data at a lower logical level than the fact is stored at.

To define a fact degradation 1 In Desktop. respectively. you could not include Department and Employee on a report with these metrics and return accurate values. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The following procedure steps through how to create the fact degradation that has been created for the Planned Compensation fact of the Human Resources Analysis Module. You can now view what percentage of your planned compensation per department has been spent per employee. 2 Browse to the Facts / Compensation / Planning folder and double-click the Planned Compensation fact to edit it.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 stored at the Employee level. Inc. The procedure also describes general principles of creating fact degradations which you can use to create fact degradations for the facts in your project. The Fact Editor opens. log in to the Human Resources Analysis Module. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 119 . as shown below: Without using a degradation of Planned Compensation to Employee. For example. the Compensation Cost fact is stored at the Employee level. The metric Actual as % Planned Compensation has been created to calculate the actual compensation of an employee as a percentage of the planned compensation for the entire department of the employee. which performs a division of metrics defined from the Compensation Cost and Planned Compensation facts. The metric definition is ([Compensation Cost]/[Planned Compensation]).

120 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. 4 Select Degradation to Employee and click Modify. The Join Attributes Direction page opens. the Department attribute is already selected. To create a new fact degradation you would click New. page 122) • For this example you are creating a fact degradation so select Lower the fact entry level. or a cross product join (see Defining a join on fact tables using table relations. page 114) Disallow partially or completely the fact entry level: define a fact extension that does not allow a fact to be reported at a certain level (see Disallowing the reporting of a fact at a certain level. For this example. The Extended Attributes page opens. However. Then select whether you want to: • • Lower the fact entry level: define a fact degradation Extend the fact entry level: define a fact extension on a table relation. Inc.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide 3 Click the Extensions tab. 6 Enter a name and a description for your fact extension (already provided). dynamic fact relation. 5 Read the Welcome statement and click Next. Click Next. Click Next. choose the lowest level attribute in that hierarchy. The General Information page opens. page 110 and Defining a join on fact tables using fact relations. The Join Type page opens. For this example Employee is already selected. The Level Extension Wizard opens. allowing the fact to be reported at the new level. 8 Select what attribute(s) to perform the join. this example steps through how the Planned Compensation fact degradation Degradation to Employee was created. and click Next. . To extend the fact so that it can be reported at any level in a hierarchy. 7 Select the attributes you want to degrade the fact to.

consider the allocation expression fact/12 for a degradation from Year to Month. For this example. you must add an allocation expression. to change the definition of the fact in a level extension. See Fact degradations with allocation expressions. you define how higher-level facts are degraded to lower-level attributes. Click Next. You select Month to be the attribute to which to degrade. you do not need to include an allocation expression. By creating allocation expressions. This is similar in concept to choosing an aggregation function (Sum. While it is possible that the fact data would be the same for every month of the year. Using such an allocation expression would spread a year’s fact data evenly over the 12 months of that year. Fact degradations with allocation expressions Not all fact degradations can simply be lowered to a new level. or join using the attribute and its children. the join is performed on the Department attribute and its children. For example. and so on) when aggregating data to higher levels. Avg. For this example. Fact degradations often produce data estimates rather than exact values for the fact data at lower logical levels. For example. Allocation expressions are defined by operations you set on attributes and facts in the Level Extension Wizard in the Fact Editor. Inc. page 121 for an example of using an allocation expression for a fact degradation. if your fact is stored at the yearly level and you want to report the data at the monthly level. You then specify that the allocation expression is fact/12. which allows the distribution of values according to a calculation you specify. Ordinarily. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions . Such fact degradations should be used 121 © 2007 MicroStrategy. 10 Enter an allocation expression that calculates the fact at the new level. The Allocation page opens.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 9 You can choose to join using the attribute. this is often an unlikely scenario. you can create a degradation on the fact to relate it to the monthly level. 11 Click Finish to create the fact degradation.

For example. Disallowing the reporting of a fact at a certain level The Disallow partially or completely the fact entry level setting within the Fact Editor is like a lock which prevents a fact from being reported at a specific level. Consider a schema containing three dimensions: Geography. such as data that is stored at the Minute or Second level. or disallow the fact entry level. . With a disallow in place. The setting prevents unnecessary joins to lookup tables. the report fails because the disallow setting now prevents the cross-joins between the lookup tables and fact tables. This setting. does not affect normal joins. indicating that the report cannot be run at that level. an error is returned. page 111 of the procedure to create a fact extension above. To explicitly disallow an extension of the Sales fact to the Time dimension. however. you would use the Disallow partially or completely the fact entry level setting and select the lowest attribute in the Time dimension such as Day. After updating the schema and re-executing the report. 122 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy. This option is set in the step immediately after To lower.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide only when fact data is not stored at a lower logical level and there is no way to directly relate the fact data to the lower logical level. you can disallow the lower levels. The following examples describe instances in which disallowing a fact entry level can prove useful. Inc. if you have three years’ worth of data. Time. the Analytical Engine does a dynamic cross-join and evaluates the report. Suppose you create a fact called Sales at the Item level in the Product dimension and a metric called Sales as the sum of the Sales fact. Disallowing a fact to be extended to a level lower than the fact’s entry level due to unnecessary complexity and the cost of analyzing fact data at such a level is a common use for this feature. querying at the Minute or Second level consumes too many resources and returns extensive data. If a fact is stored at a level that is counterproductive to a query. if you create a report and attempt to include the fact at the Minute or Second level. and Product. When you create a report containing the Month attribute and the Sales metric. extend.

There must be a valid reason to disallow reporting a fact at a certain level. In this case. for the Sales fact. In this case. This implies that the fact extension has not been disallowed. disallowing the Revenue fact at the level it is stored at in the data warehouse does not make logical sense. although the engine returns a valid SQL. For example. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Month. This is because Revenue exists at the same level as Item in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. which is defined as sum of the Revenue fact. If you execute the report containing the Year attribute and Sales metric. the report runs successfully. the engine sorts the extension conditions specified in some order and calculates the report based on the sorted order of extensions. If you re-execute the report. The Disallow the fact entry level setting applies only to attributes that can be considered as extended attributes. assume you specify an extension to the Month attribute and also disallow extension to Year which is a parent of the extended attribute. So you encounter only normal joins and no extensions. Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions 123 . This is not an expected design condition. You now disallow an extension on the Revenue fact for the Item attribute and update the schema. you can still see Revenue by Item.Project Design Guide The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts 5 In the previous example. you create a report that contains the attributes Subcategory and Item and the Revenue metric. Inc. It is advisable to avoid fact definitions that contain contradictory extension definitions.

. Inc.5 The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts Project Design Guide 124 Modifying the levels at which facts are reported: Level extensions © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Attributes provide the business model with a context in which to report on and analyze facts. © 2007 MicroStrategy. including which regions produced the least revenue and which years saw the highest growth in revenue. you can only find out how much revenue the company generated in total. month. THE CONTEXT OF YOUR BUSINESS DATA: ATTRIBUTES Introduction Business data represented by facts can offer little insight without the presence of business concepts and context. a substantial amount of information is available. When executed. Because of the attributes on the report. Inc. you have a report with the Month. 125 . the report displays your company’s revenue at the region. If you remove the attributes from the report. knowing where and when the sales took place provides the kind of analytical depth users require on a daily basis. While knowing your company’s total sales is useful. and Region attributes on the template. and year levels. For example.6 6. which take the form of attributes in MicroStrategy. Year. as well as a Revenue metric based on the Revenue fact.

The expressions of attributes and facts in the report define the SELECT clause of the SQL command. using this report definition. In MicroStrategy reports. New user and application requirements make attribute creation and modification an important part of the entire project life cycle. Intelligence Server. Date. instructs the engine how to build the SQL for that report. which comes after creating facts when using the Project Creation Assistant. consider the following: Select Store_ID. For example. attributes are normally identified by a unique ID column in a lookup table. Date 126 © 2007 MicroStrategy. In the data warehouse. . A report designer creates a report in part by determining these report column headers.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Creating attributes is an important step in the initial project design effort. sum(Sales) From Store_Fact Group By Store_ID. attributes are identified by the column headers of the reports. Inc.

and Customer Last Name are examples of attribute forms. page 143. sales information will be retrieved by store and date. See Attribute relationships. Customer First Name.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 In the SQL above. filters. Because of this process. Attributes can have multiple attribute forms. it is just not aggregated. A discussion about metrics. 127 . See Attribute form expressions. page 159. such as Day. report analyzers do not have to know SQL to extract information from a data warehouse. for the Customer attribute. The lowest level attribute you include in a report. such as a report at the Year level. Attribute expression: maps a MicroStrategy attribute form to one or more columns in the warehouse. Customer Email. • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 147. For example. Inc. and reports is beyond the scope of this guide and is covered in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. includes the Year attribute but lacks the detail of a similar report which includes the lower level attributes Month and Week. A high-level report. The attributes and metrics in the report tell Intelligence Server where to look in the data warehouse for the information and how to create the SQL that will retrieve it. is the lowest level of detail reported. Attribute relationship: allows interaction of data at different conceptual levels and shows how data is related within a project. See Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms. It is important to understand the data is still the same. Attributes are defined by these properties: • Attribute form: contains an identifier or descriptor of an attribute.

as well as highlight some advanced attribute design techniques and procedures. Inc. page 129) of this chapter. 128 © 2007 MicroStrategy.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide The following diagram illustrates how the attribute properties listed above are related: While creating attributes is a major step in the initial creation of a project. it is often necessary to modify and create attributes throughout the life cycle of a project. . The later sections discuss conceptual information on attributes. The procedures to perform these tasks are discussed in the first section (Creating attributes.

This includes adding advanced features such as attribute forms to attributes that already exist or adding new attributes as your project evolves. For steps to access the Project Creation Wizard. you can create multiple attributes using the Attribute Creation Wizard. To create attributes using the Attribute Creation Wizard This procedure is part of an initial project creation effort using the Project Creation Assistant. Adding and modifying attributes. page 129—steps to create multiple attributes as part of the initial project design effort or later in a project’s life cycle. which launches the Attribute Creation Wizard to complete the attribute creation tasks. • Simultaneously creating multiple attributes During your initial project design effort. Inc. creating attributes is a major step in any project design effort. therefore. Creating attributes 129 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. This section provides steps to create attributes at different phases of the project design process. page 134—steps to add and modify attributes for an existing project. The ability to report on and analyze data requires data to have a business context. using different techniques and MicroStrategy interfaces: • Simultaneously creating multiple attributes.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Creating attributes An attribute is primarily used to group and aggregate fact data to add business context to the fact data. see To create a new project using the Project Creation Assistant.

Change these rules if the naming or data type conventions in your warehouse do not conform to these defaults. as shown below. 3 Click Define Rules to set some basic attribute creation rules. 4 The Column data type area allows you to select the column data types to be available as possible attribute ID columns. Inc. click Create attributes. The Attribute Creation Rules page opens. You can also access the Attribute Creation Wizard at any time in the development of a project from the Schema menu in MicroStrategy Desktop. especially if you use consistent naming conventions and data types in your data warehouse. 2 Review the introduction page that is displayed. 1 In the Project Creation Assistant.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide page 78. Select the check boxes for the data types that should be included when the wizard searches the data warehouse for available attribute ID columns. The Attribute Creation Wizard uses these rules below to help automate the attribute creation process. . Define attribute creation rules These rules can make the process of choosing attribute columns and naming your attributes considerably easier. The Attribute Creation Wizard opens. 130 Creating attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy.

The ID Column Selection page opens. You should never use a column that has NULL or repeated values as the ID column for an attribute. Inc. 8 Click Next. When choosing the ID column for an attribute. DESC for description columns. © 2007 MicroStrategy. You can select the appropriate check boxes to set the following default behaviors for creating attribute names: • • • Replace underscores in the attribute name with spaces Remove the word “ID” from the name Capitalize the first letter 6 The Warehouse search area determines naming conventions to help locate your warehouse objects. and LOOKUP for lookup tables. ID column selection An ID column is a column or group of columns that uniquely identifies each element of an attribute. Only those columns with data types that match those chosen in the rules you defined above appear on the ID Selection page. Creating attributes 131 . Doing so results in unexpected behavior and errors. 7 Click OK to accept your rule changes and return to the Attribute Creation Wizard. The columns that match the identifier naming convention that you set in the warehouse search rule above are automatically highlighted.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 5 The Attribute name area allows you to determine how to create default attribute names. make sure that all values in the column are unique and that it does not contain NULL values. The defaults are ID for identifier columns.

Select the columns that are required to uniquely identify the compound attribute and click OK. Inc. heterogeneous columns). page 183). For more information about mapping attributes to heterogeneous columns. You are returned to the Attribute Creation Wizard. 10 To create a compound attribute. Type a name for the attribute. . page 153. – The Attribute Creation Wizard cannot handle columns that hold the same information but have different column names (that is. Click >> to add all the listed columns. select the columns to use for your attribute IDs and click > to add them to your project. Description column selection Description columns provide the data which gives context and meaning to your attributes. 132 Creating attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. select the attribute IDs in the Attributes pane and click < to move them to the Available columns pane. Create compound attributes A compound attribute is defined as an attribute with more than one column specified as the ID column. see Joining dissimilar column names: Heterogeneous mappings. complete the following steps: • • • Click Compound Attributes and then click Add. The New Compound Attribute dialog box opens. This implies that more than one ID column is needed to uniquely identify the elements of that attribute (see Attributes with more than one ID column: Compound attributes. – To remove attribute ID columns from your project. Note the following: – You can rename any attribute name to make it more user-friendly by right-clicking the attribute and selecting Rename.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide 9 From the Available columns pane.

Inc. The table that follows the lookup naming convention that you set in the warehouse search rule is automatically selected. they provide the information for an attribute through data stored in their ID and description columns. Lookup table selection Lookup tables are the physical representation of attributes.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 11 After adding all your attribute ID columns. – Other attribute forms need to be created through the Attribute Editor after you complete steps in the Project Creation Assistant. the Relationship Definition page opens. 14 Select the lookup table for each attribute. such as Year. • © 2007 MicroStrategy. If you have not created a compound attribute. The Description Column Selection page opens. the Compound Attribute Definition page opens. The Relationship Definition page opens. page 136. you should choose the default lookup table for each attribute. 13 Click Next when you are finished selecting description columns for attributes. In some cases. Note the following: – In general. The column that meets the description naming convention that you set in the warehouse search rule is automatically selected. 15 Click Next: • If you have created compound attributes. Refer to Adding attributes with the Attribute Editor. 12 Select whether to use the ID or a different column for the description of the attribute. however. click Next. you should use the default description column for each attribute. for more information about attribute forms. Specify the lookup table and description column for the compound attributes and click Next. In general. Creating attributes 133 . The Lookup Table Selection page opens. it may make sense to use the ID column as the description column.

Related attributes such as City. like Location. or many-to-many. . the attributes are created. you can also create and add attributes as they become necessary. In the Children of: attribute name pane. Select the child attributes from the list of available child attributes and click OK. select an attribute and click Add. the relationships between attributes should become apparent. click Next.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Relationship definition For each attribute. define child attributes: • • In the Attributes pane. You are returned to the Attribute Creation Wizard. page 159. In a logical data model. State. As a company evolves. so does its 134 Creating attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Finish page opens. This completes the initial creation of a project with the Project Creation Assistant. The Logical Data Model). when attributes are in the same hierarchy they must be related to each other. 18 Review the summary information in the Finish page and click Finish to create the attributes. 16 For each attribute. or Region are often grouped in a common hierarchy. For more information on the different attribute relationship types. Inc. you specify the children and the type of relationship: one-to-one. select the relationship type for the attribute to its child attribute. • 17 When you have defined children for all the attributes that need them. whereas attributes in different hierarchies cannot be related. The Select Children Attributes dialog box opens. see Attribute relationships. Adding and modifying attributes Just as you can add more facts to your project once you have created it. After you have completed the steps of the Attribute Creation Wizard. When you design a logical data model for your project (see Chapter 2. one-to-many.

However. a health care company. it must add lookup tables that contain data about its new offices to its warehouse. for creating most of the attributes for the project. the company does not include lookup tables with information about different countries in its data warehouse. © 2007 MicroStrategy. which you use to create the first attributes for your project. configure additional settings. decides to extend its operations into Europe and Asia. It must then add these tables to its MicroStrategy project. map heterogeneous column names. with offices only in the United States. Creating attributes 135 . and create the appropriate attributes so report users can analyze business data for their appropriate country. but you cannot use it to modify existing attributes or to define more advanced attributes. Before the shift overseas. For example. when the company opens its offices in Europe and Asia. attribute forms. • The Attribute Creation Wizard allows you to: Create simple attributes Create multiple attributes quickly Add a large number of attributes during project creation • The Attribute Editor allows you to: Create simple and advanced attributes Edit existing attributes and configure additional schema-level settings The Attribute Creation Wizard works well for building a large number of attributes initially. Inc. In general. or the Attribute Editor. You can create attributes with either the Attribute Creation Wizard. these requirements can lead to changes to the data warehouse as well as to the schema within its MicroStrategy projects. You can use the Attribute Editor to edit existing attributes and create additional attribute forms. which allows you to define attributes.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 reporting requirements. define advanced expressions. and so on. and attribute form expressions. you only use the Attribute Creation Wizard as part of the initial project creation.

4 To create attributes with the Attribute Creation Wizard. 3 From the Schema menu. Follow the steps below to use the Attribute Creation Wizard to create simple attributes in bulk. See the Permissions and Privileges appendix of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide for more information. . page 129. log in to the project source that contains your project and expand your project. You can also use it to add new attributes to your project. follow the steps outlined in Simultaneously creating multiple attributes. The Attribute Creation Wizard opens. select the project to which to add new attributes. you may still find it useful if you need to create multiple attributes from remaining lookup columns in your warehouse.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Adding attributes with the Attribute Creation Wizard Although the Attribute Creation Wizard is primarily used to create most of a project’s attributes during initial project creation. Adding attributes with the Attribute Editor The Attribute Editor is used to add advanced features such as attribute forms to attributes that already exist. Inc. You must use a login that has Architect privileges. 2 From the Folder List. 136 Creating attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. To create simple attributes in bulk using the Attribute Creation Wizard 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. choose Attribute Creation Wizard.

Click any operator in the Form expression toolbar to insert it into the expression. You can then clear any tables mapped automatically. use a combination of any of the following techniques: • • • Enter constants in double quotes. You do not have to include any operators. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. select New. page 147). or parentheses. log in to the project source that contains your project and expand your project. The Attribute Editor opens. and then Attribute. 6 Under Mapping Method. select a table which contains the columns of data for the attribute. select Automatic or Manual: • Automatic mapping means that MicroStrategy scans all of the tables in the project and selects all tables with the columns used in the attribute form expression as possible source tables for the attribute form. When you create an expression for an attribute form. 2 From the File menu.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 To create an attribute using the Attribute Editor 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. you are only required to select an available column and move it to the Form expression pane. Creating attributes 137 . 3 From the Source table drop-down list. To create a more advanced attribute form expression. Click f(x) in the Form expression toolbar to create a function using the Insert Function Wizard. 5 Click Validate to make sure your expression is valid. or select other tables. functions. drag a column name from the Available columns pane to the Form expression pane. 4 To create a simple attribute form expression (Attribute form expressions. Its columns are listed in the Available Columns pane. with the Create New Form Expression dialog box displayed on top of it.

select the check boxes of the tables to map to the attribute form. Using automatic mapping in the Attribute Editor helps you decide which tables to map your attribute to when creating an attribute.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide • Manual mapping means that MicroStrategy scans all of the tables in the project and locates all tables with the columns used in the attribute form expression. page 231) determine whether attributes or facts are automatically mapped to new tables when they are added after an attribute or fact is created. select a table and click Set as Lookup to set the lookup table for the attribute. 8 From the Source tables pane. For subsequent attributes. – A constant expression cannot use the automatic mapping method. 9 In the Form general information area. page 143). A lookup table holds the information for an attribute. The system maps the expression to each of the source tables. – These mapping methods are NOT the same as the automatic mapping methods for the Warehouse Catalog. Inc. the default is Manual. type a name and description in the associated fields for the attribute form. 138 Creating attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. Note the following: – The mapping method defaults to Automatic for the first attribute or attribute form expression you create. from which you can create attribute forms for the attribute (Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms. The Warehouse Catalog mapping methods (discussed in Mapping schema objects and calculating logical sizes for tables. . If you chose manual mapping. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. 7 Click OK. You then select which of those tables are used as source tables for the attribute form.

• Modifying attributes After creating an attribute. refer to the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Creating attributes 139 . do one of the following: • Select a form category from the drop-down list. Therefore. if you select a column with a non-numeric data type and set it as an ID column. You cannot use the Attribute Creation Wizard to modify attributes. For a description of form categories. a warning message appears by default when you click OK in the Create New Attribute Form dialog box. The Save dialog box opens. Enter a name for the derived fact. This ensures that your project is updated to recognize the new attribute definition. select Save As.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 10 In the Category used drop-down list. 15 From the Schema menu. 12 Click OK. 14 Navigate to the folder in which to save the attribute. For more information on custom groups. Inc. Click Save. 11 In the Form format area. The Attribute Editor opens. page 146. © 2007 MicroStrategy. see Attribute form properties. select a display type and a default sorting option from the associated drop-down lists. Using a column with a non-numeric data type as an ID column of an attribute can result in SQL generation issues. Custom groups are sorted by the Default sort of the form that appears first in the Report display forms. select Update Schema to update the project schema. you can modify the attribute at any time using the Attribute Editor. 13 From the File menu. Click Modify to create a new form category.

2 Double-click the attribute to edit. in the following diagram. The Attribute Editor opens. and Boston BN are elements of the attribute City: 140 Unique sets of attribute information: Attribute elements © 2007 MicroStrategy. . You can learn how to create more advanced attributes in the various sections below. Inc. Unique sets of attribute information: Attribute elements Attribute elements are the unique sets of information or values of an attribute.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide To modify an existing attribute 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. page 137. Customer is the attribute and New York NY. You can then modify all the options available when creating and attribute in the Attribute Editor. Baltimore BA. which is described in the previous procedure To create an attribute using the Attribute Editor. open the folder that contains the attribute to modify. For example.

Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 The following example displays the physical warehouse table that stores elements and data for the Customer attribute. page 143). email address. as shown below: The Customer attribute is a good example to understand the components of an attribute and the concept of an attribute element. Each attribute element is a row in an attribute lookup table in your data warehouse. first name. Inc. Unique sets of attribute information: Attribute elements . As shown above. Attribute elements are identified by their browse forms. Each customer (attribute element) has its own set of information such as last name. the First Name and Last Name forms are used to identify the 141 © 2007 MicroStrategy. in the image above. which should be forms that provide a general description of the attribute element. With the Customer attribute. For example. an attribute element is a unique set of information defined by the attribute forms of an attribute. each attribute element is an individual customer. and so on which are defined by the attribute forms (see Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms.

For more information on selecting the attribute forms used to identify attribute elements. As shown below. page 189. For example. Shoes. Just as you would not refer to a customer by his or her street address. see Using attributes to browse and report on data. such as Men’s Clothing. attribute elements are displayed depending on the location of the attribute they are associated with. the report below (created from the Sales 142 Unique sets of attribute information: Attribute elements © 2007 MicroStrategy. . and Sporting Goods: In MicroStrategy reports.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide attribute elements. you would not want to use the Address form to identify the Customer attribute elements. Attribute elements can be identified in logical data models. the attribute Division has multiple attribute elements. Inc.

Sales Organization and Year. Inc. Year is on the columns of the report along with its attribute elements such as 2005. as explained in Logical data modeling conventions. The report above uses the common practice of putting the metrics (Sales Orders Quantity (Base Units) and Cost Sales Orders) on the columns of the report. The display of attributes and their attribute elements is also affected by the location of the metrics on the report. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms Attribute forms are identifiers or descriptors of an attribute. Sales Organization is on the rows of the report along with its attribute elements such as USA Central. Every attribute must have at least one form. page 33. and most have at least two: © 2007 MicroStrategy. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 143 .Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 and Distribute Analysis Module of the MicroStrategy BIDK) has two attributes.

In this case John Smith can have a value of 1 in the Customer_ID column and Fred Black can have a value of 2 in the Customer_ID column. For example. Attributes also have description forms. Some attributes can have additional descriptive forms that do not serve as the primary description form. The Customer attribute in the MicroStrategy Tutorial has various forms. Inc. the Customer attribute’s ID form is Customer_ID. . These types of forms give context and information about the Customer attribute. ID forms serve to uniquely identify each attribute element from other elements for the same attribute.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide • • The ID form (required) A description form Every attribute must have an ID form (identity form). For the Customer attribute. including the Customer Name and the Address forms. To differentiate between two customers such as John Smith and Fred Black. Email is included as an additional descriptive form. each customer must have a different value for their identity column. as shown in the following diagram: 144 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. which is a column of unique numeric values to identify each customer.

Name. Attributes must contain at least one ID form. you must map the appropriate columns to the same attribute to retrieve accurate and complete results when using an attribute on a report. the LU_CUSTOMER table records all of the attribute form data for the Customer attribute. The forms you create must have a reference to a lookup table and can include multiple expressions. Heterogeneous column names are discussed in Joining dissimilar column names: Heterogeneous mappings. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 In the data warehouse. and Email forms and the tables will join together through the ID columns because that is the column they have in common. The attribute will have the Customer_ID. Name. Each table must have an ID form. The second lookup table contains Customer _ID and Email. Inc. two columns with different names can represent the same information about an attribute. you can choose a lookup table in the Attribute Editor from a list of tables existing in the project. For example. two tables exist. the ID forms are used to join tables. In such cases. described below: • • • Customer_ID: a unique. and SSN. SSN. one with the forms Customer_ID. When creating an attribute form. In the warehouse. which uniquely identifies the attribute. a lookup table with three columns holds the following separate forms. identifying number for each customer (ID form) Customer_Full_Name: the full name of each customer (Description form) EMAIL: the email address for the specific customer (Additional description form) In this example. page 153. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 145 .

6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Attribute form properties You must select properties for each form when you create forms in the Attribute Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop. When you have attributes that require multiple description forms. For example. it is a good practice to map the most commonly used or most important description form to the Desc form of the attribute. You can create new form categories in the Attribute Editor. . the other description forms must be mapped to None forms. the first attribute form with a default sort order is 146 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. you can define the default sort order for each attribute form. These properties affect the display of the forms and include the following: • Categories help group the types of forms. below. • Format types control how the form is displayed and how filters are built. Each attribute can have only one Desc form. Inc. see Default sorting of multiple attribute forms. For information on how attribute forms are sorted when multiple attribute forms of a single attribute define a default sort order. and None. Big Decimal is discussed in detail in Appendix D. Desc. specifying a format type of Big Decimal allows users to preserve precision when qualifying on a form with more than 15 digits. There is no way to distinguish a Desc attribute form from a None attribute form on a MicroStrategy report. While there is no difference in how a Desc attribute form and None attribute form are used in MicroStrategy. The standard category options are ID. Descending. • Default sorting of multiple attribute forms When creating attribute forms. You can choose from Ascending. mapping the most commonly used or most important description form can be helpful for project designers to quickly distinguish this attribute form from the other secondary forms. If you define multiple attribute forms of an attribute with ascending or descending sort orders. Default sort governs how the form is sorted by default when included in a report. Data Types. or None.

These information units are called attribute forms. Inc. An attribute form expression defines what columns in the warehouse are used to represent the attribute form in SQL. Attribute form expressions Attributes act like holders of information and provide context for fact data. refer to the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. only Last Name has a default sort order set. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms . the Customer attribute in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project has the five attribute forms shown below: Of these five attribute forms. This is because Last Name was created first and therefore is considered for sorting before the Address form. If you remove the Last Name form from the report. 147 © 2007 MicroStrategy. then the second attribute form with a default sort order is used for sorting. For example. customers are sorted by their Last Name in ascending order. In a report you can use advanced sorting to define how attribute forms. It is important to note that you can change how attribute forms are sorted from within a report.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 used to sort the attribute on the report. and so on. and other report objects are sorted. Modify the Address form so that it has a descending default sort order. If the first attribute form with a default sort order is not included on a report. the Customer attribute holds information about the customer such as Name and Address. Each attribute form must have at least one expression. If you include Customer on a report with both Last Name and Address. metrics. For more information on advanced sorting. This is the default functionality for how attributes are sorted by their attribute forms on reports. Sorting defined for a report takes precedence over default sorting defined for attribute forms. For example. customers are sorted by their address in descending order.

You can also create a form expression using Apply functions. the CUST_FIRST_NAME and CUST_LAST_NAME columns in the warehouse provide information about first and last names respectively. the form expression for the Customer First Name attribute form is CUST_FIRST_NAME. The form expression for the Customer Last Name attribute form is CUST_LAST_NAME. Only implicit attributes do not include a column in the expression. page 155: Implicit form expressions do not relate directly to data stored in the data warehouse. -. page 153: Heterogeneous mappings allow you to use columns with different names in the data warehouse as the same attribute form. In this instance. . Derived expressions. page 150: Derived form expressions perform some type of mathematical calculation on columns in the data warehouse to create an attribute form. constants. *. page 148: Simple form expressions access data through columns in the data warehouse. /. for example. +. and/or mathematical operators. You can create expressions using attribute columns. since they only use the constants you declare. a form cannot have two different expressions in the same source table. Joining dissimilar column names: Heterogeneous mappings. Implicit expressions. These form expressions create virtual data by combining or using columns to generate the data. Inc. Although you can have multiple expressions in different tables. • • Simple expressions A simple expression is based on a single warehouse column. 148 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. The types of attribute form expressions are: • • Simple expressions. The definition of the simple expression includes the tables in which the column is found. These functions are discussed in the Pass-through Expressions appendix in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide For example.

Once gathered. The retailer’s customers provide a variety of information on the surveys. ID and Description. The expression for the ID form is the CATEGORY_ID column and the expression for the description form is the CATEGORY_DESC column. 2 Navigate to the Schema Objects folder. including their dates of birth. both of which are defined by simple expressions. the date of birth data eventually becomes part of the retailer’s data warehouse and the appropriate lookup table is added to the retailer’s project in MicroStrategy. open the Attributes folder. Both of these columns reside in the table LU_CATEGORY. Inc. Example: creating an attribute form with a simple expression A retailer begins a promotion that offers customers 25% off of their purchases if they fill out a feedback survey on the company website. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log in to MicroStrategy Tutorial. The Attribute Editor opens. This will enable report designers to display each customer’s date of birth alongside each customer’s name on reports. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 149 . Follow the procedure below to create Customer Birth Date as an attribute form in the Customer attribute. It has two forms. Category is an attribute in the MicroStrategy Tutorial. 3 Double-click the Customer attribute. To create an attribute form with a simple expression 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. the project designer must add the column containing the customer dates of birth as an additional attribute form of the Customer attribute. At this point. The retailer intends to analyze the data gathered from the surveys to better market their products in the future. and then the Customers folder.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 For example.

For example. 6 Double-click the CUST_BIRTHDATE column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. Any operation on a column (such as adding a constant.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide 4 Click New. derived expressions are defined using one or more columns as well as other operators and values. the attribute’s value 150 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. This is the table that contains customers’ dates of birth. type Customer Birth Date. in the Name field. 10 Click OK. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. The new Customer Birth Date attribute form is added to the Attribute form pane in the Attribute Editor. mathematical operators. 7 Click OK. 5 From the Source table drop-down list. The mapping method is selected as Automatic by default. . select the LU_CUSTOMER table. While simple expressions have their value determined by just one column in a warehouse table. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. you can create an attribute to hold the age of a customer or an employee that has been derived from the two columns. Derived expressions Derived expressions are created using a combination of warehouse columns. By creating an attribute to calculate age in this manner. select DATE since Customer Birth Date is neither the ID form of Customer nor the primary description form. functions. 8 In the Form general information area. By calculating the difference between the columns Date of Birth and Current Date. and constants. or setting the expression to be an absolute value) creates a derived expression. Inc. you can create a derived attribute to calculate age or anniversaries. 11 Because this is only an example. 9 From the Category used drop-down list. close the Attribute Editor without saving your changes. adding another column.

you want reports to display a customer’s first name and last name together as a single entry on a report. you could create a derived expression for Name in the format of Last Name. As another example. and then the Customers folder. To create an attribute form with a derived expression 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. 2 Navigate to the Schema Objects folder. You can achieve this using a derived form expression Name. © 2007 MicroStrategy. First Name using the following syntax: CUST_LAST_NAME + “. Example: creating an attribute form with a derived expression In your database. but you must make sure you use expressions that meet the requirements of your database-specific SQL syntax. the information is displayed as Jones. you store Customer names in two different columns. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log in to MicroStrategy Tutorial. open the Attributes folder. CUST_FIRST_NAME and CUST_LAST_NAME. Calculations and functions used in a derived expression can assist in deriving data from the database. the attribute would need to be updated every time a customer or an employee has a birthday. If you created an attribute for age in which you included a constant number. the SQL query and resulting report can fail. However. “ + CUST_FIRST_NAME Using this expression. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 151 . Inc. this information is displayed as Mary Jones under the Name column. which consists of the two strings. the syntax of the derived expression for Name reads: CUST_FIRST_NAME + “ “ + CUST_LAST_NAME On a report. If you use syntax that is not supported by your database or other data source.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 is automatically updated as the age changes. Mary under the Name column. Using the Customer attribute.

First Name is neither the ID form of Customer nor the primary description form. select None since Last Name. “ +. . 11 In the Form general information area. 6 Double-click the CUST_LAST_NAME column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. 152 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide 3 Double-click the Customer attribute. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. place the cursor to the right of [CUST_LAST_NAME] and type + “. 8 Double-click the CUST_FIRST_NAME column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. close the Attribute Editor without saving your changes. The Attribute Editor opens. 13 Click OK. 10 Click OK. First Name. select the LU_CUSTOMER table. 9 Select Automatic as the mapping method. type Last Name. This is the table that contains customers’ first and last names. 12 From the Category used drop-down list. Your expression should be defined as shown below. 4 Click New. in the Name field. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. 5 From the Source table drop-down list. The new attribute form is added to the Attribute form pane in the Attribute Editor. Inc. 7 In the Form expression pane. 14 Because this is only an example.

you might be able to join columns with data types of Number and Integer. You can map Order_Date and Day_Date to the Day attribute—this ensures that both columns are used when information about the Day attribute is displayed on a report. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 153 . you can select as many or as few as you want to be used as part of the attribute’s definition. If you define more than one expression for a given form. The data types of columns used in a heterogeneous mapping for a given attribute must be identical or similar enough for your particular RDBMS to join them properly. In the Attribute Editor. most databases cannot join a data type of Text to a data type of Number.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Joining dissimilar column names: Heterogeneous mappings Heterogeneous mapping allows Intelligence Server to perform joins on dissimilar column names. The Day_Date column occurs in the LU_DATE table and the Order_Date column occurs in the ORDER_DETAIL and ORDER_FACT tables. you can use heterogeneous mapping to map the Day attribute to all of the columns in the data warehouse that represent the same concept of Day. Because different source systems may store information in various contexts. you can view the chosen tables in the source Tables area to the right of the Form Expressions area. Inc. For example. in the MicroStrategy Tutorial. Each expression is linked to a set of source tables that contain the columns used in the expression. However. © 2007 MicroStrategy. your company may have multiple columns in different tables that all represent the same business concept. Of all the tables in which the columns exist. heterogeneous mapping automatically occurs when tables and column names require it. For example. the ID form of the attribute Day contains two expressions. In the above example. depending on your database platform.

8 Click New. and then the Time folder. The mapping method is selected as Automatic by default.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide To create an attribute form with a heterogeneous column mapping 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. select the ORDER_DETAIL table. The mapping method is selected as Automatic by default. both of which use different tables as the source of their information. Inc. You could continue this process to add as many heterogeneous columns as part of one attribute form as necessary. 11 Click OK. 7 Click OK. 9 From the Source table drop-down list. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log in to MicroStrategy Tutorial. . The Create New Form Expression dialog box opens. 4 Click New. 5 From the Source table drop-down list. The Create New Form Expression dialog box opens. select the LU_DAY table. 2 Navigate to the Schema Objects folder. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. open the Attributes folder. The Attribute Editor opens. 6 Double-click the DAY_DATE column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. 10 Double-click the ORDER_DATE column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. 154 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. 3 Double-click the Day attribute. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. Notice that there are now two expressions for the attribute form definition.

Inc. select None since this is simply an example scenario.” This implicit expression is used to keep track of which orders are rush orders. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 155 .Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 12 In the Form general information area. 15 Because this is only an example. 13 From the Category used drop-down list. Any constant is acceptable. they are defined by constants you specify. The new Date Example attribute form is added to the Attribute form pane in the Attribute Editor. Such an attribute has an implicit expression. Implicit expressions While most attributes map directly to one or more physical columns in the warehouse. Implicit expressions are not defined by column names. which stands for “Yes. for each order that is a rush order. close the Attribute Editor without saving your changes. The Rush Order attribute is defined by two expressions: the Rush_Order column in the Order_Fact table and the implicit expression “Y”. for example. the Rush Order attribute in MicroStrategy Tutorial is an example of an implicit attribute. but are useful in special cases such as the scenario described above. Implicit attributes are useful in analyzing and retrieving relevant information. Implicit attributes are not commonly used. On a report with the Order and Rush Order attributes on the template. Some attribute definitions can be implied by the existence of a row in a certain table. an implicit attribute is a virtual or constant attribute that does not physically exist in the warehouse. in the Name field. Suppose you want a report to display which orders are rush orders so you can better keep track of your shipments. An implicit attribute such as Rush Order is useful for this purpose. For example. rather than being defined in terms of columns. although nothing is saved in an actual column. a “Y” is displayed in the Rush Order column. 14 Click OK. type Date Example. which is a constant value. © 2007 MicroStrategy. RushOrder=‘Yes’.

Because this column stores high-precision values. By doing so. a column alias performs the same function as it does for facts. which attempts to use a data type as similar as possible to the data type in your database or other data source (see Appendix D. However. you can create a Year attribute using the following form expression: ApplySimple("Year(#0)". SQL Server has a Year function that extracts just the year from a date. . the data type for an attribute form is inherited from the data type of the column on which the form is defined. Inc. In your data warehouse you have a lookup table for an Accounts attribute where the ID is Account Number and the ID is stored in the database as DECIMAL(18. The following are some examples of such cases.[Date_Id]) The ApplySimple expression above is syntactically correct for SQL Server. By default. In such a case. For attributes. This inheritance is governed by MicroStrategy. Data Types for more information on how MicroStrategy selects a matching data type). They can also help you take more advantage of the data in your data warehouse. you must modify the column alias for the attribute form and map it to a special data type. For example. the precision can be preserved when performing filtering. Column aliases allow you to specify a more appropriate data type that can help avoid errors in your SQL. but you would like to create a Year attribute. or page-by on the Account attribute. drilling. you may need to use a different syntax. However. there are cases where you may need to change the data type. Big Decimal. Another example could be a case in which your warehouse does not have a lookup table for year information.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Modifying attribute data types: Column aliases A column alias is a new data type that you can specify in place of the default data type for a given attribute form. Many database platforms have functions that can extract parts of a date from a Date data type. depending on your database or data source type. 156 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. 0).

and so on). the result of the calculation is a year. © 2007 MicroStrategy. 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. modify the column alias for the attribute form and change the default Date data type to an Integer data type.Tot_Dollar_Sales) WJXBFS1 FROM YR_CATEGORY_SLS a11 cross join TRANS_DATE_LW_LY a12 GROUP BY Year(a12.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 The data type for this attribute is automatically set to a Date data type. You can use the Attribute Editor to create column aliases. This is because Date_ID is a Date data type. in bold.Date_Id) While the column alias name does not affect the actual results or your report. However. log in to the project source that contains the attribute to create a new column alias for. The above example is a simple one. the column alias also lets you specify the column alias name to be used in the SQL generated by MicroStrategy. if you do not change the data type of the column alias. where the column alias name is used: SELECT Year(a12. Inc. Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms 157 . the system uses a Date data type and tries to insert integer data into this column. When you create a form expression using a custom expression or multiple columns (as discussed in Attribute form expressions. CustCol_2. To create a column alias for an attribute This procedure assumes you have already created an attribute with a valid attribute expression for which to create a new column alias. you can change the column alias name to be more meaningful.Date_Id) CustCol_1. The following piece of SQL shows. sum(a11. the column alias for the attribute form defaults to CustCol (or CustCol_1. some databases will return an error. When a temporary SQL table is created. To avoid the possibility of an error due to conflicting data types. and it is an integer. In addition to specifying the data type to be used for an attribute form. While this does not create a problem in all database platforms. page 147). such as 2002. but this can be useful for troubleshooting the SQL for a particularly complex report.

you can specify the byte length. The Attribute Editor opens. 7 You can modify the following properties for the column alias: • Column name: The name for the column alias which is used in any SQL statements which include the fact column. 10 Select Save and Close to save your changes. 6 Select New to create a new column alias. Data Types. 3 Select an attribute form and click Modify. Inc. see the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. 5 In the Column alias area. precision. The Column Editor .6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide 2 Right-click the attribute and select Edit.Definition dialog box opens. 9 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Attribute Editor.Column Selection dialog box. The Modify Attribute Form dialog box opens. bit length. 4 Select the Column Alias tab. For a description of the different data types supported by MicroStrategy. . whereas attributes themselves can be considered as report elements or group-by elements that have a one-to-many or a many-to-many relationship with 158 Column data descriptions and identifiers: Attribute forms © 2007 MicroStrategy. Depending on the data type selected. click Modify. The Column Editor . • • 8 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Column Editor . see Appendix D. or time scale for your column alias. For a detailed description on each of these properties. Attribute forms versus separate attributes Attribute forms can be considered as additional descriptions for an attribute. scale. Data type: The data type for the fact.Column Selection dialog box opens.

For more information on whether to model data as an attribute form or as a separate attribute. In other words. page 24. The data that you map to attributes can be represented as separate attributes or as an attribute form of an attribute. for example—without any problems. you should map data to an attribute form rather than a separate attribute if: • • There is a one-to-one relationship between an attribute and the data. Attribute relationships You link directly related attributes to each other by defining parent-child relationships. Attribute elements. however. and which tables are related to other tables. page 36. Attribute relationships 159 . You can run a report with two attributes that are related—Country and City. see Attribute forms. or else a Cartesian join occurs. how tables and columns are joined and used. as explained in Attribute relationships. The implications of whether attributes are related become clear when you begin building reports. © 2007 MicroStrategy. A Cartesian join. is very database intensive as every row in one table is joined to every row in the other table. dictate the relationships that you define between attributes. these relationships define how the engine generates SQL. or the actual data values for an attribute. Inc. must include a metric based on a fact that is on or below the level of the two attributes. In general. The parent-child relationships you create determine the system hierarchy within the project. A report with two unrelated attributes. which is generally undesirable. or cross join.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 other attributes. The decision to model data as an attribute form for a given attribute or as a separate attribute is usually determined during the logical data modeling phase of project design. You do not group by the data.

Inc. A citizen can have only one Taxpayer ID and a Taxpayer ID can be assigned to only one citizen. The relationship is defined through the attribute’s lookup table or a relationship table. and so on. These are the most common types of attribute relationships. Many-to-many: Each element in the parent attribute can have multiple children and each child element in the child attribute can have multiple parents. Attributes can be either related or unrelated to one another: • Related: A parent-child relationship is defined between two or more attributes. customers and accounts are an example of a many-to-many relationship. Three types of direct relationships can exist between related attributes. consider the Geography hierarchy of the Customer Analysis Analytics 160 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. This step is covered in Simultaneously creating multiple attributes. A common example of a one-to-one relationship is citizen and Taxpayer ID. In banking. This assumes that quarters are defined with an accompanying year such as Q4 2006. . One customer may have many accounts. and each account may be associated with many customers. Attributes of this type are often in the same hierarchy. Q1 2007. but a specific quarter can be in one year only. page 161. Attributes can also be related to other attributes through a chain of attribute relationships.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide In MicroStrategy Desktop. For example. such as in the case of a joint checking account. One-to-many: Each element in the parent attribute corresponds to one or more elements in the child attribute. One-to-one: Each element in the parent attribute has one and only one corresponding element in the child attribute. page 129. you can define relationships for the attributes in your project. Year has a one-to-many relationship to quarter. after a project has already been created. as part of the initial project design effort and in Viewing and editing the parents and children of attributes. and these relationships are defined by the attribute elements that exist in the related attributes. One year has many quarters.

which contains the attributes Customer Region. How attributes relate to one another and the types of relationships they share define the system hierarchy which is used to generate SQL. and Customer City: In this scenario.500 on January 5. care must be taken when using unrelated attributes on a single report. a certain customer. Attribute relationships 161 . Unrelated attributes can exist together in fact tables. This SQL. In general. 2003 on behalf of the health care company in which he works. No relationship is present in the lookup tables or relationship tables for these attributes. in turn. A particular customer and a particular day only make sense together if a fact is associated with that combination. While Customer City is not directly related to Customer Region. Customer Region and Customer State are directly related to each other and Customer State and Customer City also have a direct relationship. This allows you to include Customer Region and Customer City on a report and view the different customer cities for each customer region. spent $2. these two attributes are related through Customer State. determines the output of a report. For example. however. Customer State. In this case. • Unrelated: No parent-child relationship has been defined and the attributes are not related through a chain of attribute relationships. Inc. these attributes are relatively straightforward to deal with from a project design perspective.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Module of the MicroStrategy BIDK. For example. © 2007 MicroStrategy. the Customer and Day attributes have no relationship to one another. giving context to the fact. Don Addison. Viewing and editing the parents and children of attributes The relationships that exist between attributes rely on the parent-child specifications that you assign to attributes.

The Call Center attribute is listed. This means that only one call center exists in each distribution center. along with the relationship type it shares with Distribution Center. . Also. Follow the procedure below to view and edit the parents and children of the Distribution Center attribute. Assigning parent-child relationships to attributes allows you to connect attributes to one another in user hierarchies. The Attribute Editor opens. as discussed in Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes. So these two attributes have a one-to-many relationship. viewing and changing parent-child relationships may be a necessary troubleshooting method. open the Attributes folder. page 193. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log in to MicroStrategy Tutorial. 3 Double-click the Distribution Center attribute. in turn. Country. and then the Geography folder.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Parent-child relationships were designated when attributes were selected for the new project. A one-to-one relationship exists between Distribution Center and Call Center. when a report generates inaccurate SQL and results. is the parent of Distribution Center and multiple distribution centers exist in each country. the Distribution Center attribute is the parent of the Call Center attribute. 162 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. you can continue to make changes to the relationships between attributes even after creating your project. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. For a general procedure to view and edit the parents and children of an attribute. However. For example. 2 Navigate to the Schema Objects folder. To view and edit the parents and children of an attribute 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. Inc. and the relationship table in which the relationship exists. 4 Click the Children tab.

Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Consider a scenario in which multiple call centers now exist in the same distribution center so they no longer have a one-to-one relationship. close the Distribution Center attribute without saving your changes. While the topics are largely related to logical model design. you must change the relationship type between Call Center and Distribution Center. in this case. select One to Many from the Relationship type drop-down list. Logical data models and physical warehouse schemas are discussed in Chapter 2. Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model respectively. The Logical Data Model and Chapter 3. © 2007 MicroStrategy. can introduce additional complexity to the schema and warehouse design process. The following sections discuss the considerations you must make to ensure an effective warehouse design in light of the unique nature of these relationships. many-to-many relationships and joint child relationships. To change the relationship table. Attribute relationships 163 . 6 You also want the relationship between the two attributes to be defined in the LU_Employee table instead of the LU_Call_Ctr table in which it is defined now. and how to read and interpret them. These chapters discuss how to plan and create a conceptual framework for your business intelligence data. a working knowledge of physical schemas is helpful when dealing with the challenges involved with these topics. you should know what logical data models and physical warehouse schemas are. Supporting many-to-many and joint child relationships Two forms of attribute relationships. 5 To change the relationship type. select the LU_Employee table from the Relationship table drop-down list. Before reading this section. Inc. 7 Because this is only an example.

blue hats. • The following sections use the example of items and colors to demonstrate a many-to-many relationship and the options you have for dealing with them. there are many colors for a single type of car. With the presence of many-to-many relationships.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Many-to-many relationships The presence of many-to-many relationships introduces complexity during the warehouse design process. One item can come in many colors—red hats. there are usually two business questions for which users want answers: 1 In what colors are certain items available? 2 How much of a particular item/color combination was sold? 164 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. and many types of cars can be associated with the same color. each salesperson can work in more than one calling center. In a car manufacturing plant. Inc. red shoes. green hats—and one color can be associated with many items—red dress. each calling center has many salespeople. Likewise. Potential problems with many-to-many relationships usually come in the following forms. many models of cars are produced. both of which can be avoided by correctly modeling the relationship: • • Loss of analytical capability Multiple counting Loss of analytical capability With the color/item many-to-many relationship. and each comes in several colors. red socks. . Below are some real-life examples of many-to-many relationships which must be carefully handled in the data model and schema: • In a certain organization. red hat. That is. you must make additional considerations to effectively plan your design.

The following diagram shows the same scenario as before. Recall that one-to-many relationships are usually in the child’s lookup table. Rather. The following diagram shows the lookup and relationship tables for item and color: The Rel_Color_Item table provides a row for every possible item/color combination. a distinct relationship table needs to be present in your warehouse.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Answering the first question requires a table that contains a list of all possible item/color combinations. Answering the second question requires a fact table that has sales information as well as color and item information. but in addition it shows a simple fact table containing sales data keyed by item. In many-to-many relationships this is not feasible. color. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. Attribute relationships 165 . and date.

Multiple counting When dealing with many-to-many relationships.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide The fact table in the above diagram alone is not sufficient to answer the first question. The relationship exists in a distinct relationship table. In summary. this fact table cannot provide a complete list of item/color combinations to answer question one. the following requirements must be met: • • A distinct relationship table to identify all the possible combinations of attribute elements between attributes Both the attribute ID columns in the fact table You can implement the above points in several different ways. Only item/color combinations that were actually sold—and therefore have sales recorded—can be retrieved from this table. to prevent any loss of analytical flexibility when dealing with a many-to-many attribute relationship. All of the attributes in the many-to-many relationship are not in the fact table. • • 166 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. . which are discussed in Working with many-to-many relationships. or a higher level than one of the attributes in the many-to-many relationship. Another equally significant issue is multiple counting. Multiple counting occurs when all of the following takes place: • You attempt to aggregate data to the level of one of the attributes in the many-to-many relationship. If you have item/color combinations that are available but that have never been sold. page 168. loss of analytical capability is only one challenge.

This query would require both the fact table—which has the sales information by item—and the relationship table—since color is not recorded in the fact table. Attribute relationships 167 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. dresses. and green—with the exception of socks. which come in only green and blue.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Recall the example from above. Inc. but make the following change: remove color from the fact table. and socks—and that they come in three colors—red. The following diagram shows this data in the lookup tables as well as some simple sales data: The risk of multiple counting occurs when you run a query requesting the sales by color. blue. effectively aggregating to the item attribute level in the many-to-many relationship. Assume that there are three items—hats.

Inc. seemingly simple questions can require you to take a number of steps to answer them when many-to-many relationships are involved. which is the total for all hats and dresses. There is no way to directly relate the sales of an item in the fact table to the color of that particular item. using the given data. The three techniques all have differing levels of 168 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. you cannot confirm this since color is not recorded in the fact table. This obviously leads to numbers that are higher than the true sales for red items. the correct answer is $0. • What are the total sales for red items? You cannot determine an accurate answer. Working with many-to-many relationships As you can see. It is entirely possible that all the dresses sold are green. For example. which can be calculated directly from the fact table. however. but the answer you will get based on the data in the fact table is $50. instead of calculating the sales of red items. The sum includes all hats and all dresses. . the following questions cannot all be answered accurately: • What are the total sales for hats? The answer is $35. including blue ones and green ones. • What are the total sales for red dresses? Again. For example. If all the dresses sold are indeed green. You can use one of three techniques to provide physical support to answer the types of questions that cannot be answered accurately when using many-to-many relationships. since socks do not come in red. The following section describes several ways to prevent multiple counting when dealing with many-to-many relationships. you cannot determine an accurate answer. The answer you get is $85. the query aggregates sales for all items that come in red according to the relationship table.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide The difficulty lies in the fact that color is not in the fact table.

© 2007 MicroStrategy. This means that you must capture the additional data in the source system. and flexibility is always a trade-off with complexity. Attribute relationships 169 . In all cases. the fact table is used to answer the query. Method 1 This method is the most straightforward way to effectively manage many-to-many relationships. the SQL Engine uses the related table when no metric is included on the report. Rel_Color_Item) and add both attribute IDs to the fact table as shown in the following diagram. If this additional data was never captured in the source system. All of the following methods require additional data in the fact table. For example. the two fundamental components remain in place in one form or another: • • A relationship table to define the attribute relationship Both the attribute’s ID columns in the fact table MicroStrategy builds the rules that MicroStrategy SQL Engine uses to generate SQL when a report request is made. When a metric is included. Inc. you need to have data in the source system as to what the color is of each item sold. Method 1 requires you to create a separate relationship table (in this case.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 flexibility. If you make both of the above physical implementations. you cannot fully resolve the many-to-many relationship to calculate the amount of sales for items of a certain color.

Also. lower in level than either Color or Item.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Method 2 Method 2 eliminates the many-to-many relationship and the need for a distinct relationship table. You treat one attribute as a child of the other and have a compound key for the lower level attribute. which gives it a 170 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. rather than two Here you must create a new attribute. Inc. you lose the ability to view items independent of color. While this method eliminates the need for a separate relationship table. Method 3 Method 3 is the most versatile solution and has the following characteristics: • • • Further simplifies the compound attribute relationship from Method 2 into a simple attribute relationship Provides the ability to view item and color together or independently Requires only one attribute column in the fact table for complete flexibility. in this case Item_ID and Color_ID. Here the many-to-many relationship is converted into a compound attribute relationship. . This attribute is essentially a concatenation of Color and Item. or vice versa. to the fact table as shown in the following diagram. you add both attribute IDs.

as shown in the following diagram. which extends the relationship of each item/color combination into a single value. They do not fit neatly into the modeling schemes you have learned about thus far. SKU.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 one-to-many relationship between itself and each of its parent attributes. like facts. text facts. they exist at the intersection of multiple attribute levels. Joint child relationships Some attributes exist at the intersection of other indirectly related attributes. These relationships can be modeled and conceptualized like traditional attributes but. Consequently. particularly common in retail data models or situations. Joint child relationships connect special attributes that are sometimes called cross-dimensional attributes. rather than including Color and Item in the fact table. This is the SKU attribute. as well as possibly adding complexity to the ETL process. Finally. Inc. The major disadvantage of Method 3 lies in creating the new attribute if your business model does not already use a similar structure. or qualities. you can use this single value in the fact table. Attribute relationships 171 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. you only need to include this new child attribute SKU. Such attributes are called joint children. The major difference is that the distinct relationship table from Method 1 has an additional column. This method is actually quite similar to Method 1.

Item. . these are likely candidates for joint child relationships. as shown in the following diagram. In this case. Promotion has a many-to-many relationship to both Item and Quarter. Therefore. Supporting joint child relationships One way to resolve a many-to-many relationship is to have a relationship table for the attributes involved in the many-to-many relationships. consider the relationship between three attributes: Promotion. Joint child relationships are really another type of many-to-many relationship where one attribute has a many-to-many relationship to two otherwise unrelated attributes. you might create 172 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy. and Quarter. if flags are referenced in your source system documentation.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Many source systems refer to these special attributes as flags. A business might run this promotion around Valentine's Day and again at Christmas time. For example. In this case. Inc. An example of a promotion might be a “Red Sale” where all red items are on sale.

These two tables are sufficient to answer questions such as: • • What items have been in what promotions? What quarters have had what promotions? However. it does not necessarily have to be in its own. Alternatively. you can build the relationship directly into the fact table. Inc. you must combine the two relationship tables. Attribute relationships 173 . The second relates Promotion and Quarter as shown in the following diagram. The relationship in the distinct relationship table must exist for a joint child relationship to be properly defined. Defining the relationship directly in the lookup table for the parent of the joint child—in this case.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 two relationship tables. However. creating one table to relate all three attributes. these tables are not sufficient to answer the following more detailed and insightful questions: • • What items were in what promotions in a given quarter? In what quarters was a certain item involved in a certain type of promotion? To answer these questions. distinct relationship table. one to relate Promotion and Item. Promotion—would be fine. © 2007 MicroStrategy.

as opposed to it being related to Item and Quarter separately. Inc. 174 Attribute relationships © 2007 MicroStrategy.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide In these examples. Notice that a joint child relationship can be one-to-many or many-to-many. The issues with many-to-many relationships—loss of analytical capability and multiple counting—also apply to many-to-many joint child relationships. . The Promotion attribute is related to a particular Item-Quarter pair. If you have a joint child relationship in your data. It is important to notice the relationship between the three attributes. This ensures that when you need to join the fact table to the parent attribute of a joint child relationship—for example. to see sales by promotion—the join will always use both joint children rather than just one or the other. This is the essence of a joint child relationship and is shown in the following diagram. it is important for you to define it in MicroStrategy so that you get the correct data for reports that use the parent attribute in a joint child attribute.

notice that the attributes Origin Airport and Destination Airport are defined using the same lookup table. You need to support the logical concepts of an origin airport and a destination airport. How an attribute plays multiple roles depends on the specific attribute. in the following image. Inc. Suppose you define two attributes that have the same data definition but play different roles in your business model. LU_AIRPORT. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles 175 .Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles Attribute roles allow you to use the same data to define and support two separate attributes. it is understood that destination airport data differs from origin airport data. AIRPORT_ID. the attributes are essentially playing different attribute roles. When multiple attributes are defined using the same lookup table and column. Creating two separate lookup tables would create redundancy. but you do not want to create two separate lookup tables with identical data. For example. Although it makes sense to see JFK as either an origin or destination airport on a report. and column. and thus take up more storage space and be harder to maintain.

such as description. In the fact table. . In the following diagram. In one case. as shown below. or various aspects about them. location. it refers to the 176 Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles © 2007 MicroStrategy. and so on. the fact columns are ORIGIN_AIRPORT_ID and DESTINATION_AIRPORT_ID.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide The Origin Airport and Destination Airport attributes share the same attribute forms. you must create an attribute in the logical model for each of the roles. page 177. a separate column exists for each of their roles. This occurs because the SQL statement tries to obtain the description of an airport that is both MIA and LGA at the same time (Airport_ID = "MIA" AND Airport_ID = "LGA"). however. an empty result set is returned. Inc. This ensures that a report with attributes playing multiple roles returns correct data. If you identify that one of your attributes needs to play multiple roles. as explained in Specifying attribute roles. State is another example of an attribute that can have two roles since it relates to both the Vendor and Store attributes. If a report designer places both the Origin Airport and Destination Airport attributes on a report to obtain the number of flights that originated from MIA and arrived at LGA.

The results may be blank if the data warehouse structure was set up incorrectly. roles are most often implemented as a single table. you must treat them as different attributes. where you create multiple attributes that have the same lookup table and allow MicroStrategy to automatically detect the multiple roles. generating the empty result set.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 location of a vendor. a report is created to display vendors from Arkansas who sold to New York stores. it refers to the location of a store. Specifying attribute roles To see both roles on the same report. The State attribute is therefore said to be playing two roles. Automatic recognition is enabled by the VLDB © 2007 MicroStrategy. For example. Inc. a query involving both Vendor State and Store State needs to use the State table twice in the same query. In the data warehouse. they must have different attribute names. To create unique attributes. In an OLTP system. The SQL statement tries to obtain the description of a state that is both Arkansas and New York simultaneously. Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles 177 . That is. In the other. as shown in the above diagram. you have the following options: • Automatic attribute role recognition.

if you identify that any one of your attributes needs to play multiple roles. where you create multiple logical tables pointing to the same physical table and define those two logical tables as the lookup tables for the two attributes. For more information. the two State attributes do not have a common child attribute. the attribute has multiple roles. Table aliasing provides advanced users with more control. If you create more than this number of attributes. Engine Attribute Role Options. If you are new to MicroStrategy. Automatic recognition does not work if the attributes are in the same hierarchy. • Explicit table aliasing. MicroStrategy recommends that you take advantage of automatic role recognition if you do not know the details of the modeling logic or the database. as Ship Month and Order Month. In this example. refer to the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. is enabled). you can have a maximum of 99 attributes defined on the same column of the same lookup table. an attribute must be created in the logical model for each of the roles. it may be the better alternative. however. In a MicroStrategy project in which automatic attribute role recognition is enabled (meaning that the database instance-level VLDB property. Remember this rule to help you identify attribute roles: If you want to see the same attribute multiple times on one report. Inc.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide property Engine Attribute Role Options at the database instance level. for example. If you are upgrading or have a very complex schema. . meaning that a child attribute is shared. You can use either automatic attribute role recognition or explicit table aliasing to create the attribute roles. For example. it is easier to use automatic attribute role recognition. Month is the attribute that has multiple roles. and are unable to update the project schema or restart Intelligence Server. in the State example provided above. 178 Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles © 2007 MicroStrategy. you encounter an error. In summary.

” The same lookup table. “Show me total sales by Store State for all my vendors in Arkansas (Store State ID = 15). both of which use the same lookup table. to access the same lookup table. Since the state in which a vendor resides and the state in which one of the stores is located are two different things. The logical model would look like the following: Note that both roles for the State attribute are included in the logical model so that “State” can be considered from two different perspectives. Consider the following sample desired report: Vendor_State_ID=15 (Arkansas) Metrics Vendor State Vendor Store Store State Dollar Sales In this case. Automatic recognition allows these two attributes. a query involving both Vendor State and Store State needs to use the State table twice in the same query to get correct results. can be used for both © 2007 MicroStrategy. Automatic role recognition works only when the attributes use exactly the same expression. Inc. which in most cases simply represents a column or columns in a lookup table. Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles 179 . Store State and Vendor State. You can set up two attributes. the request is. Vendor State and Store State. using different attribute names for the same expression.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Using automatic attribute role recognition In the data warehouse. LU_State. the logical model must reflect that. The resulting SQL code contains a self-join with the LU_State table.

the State attribute is said to play two roles: it refers to both the location of a vendor as well as the location of a store. so advanced users are encouraged to take advantage of this solution. Inc. . found in the database instance-level VLDB Properties under Query Optimization. An attribute such as State can play more than one role in the data warehouse. Explicitly aliasing tables to specify attribute roles Explicit table aliasing provides more robust functionality than automatic recognition. See the MicroStrategy Desktop online help or the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide for steps to set this VLDB property. if attribute roles are used. To use automatic attribute role recognition. Store State and Vendor State. The two attributes refer to the same columns of that table. In this case. it can represent the Vendor State or the Store State. just as it would if you used automatic recognition: 180 Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles © 2007 MicroStrategy. both roles for the State attribute are included in the logical model so that State can be considered from two different perspectives.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide attributes. you must select the Engine Attribute Role Options. The logical model would look like the following. When you use explicit table aliasing to designate attributes that have multiple roles.

Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 The difference between automatic recognition and explicit table aliasing is that when you use explicit table aliasing. Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles 181 . as shown by this sample SQL: SELECT a12. but point them each to the same physical table. you create separate lookup tables in the schema. LU_State. one table (LU_State_Store) contains the attribute Store State while the other (LU_State_Vendor) contains Vendor State. for both state names. the two lookup tables LU_State_Store and LU_State_Vendor are used.State_Desc as State_Desc FROM LU_State a12 LU_State a13 © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. as shown in the following diagram. Since they are just different names for the same physical table.State_Desc as State_Desc SELECT a13. the report accesses the same physical table. Consider the following sample desired report that should provide data about the total sales by Store State for all vendors in Arkansas (Store State ID = 15): Vendor_State_ID=15 (Arkansas) Metrics Vendor State Vendor Store Store State Dollar Sales When explicit table aliasing is used. If you use explicit table aliasing for the Store attribute.

refer to Appendix C. and rename the table as LU_State_Vendor. In the case above. An LU_State(1) table is created. An LU_State(1) table is created. Table aliases are one kind of logical table. you would select the LU_State_Store table for the Store State attribute and LU_State_Vendor for Vendor State. the selected table is copied. 182 Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles © 2007 MicroStrategy. Logical Tables. When you are ready to create new attributes—as in the example discussed above—you can map the appropriate table to each attribute. select Rename. 6 Right-click LU_State(1). Create the attributes 7 Select the Attributes folder. You can use the same high-level procedure and concepts as guidelines to create attribute roles in your project setup. 5 Right-click the LU_State table and select Create Table Alias. 4 Right-click LU_State(1). and then select the Tables folder. For information about logical tables.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide You create table aliases in the Schema Objects/Tables folder in MicroStrategy Desktop. 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. allowing you to rename a copy of the same table. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log into MicroStrategy Tutorial. To create attribute roles with explicit table aliasing This procedure provides steps to re-create the example of explicit table aliasing described in this section. 2 Navigate to the Schema Objects folder. select Rename. and rename the table as LU_State_Store. 3 Right-click the LU_State table and select Create Table Alias. Inc. . When you create a table alias.

10 In the Available columns pane. Generally. 16 Create a Vendor State attribute with the same sub-procedure (Create the attributes. you build a compound © 2007 MicroStrategy. otherwise the attributes cannot have separate roles. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. and then Attribute. This implies that more than one ID column is needed to uniquely identify the elements of that attribute. 9 From the Source table drop-down list. Inc. Attributes with more than one ID column: Compound attributes 183 . 12 In the Source tables pane. double-click STATE_ID. Attributes with more than one ID column: Compound attributes A compound attribute is an attribute with more than one column specified as the ID column. The Attribute Editor opens. select the LU_State_Store table. The Create New Form Expression dialog box opens. Do NOT select the LU_State_Vendor table as a source table. You must make sure to map any State Store attribute forms to columns from the LU_State_Store table. 13 Click OK. 14 Click New to map any other columns to attribute forms for the State Store attribute. select New. page 182) used to create State Store above. except you must use the LU_State_Vendor table instead of the LU_State_Store table. 11 Select Manual mapping and click OK. select LU_State_Store.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 8 From the File menu. 15 Save the State Store attribute once you are finished mapping attribute forms to columns of the LU_State_Store table.

In the relational database. It is an attribute that requires that two different columns are specified as the ID column. select the source table columns for Country ID and Distribution Center ID. page 186. They should also use the same lookup table. both the Country_ID and Dist_Ctr_ID columns must be mapped to the Distribution Center attribute to ensure that data about distribution centers is displayed correctly and completely on a report. regardless of country. The item shirt has an Item_ID of 1. there are different shirts. Item_ID and Class_ID must be grouped together. with two attribute forms. Therefore. Distribution Center. All of the ID forms of the compound attribute should be grouped together using form groups. Inc. a compound key is a primary key that consists of more than one database column. The values in the Item_ID column do not uniquely identify an item. The same Distribution Center identification numbers can exist for different distribution centers. Therefore. one must know two details about the distribution center: the ID of the distribution center and the country in which it exists.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide attribute when your logical data model reflects that a compound key relationship is present. a retail project has two attributes. and children’s. women’s. 184 Attributes with more than one ID column: Compound attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. creating a compound attribute. but in the same country. . Example: Creating compound attributes Distribution Center is an example of a compound attribute in the MicroStrategy Tutorial. each distribution center has a unique identification number. For information about form groups. Class is the parent of Item and has a one-to-many relationship with it. ID and Description. Class and Item. This creates a unique identifier for each distribution center. depending on the class—men’s. When defining the ID form. However. see Collections of attribute forms: Form groups. To uniquely identify a distribution center. to uniquely identify a man’s shirt. This data is represented by the Dist_Ctr_ID and Country_ID columns respectively. For example. You can create a compound attribute.

select New. with the Create New Form Expression dialog box displayed on top of it. 10 Double-click the DIST_CTR_ID column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Follow the procedure below to create the Distribution Center compound attribute. 5 Double-click the COUNTRY_ID column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. The Attribute Editor opens. Attributes with more than one ID column: Compound attributes 185 . Inc. 2 Navigate to the My Personal Objects folder. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log into MicroStrategy Tutorial. in the Name field. and click OK. click New to create the other attribute ID form. To create the Distribution Center compound attribute 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. and then Attribute. 9 In the Attribute Editor. 3 From the File menu. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. 7 In the Form general information area. This is the table in which the two ID columns of Distribution Center reside. © 2007 MicroStrategy. and open the My Objects folder. This attribute form maps to the distribution center ID column necessary to complete the definition of the Distribution Center attribute. select the LU_DIST_CTR table. 4 From the Source table drop-down list. type Country ID. For a general procedure to create compound attributes. 11 Select Automatic mapping and click OK. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. 6 Select Automatic mapping and click OK. 8 Keep all other defaults.

type Distribution Center ID Number. Inc. with the form group you created in the Attribute forms pane. You must designate this attribute form as an ID column so that it can be combined with the Country_ID form to create one unique identifier ID for the Distribution Center attribute. 15 In the Name field. In general. For basic information and examples about form groups. which are attributes with more than one column specified as the ID column. You must create a form group to create a compound key. type Distribution Center and click OK. This is necessary when creating compound attributes. select ID from the Category drop-down list. you create form groups to create compound attributes.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide 12 In the Form general information area. 13 In the Form category section. page 186. which identifies that an attribute form requires more than one ID column to uniquely identify its elements. Click OK. . The Attribute Editor opens. You can also use form groups to link similar forms together so that they are displayed together on a report. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. close the Distribution Center attribute without saving your changes. COUNTRY_ID) is already using the ID form category and that you must create a form group to combine the two ID columns. 16 Because this is only an example. in the Name field. refer to Collections of attribute forms: Form groups. 186 Collections of attribute forms: Form groups © 2007 MicroStrategy. Collections of attribute forms: Form groups A form group is a grouping of attribute forms that are related in a way that justifies combining the forms into a single form. Create a form group 14 A dialog box notifies you that another form (in this case. Click Yes.

To uniquely identify the two distribution centers you must include the Country_ID as part of the attribute ID. you can design a uniquely defined form that groups two or more forms under an attribute. This is because all countries identify distribution centers with numbers starting at 1. To uniquely identify a distribution center. Distribution Center is an example of a compound attribute. page 185. Collections of attribute forms: Form groups 187 . When you create a form group. choose the same form category for both forms—you are then prompted to name your new form group. the Distribution Center attribute is identified using a form group that combines these two forms. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Therefore. In the Attribute Editor. you have a distribution center in London. Inc. In the MicroStrategy Tutorial.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 Supporting compound attributes Compound attributes are required when an attribute requires two or more columns to uniquely identify its elements. France which has a Dist_Ctr_ID=1 as well. a compound attribute is created by using a form group to group together two forms to create the attribute’s ID. England which has Dist_Ctr_ID=1. the included forms are joined together and act as one form. For an example of creating a form group (form group creation is a subtask of the complete procedure). By grouping forms. When you create a form group. For example. one needs information from both the Country_ID and Dist_Ctr_ID tables. and you also have a distribution center in Paris. see the procedure To create the Distribution Center compound attribute.

as described in the procedure below. You can group two or more attribute forms together while creating the attribute forms as described in To create the Distribution Center compound attribute. To group attribute forms as a form group 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. the user can simply display the Name form and the report then includes both the customers’ first and last names. Inc. You can also group two or more attribute forms as a form group after creating all of the attribute forms. For example. .6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide Displaying and organizing related forms Form groups are also used to conveniently organize common attribute forms that can be paired on a report. page 185. log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and then log into MicroStrategy Tutorial. the form group in the diagram below joins the forms Last_Name and First_Name to create the form group Name for the attribute Customer: By grouping these two forms. 188 Collections of attribute forms: Form groups © 2007 MicroStrategy.

type Item and Foreign Name and click OK. type Item Name2. in the Category used drop-down list. Users browse through attributes to locate an attribute to use on a report. 8 In the Form category area. A form group which includes an item’s name and foreign name is created for the Item attribute. The Attribute Editor opens. and then right-click the selected attribute forms and select Group. 9 Click OK. 6 Select Automatic mapping and click OK. 11 In the Name field. they are used in two primary ways—browsing and reporting. and then the Item folder. 7 In the Form general information area. and users place an attribute on a report to display details about the particular attribute and how it relates to fact data. do not save the changes to the Item attribute. The Attribute Editor opens. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. in the Name field.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 2 Navigate to the Schema Objects folder. open the Attributes folder. select None. 10 Select the Item Name 2 and Foreign Name attribute forms. Using attributes to browse and report on data 189 . The Create New Form Expression dialog box opens. The Create New Attribute Form dialog box opens. 4 Select New. The Attribute Editor opens. 3 Double-click the Item attribute. Inc. 5 Double-click the ITEM_NAME column to add it to the Form expression pane on the right. Since this is only an example of how to create a form group. Each © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using attributes to browse and report on data Once attributes are built.

You must choose a default attribute display for browsing and another for reporting. This separation allows for greater attribute display flexibility depending on the application. then you might choose to display the Long Description form. you select a different set of values for display. a report includes Region as an attribute. . By selecting different forms for the attribute. For example. You can also select which attribute forms are retrieved with the report results but not displayed on the grid. When creating attributes. Inc. that is. If Description is selected as the attribute form.com. The only exception is if you create multiple attribute forms. www.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide attribute can be displayed in a variety of forms so you must specify the default display of each of the attributes in the project. For example you can include a cities URL attribute form as a browse attribute form so that your users can choose to display the form on a report. Report display forms are the attribute forms that appear as columns in a completed report. all forms are included as report display forms and browse forms by default. or project-wide. An attribute’s report display forms determine which attribute forms are displayed by default when the report is executed. If ID is selected as the attribute form. the display could be a name. You can modify the attribute forms displayed by: • Right-clicking an attribute on a report or template and selecting the desired attribute forms 190 Using attributes to browse and report on data © 2007 MicroStrategy. the display could be a number such as four. you can add the attribute forms in Report Objects to the report without re-executing the report. such as Northwest. browse forms identify attribute elements.chicago. default for each attribute. If a report lists the cities in which you have stores. You can do this on a report-by-report basis. the first form you create is not included as a report display or browse form. These browse forms are found in the Report Objects pane. Browse forms are the attribute forms that appear as a user browses through the element list of an attribute in the Data Explorer in a project. instead of the URL attribute form. In Grid view. Therefore. but you still must specify the global. such as Chicago.

Setting how attribute forms are displayed by default You can generally display attribute forms in a number of ways. Follow the example procedure below to set one of the Distribution Center attribute’s forms to be displayed in reports and while browsing the MicroStrategy Tutorial project.” You can use the Attribute Editor to determine how the attribute forms are displayed on a report. The Description form of Distribution Center. see the online help and the section below. Inc. For a general procedure to set how attribute forms are displayed by default. however. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. displays the actual name of the Distribution Center such as “San Diego. the distribution center names. Displayed on a report. or both are displayed. You can also determine which attribute forms are displayed when browsing a project with the Data Explorer. the Dist_Ctr_ID form shows the identification numbers of specific distribution centers in the data warehouse. you can specify whether the identification number of each distribution center. selecting Attribute Display to open the Attribute Display dialog box For steps to display attribute forms on a report or template. The ID form group is made up of two separate ID columns. Country_ID and Dist_Ctr_ID. © 2007 MicroStrategy. In the case of the Distribution Center attribute. the Distribution Center attribute in the MicroStrategy Tutorial consists of an ID form group and a Description form.Project Design Guide The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes 6 • From the Data menu. Using attributes to browse and report on data 191 . For example.

• 192 Using attributes to browse and report on data © 2007 MicroStrategy. in the Report display forms pane. This means that. The Data Explorer is discussed in Enabling hierarchy browsing in reports: Data Explorer. 2 Double-click the Distribution Center attribute. To set the ID 2 form so it is displayed in the Data Explorer when a user browses the Distribution Center attribute: Select ID 2 from the Available forms pane and click the bottom > button to add the form to the Browse forms pane on the right. See the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide for details. The ID 2 form in the Available forms pane represents the distribution centers’ identification numbers. On the right. and then the Geography folder. open the Attributes folder. Inc. The Attribute Editor opens. close the Attribute Editor without saving your changes. . page 209.6 The Context of Your Business Data: Attributes Project Design Guide To display an attribute form in reports and in the Data Explorer 1 In the MicroStrategy Tutorial. 5 Because this is only an example. You can also determine how attributes are displayed while users are editing and viewing reports. The Data Explorer makes hierarchies available for users to facilitate placing objects on reports. 3 Click the Display tab. 4 You can set the ID 2 form to be displayed in the following ways: • To set the ID 2 form as a form that is displayed on a report by default: Select ID 2 from the Available forms pane and click the top > button to add the form to the Report display forms pane on the right. when the Distribution Center attribute is used on a report. the description form of the Distribution Center is set as the only display form. navigate to the Schema Objects folder. the actual names of the distribution centers are displayed.

CREATING HIERARCHIES TO ORGANIZE AND BROWSE ATTRIBUTES Introduction Hierarchies are groupings of attributes that can be displayed. Week. to reflect the relationships that exist between the attributes in a project. and Year attributes. Inc. 193 . In Chapter 2. you learned how to use hierarchies to group related attributes in practical business areas. either ordered or unordered. The system hierarchy is automatically created when you create a project and is maintained by the © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Logical Data Model. Month. This chapter discusses hierarchies as they exist in the MicroStrategy environment and provides information on the two different types of hierarchies in MicroStrategy. For example. you can include a Time hierarchy in your model that consists of Day.7 7. These types of hierarchies include the system hierarchy and the user hierarchy.

page 196. The user hierarchy is a hierarchy which you create specifically for your report designers. . Inc. see Types of hierarchies. you create user hierarchies using the Hierarchy Editor. 194 Creating user hierarchies © 2007 MicroStrategy. Creating user hierarchies In MicroStrategy Desktop. This chapter explores how to create and configure user hierarchies in MicroStrategy and provides additional information about hierarchy functionality in MicroStrategy Desktop. Follow the procedure below to learn how to create a user hierarchy.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide relationships that exist among the project’s schema objects. For information on user hierarchies and system hierarchies.

5 In the Select Attributes dialog box. 2 In the Folder List. 6 In the Hierarchy Editor. Inc. a dialog box opens notifying you that the hierarchy you are about to save is drillable in reports. or filtered. The arrows that connect certain attributes denote the presence of a relationship between the connected attributes. you must edit the attribute(s) in the Attribute Editor. page 209. and then the Data Explorer folder. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Hierarchy Editor opens. select the attributes to use in the hierarchy and click the arrow to add them to the Selected objects window. in the Available objects window. and then Hierarchy. an entry point. 7 Click Save and Close. and update the schema. Drill hierarchies are discussed in Drilling using hierarchies. select Show Details. The attributes you selected appear in the Hierarchy Viewer. This procedure is covered in Viewing and editing the parents and children of attributes. you can view the details of each attribute in the hierarchy. assign the appropriate parent or child relationship to the attributes. select New. Creating user hierarchies 195 . page 161. from the View menu. log into the project source that contains your project and open the project. 4 From the File menu.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 To create a new user hierarchy 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. If arrows do not appear between attributes you know are related. followed immediately by the Select Objects dialog box. To do so. If the Use as a drill hierarchy check box at the bottom of the Hierarchy Editor is selected. arrows appear between related attributes. 3 Open the Hierarchies folder. Click OK to close the Select Attributes dialog box. Once you save and re-open the hierarchy. Type a name for the hierarchy. navigate to and open the Schema Objects folder. These details include whether or not the attribute is locked.

9 Update the project schema by selecting Update Schema from the Schema menu. page 194. Inc. • 196 Types of hierarchies © 2007 MicroStrategy. you must place it in the Data Explorer sub-folder within the Hierarchies folder. User hierarchy: User hierarchies are named sets of attributes and their relationships to each other. Types of hierarchies The two types of hierarchies that exist in MicroStrategy include: • System hierarchy: The system hierarchy is created according to the relationships defined between the attributes in your project. However. Steps to create user hierarchies are discussed in Creating user hierarchies. As the structure of your business intelligence evolves. The ordering and grouping of attributes. You can save user hierarchies in any folder. it is automatically created in Desktop when you create a project. arranged in specific ways that make sense to a business organization. is defined in user hierarchies. Although the system hierarchy specifies an ordered set of all attributes in the project. to make the user hierarchy available for element browsing in the Data Explorer. among other configurations. This type of hierarchy is created to provide flexibility in element browsing and report drilling. you can easily change the design of a user hierarchy to include additional attributes or limit user access to certain attributes. You do not need to create the system hierarchy. navigate to the location in which you want to save the hierarchy. it does not define ordering or grouping among attributes. They are user-defined and do not need to follow the logical data model.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide 8 In the Save As dialog box. .

The system hierarchy cannot be edited but is updated every time you add or remove attribute children or parents in the Attribute Editor. You can access the Hierarchy Viewer from Graphical View in the Schema menu. Month. You can view the system hierarchy in the Data Explorer or in the Hierarchy Viewer. © 2007 MicroStrategy. When you first create a project. you can double-click Year to get to Quarter and double-click Quarter to get to Month. Quarter. Any attributes that are not assigned to a user hierarchy remain available to the system as report objects. User hierarchies: Logical business relationships User hierarchies are sets of attributes and their relationships. These report objects are discussed in detail in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. page 211. and components of consolidations. You create user hierarchies to define the browse and drill relationships between attributes. For example. The Hierarchy Viewer is discussed in detail in Using the Hierarchy Viewer. The system hierarchy holds information on the relationships between attributes in the project. arranged in specific sequences for a logical business organization.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 System hierarchy: Project schema definition The system hierarchy is the default hierarchy that MicroStrategy sets up for you each time you create a project. The system hierarchy is useful in determining relationships between all objects in the project. When you browse the attributes in the Data Explorer. and so on. but not the Hierarchy Editor. filter conditions. the only hierarchy it contains is the system hierarchy. Types of hierarchies 197 . Attributes from the system hierarchy do not need to be part of an explicitly-defined user hierarchy. It contains all of the attributes in the project and is actually part of the schema definition. or when you define attribute children in the Project Creation Assistant. Inc. you can create a Time hierarchy that contains the Year. and Day attributes.

he or she can drill down to Month. . Hierarchy organization The best design for a user hierarchy is to organize or group attributes into logical business areas. The example below demonstrates the Location and Customer hierarchies. you can place related attributes into hierarchies by their level. Within the Location hierarchy. Inc. For example. For example. 198 Hierarchy organization © 2007 MicroStrategy. and you can create any number of user hierarchies for each project. This allows users to more easily locate attributes in a project and navigate from one attribute to another. Contact. State.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide Whereas browsing occurs through the Data Explorer. and Store are organized according to their relationships to each other. up to Year. You can create user hierarchies in the Hierarchy Editor using one or more attributes from the system hierarchy. and Customer. or across to an attribute within another hierarchy. You should define user hierarchies that correspond to specific areas of your company business model and data warehouse schema. A user hierarchy is the only type of hierarchy you can define. City. if the user drills on the Quarter attribute in a report. in drilling the user actually chooses to move to higher or lower levels on a report or move across to levels within different hierarchies. The Customer hierarchy also groups together the attributes Company.

In the example below. Inc. The rest of this chapter discusses user hierarchies and how to create and configure them in your project. © 2007 MicroStrategy. you are developing a working design of the display and browse functions of the attributes. Hierarchy organization 199 . if you only include Store in the Region hierarchy. then the only options for drilling or browsing are the Region and Store levels. Hierarchy structure While both a system hierarchy and user hierarchy allow you to navigate attributes in your project. only the user hierarchy allows you to logically define and order groups of attributes. as in the second example. keep in mind that hierarchies do not have to be separate from one another or necessarily follow the dimensional structure of your logical data model. This hierarchy allows you to create drilling and browsing options to the lower levels to view Region. One hierarchy demonstrates Region having multiple States and the States having multiple Stores. State. When you group attributes together into user hierarchies. and Store on a report.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 When creating user hierarchies. However. there are two instances of the Region hierarchy.

page 205). The Hierarchy Viewer is discussed in further detail in Using the Hierarchy Viewer. Entry Point/Not an Entry Point: Specifies whether the user can begin browsing in this hierarchy using this attribute (see Entry point. You can use the Hierarchy Editor to configure each of these properties. In the system hierarchy. A filter on a hierarchy acts like a filter in a report. Represented by lines that connect one attribute to others (see Hierarchy browsing. page 203). The Aerial perspective provides an overview of hierarchies. Browse Attributes: Shows the attributes to which users can browse from a given attribute. page 201). page 211. Only data satisfying the filter criteria is displayed (see Filtering attributes in a hierarchy. In user hierarchies. the connections between the attributes represent the parent-child relationships. • • • 200 Configuring hierarchy display options © 2007 MicroStrategy. unlocked. its decreased scale allows you to navigate through the entire project. as shown in the following procedures: • Element Display: Determines the elements a user can see. The Hierarchy Viewer is accessed from the Graphical View option in the Schema menu. the connections show the browse paths between the attributes. Configuring hierarchy display options Each attribute in a user hierarchy has properties that affect how that attribute is displayed and accessed in a hierarchy. Inc. The element display may be locked.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide Viewing hierarchies: Hierarchy Viewer The Hierarchy Viewer graphically represents user hierarchies and the system hierarchy. or limited (see Controlling the display of attribute elements. page 206). Attribute Filters: Specifies whether the data retrieved and displayed should be complete or filtered by any specific criteria. .

Inc. While the user can view the attribute elements of Customer Region and Customer City. The Order attribute may be locked in order to prevent unauthorized users from accessing sensitive information about customer orders. a padlock icon appears next to the attribute name. For example. Controlling the display of attribute elements Locked/Unlocked attribute elements Locking a hierarchy prevents a user from viewing all elements of the specific attribute and any lower level attributes in the hierarchy. he or she cannot view information about each customer’s order. By restricting the view of attribute elements and lower level attributes in the Data Explorer. you can prevent the expansion of long attribute element lists that can consume system resources. You can lock the hierarchy to restrict the user from viewing elements and lower level attributes for security reasons or to better manage lengthy hierarchies. When you set the element display to locked. the attribute Order is locked in the Data Explorer sample shown below. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Configuring hierarchy display options 201 . Anything higher in the hierarchy is still visible. A hierarchy is referred to as locked when at least one attribute within that hierarchy has the Element Display option set to Locked.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 The following sections explain these properties and how to use the Hierarchy Editor to configure each.

For example. click Save and Close. You can also lock and unlock attributes when you edit them in the Display tab of the Attribute Editor. this locks and unlocks the attributes within the system hierarchy. 4 To unlock a locked attribute. 2 Right-click the attribute to lock or unlock. you can set the limit to five or ten at a time. Also. 5 In the Hierarchy Editor. retrieving a large number of elements at once can negatively impact system performance. Instead of loading all attribute elements at once. The padlock icon is removed from the attribute. Limited attribute elements Another way to restrict users from viewing attribute elements in the Data Explorer is to limit the number of elements that appear at one time. and users can no longer view elements of this attribute. 3 To lock an attribute.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide To lock or unlock an attribute in a hierarchy 1 Double-click the hierarchy to edit. and then Locked. no elements for Year display in the Data Explorer when Year is expanded. . select Element display. 6 Update the project schema by selecting Update Schema from the Schema menu. from the right-click menu. and then Unlocked. A padlock icon appears next to the locked attribute. from the right-click menu. select Element display. However. not any user hierarchies that contain the attributes. This method is useful when there are extensive attribute elements in a hierarchy. The user can then click the arrows to see the next set of elements for that attribute. The Hierarchy Editor opens. Inc. 202 Configuring hierarchy display options © 2007 MicroStrategy. if the attribute Year is locked in the Attribute Editor. and users can now view the elements of this attribute.

select Element display. Inc. and then Limit. For example. Rather than displaying all of them at once and overwhelming the user. contains many items. To limit the display of attributes in a hierarchy 1 In the Hierarchy Editor. refer to the Filters chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide to understand what filters are and how to create them in MicroStrategy. Filtering attributes in a hierarchy Before reading this section. 4 In the Hierarchy Editor. type the number of elements you want to see at one time and click OK. Configuring hierarchy display options 203 . With a filter you can choose exactly which attribute elements to display in a hierarchy. click Save and Close. 2 From the right-click menu. You can add filters to a hierarchy to control how data is retrieved and displayed. shown below. the Chocolate subcategory. a limit of five items has been set. you can filter a hierarchy so that data for only one © 2007 MicroStrategy. 5 Update the project schema by selecting Update Schema from the Schema menu.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 For example. The following graphic displays this view in the Data Explorer. right-click the attribute to limit. 3 In the Limit dialog box.

click OK. perform a type of security. limit the elements a user is allowed to see and therefore. 2 In the Hierarchy Editor. . Only those customers younger than 30 years old are displayed. Each attribute in the hierarchy can have multiple filters applied to it. Creating a limited hierarchy reduces the number of elements displayed at one time. you want to view only those customers who are younger than 30 years old. When adding filters to an attribute in a hierarchy. You cannot use a prompt-based filter to filter a hierarchy. Filters. When filtering attributes in a hierarchy. Inc. First. and view the Customer hierarchy in the Data Explorer. Filters increase efficiency when retrieving data because you can limit user access to parts of a hierarchy when you apply filters to attributes. create a filter on Customer Age less than 30. 204 Configuring hierarchy display options © 2007 MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy does not validate that the associated filter makes sense on that attribute. and the user is unable to see additional data in the hierarchy. you need to make sure that each filter is relevant to the attribute’s information. The filters allow the Data Explorer to display only the criteria you select. however. See the MicroStrategy Desktop online help for more details. right-click the attribute to filter and select Define Attribute Filters. To apply a filter to an attribute in a hierarchy 1 Create a filter in MicroStrategy Desktop. Filters make data retrieval faster by only allowing specific data to be displayed.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide quarter is displayed. Update the project schema. you are limiting the elements of the data returned when you browse the Data Explorer. or data for only a few days of one quarter. In the Hierarchy Editor. add the filter to the Customer attribute. For example. 3 If a tip about filtering opens.

If you set the attribute Week as an entry point. in the Available objects list. When you set an attribute to be an entry point. the attributes. Q3. 2006. Creating an entry point grants users faster access to the attribute without having to browse through multiple attributes to reach different levels in a hierarchy. an element for each Quarter. open. 5 Click OK to close the Select Filters dialog box. the hierarchy. elements for each Year. Configuring hierarchy display options 205 . For example. such as Q1. a typical hierarchy is Time. right-click the attribute to set as an entry point.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 4 In the Select Filters dialog box. Inc. If an attribute is not set to be an entry point. If you are seeking Week 24. © 2007 MicroStrategy. it still appears in the hierarchy but with a padlock icon. When you click on Time. you are creating a shorter route to access that attribute. and 2005. and Q4. You can see the locked attribute. but are unable to access elements or attributes below that level. To create entry points in a hierarchy 1 In the Hierarchy Editor. If you set a locked attribute as an entry point. click Save and Close. the attribute Week appears in the Data Explorer at the same level as Year. which is Week. opens. such as 2007. it appears in its normal position within the hierarchy structure. Entry point An entry point is a shortcut to an attribute in the Data Explorer. When you click on 2006. When you create a user hierarchy. you need to open several levels of attributes to reach the correct data level. The attribute to which you applied the filter appears in the hierarchy with a filter icon. and their elements appear in the Data Explorer. Q2. select the filters to apply and click > to add them to the Selected objects list. 6 In the Hierarchy Editor. This is especially useful when accessing frequently-used attributes.

206 Configuring hierarchy display options © 2007 MicroStrategy. and Item are the attributes that comprise the user hierarchy Catalog Items. 3 In the Hierarchy Editor. showing the parent/child relationships between the attributes. . attributes set as entry points are denoted by a green check. Subcategory. in the hierarchy below. select Remove Entry Point from the right-click menu. These relationships determine how users can browse the attributes from the Hierarchies folder. Category. you can define the relationships between them. Inc. the hierarchy resembles the example below.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide 2 From the right-click menu. Category is a parent attribute of Category and Category is the child attribute of Category. Some of the attributes in the Hierarchy Viewer may already be set as entry points. click Save and Close. select Set as entry point. if Catalog. Hierarchy browsing Once you choose which attributes to place in a hierarchy. To remove an entry point from an attribute. For example. For example. 4 Update the project schema by selecting Update Schema from the Schema menu.

Configuring hierarchy display options 207 .Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 A user hierarchy does not need to have these direct relationships defined. some of these attributes have been assigned a browse attribute. you are specifying what levels of detail are visible when browsing the Data Explorer. Including hierarchies in the Data Explorer makes the hierarchies available for reports and to users in the project. Browse attributes are attributes you specify a user can directly browse to from a given attribute in the user hierarchy. Attributes in a hierarchy can have both browsing and drilling relationships between them. page 209. For more information on including hierarchies in the Data Explorer. For each attribute in a hierarchy. When you apply browse attributes to attributes in a hierarchy. Subcategory Subcategory Catalog. see Enabling hierarchy browsing in reports: Data Explorer. without having to first browse down through the Category © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using the example above. It can simply be a collection of attributes. Specifically: Hierarchy Attribute Catalog Category Subcategory Item Browse Attribute(s) Category. Item The addition of these browse attributes allows users to see the Subcategory elements directly from the Catalog attribute. you can assign one or more browse attributes to it. Inc.

In the Data Explorer. . Users can now view the subcategories in the catalog without first having to browse through the categories. 208 Configuring hierarchy display options © 2007 MicroStrategy. the hierarchy described above resembles the example below. Inc.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide attributes to get to Subcategory. The ability to browse more directly through the hierarchy can be represented as shown below.

Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 Enabling hierarchy browsing in reports: Data Explorer You can make hierarchies available for browsing and including in reports by storing the hierarchies in the Data Explorer. at a project level. Inc. © 2007 MicroStrategy. drill back up from Month to Year. A new report is automatically executed. the system hierarchy for that project is automatically placed in the Data Explorer. Revenue data is reported at the Month level. reports can allow users to drill down. and across to different levels of detail. on a report with the Year attribute and Revenue metric. However. Moving hierarchies to and from this folder also allows you to keep some hierarchies visible to users while hiding others. You can save user hierarchies in any folder. You can make user hierarchies available for drilling. In the example of the Year and Month attributes. up. When a user selects a drilling path in a report. This option enables you to determine. to make a user hierarchy available for browsing in the Data Explorer you must place it in the Data Explorer folder—a subfolder of the Hierarchies folder. which contains the two attributes. on the new report. For example. Drilling using hierarchies Drilling is a function in MicroStrategy reports that allows users to browse different levels of attributes along specified paths. drilling is enabled in the Time hierarchy. the user can drill down on the Year attribute to a lower level attribute such as the Month attribute. if they need to. The Data Explorer is a tool in the Object Browser that holds the system hierarchy and the user hierarchies. This allows a user to drill down from Year to Month and. Depending on the level of the attributes included in the drilling specification. Configuring hierarchy display options 209 . the report refreshes to display the selected level of detail. which is located in the Schema Objects folder. When you create a new project. the attributes to which users can drill from other attributes.

Therefore. 2 At the bottom of the Hierarchy Editor. For example.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide To enable a user hierarchy as a drill path. select the Use as a drill hierarchy check box. If a user hierarchy is not enabled. click Save and Close. To enable drilling in a user hierarchy 1 Open the hierarchy in which to enable drilling. page 206 for more details about browsing attributes. the default drill path is defined by the System Hierarchy. See Hierarchy browsing. in the following hierarchy. If you enable drilling in this hierarchy. you can think of browsing paths in a user hierarchy as potential drilling paths. . Subcategory is a browse attribute of Catalog. 4 Update the project schema by selecting Update Schema from the Schema menu. 3 In the Hierarchy Editor. you can drill from Catalog down to Subcategory—and any other browse attributes of Catalog—on a report. which means that you can access the elements of Subcategory without having to necessarily access the elements of Catalog in Data Explorer. 210 Configuring hierarchy display options © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. you must enable the user hierarchy to be used as a drill hierarchy in the Hierarchy Editor.

The Table Viewer is another tool within MicroStrategy Architect that provides you with a bird’s eye view of some of the information within your project. For instance.Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 After a user hierarchy is enabled for drilling. © 2007 MicroStrategy. to facilitate user browsing and report development. the hierarchy contributes to the drilling path of any attributes in it. For details on entry points. When you view a user hierarchy. assume Week is a browsing attribute assigned to Year. you can see the actual relationships between attributes. but rather the structure of the user hierarchy as defined by a project designer. It is used to view all of the tables in your project graphically. When a user right-clicks on Year and selects Drill Down. • When you view the system hierarchy. You can see all of the entry points into a hierarchy at once. the attribute Week appears in the drill-down list. see Entry point. Using the Hierarchy Viewer The Hierarchy Viewer allows you to select the hierarchy you want to examine. or you may select only one at a time. page 205. Using the Hierarchy Viewer and Table Viewer Through the Hierarchy Viewer. and also allows you direct access to the attributes that comprise it. • The Hierarchy Viewer gives you flexibility over how much of a given hierarchy you choose to view at once. MicroStrategy Architect gives you the ability to view the system hierarchy as well as all of your user hierarchies in a single place. You can use the Hierarchy Viewer to view either the system hierarchy or any of your user hierarchies. Inc. as defined by the system when the project was created. you do not see true attribute relationships. Using the Hierarchy Viewer and Table Viewer 211 . Additional information on drilling is available in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

select Graphical View. you can define them as entry points. right-click the attribute to edit.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide The Hierarchy Viewer also gives you direct access to any of the attributes in the hierarchy you choose to view. Its decreased scale allows you to navigate through the entire project. page 205 for more details on creating entry points. 2 Select Hierarchies. 2 Attributes that have a green check mark next to them are entry points. To view the system hierarchy in the Hierarchy Viewer 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. . Inc. 2 Select Edit. select Aerial perspective. from the Schema menu. See Entry point. When you access a hierarchy’s attributes directly. 212 Using the Hierarchy Viewer and Table Viewer © 2007 MicroStrategy. select the hierarchy to view. from the Hierarchy menu. An aerial view of the hierarchy you are currently viewing is displayed. To edit an attribute from the Hierarchy Viewer 1 In the Hierarchy Viewer. page 205 for more details on creating entry points. To view a user hierarchy in the Hierarchy Viewer 1 In the Hierarchy Viewer. The green squares indicate attributes that are entry points. from the View menu. See Entry point. To access Aerial perspective mode in the Hierarchy Viewer 1 In the Hierarchy Viewer. In the Hierarchy Viewer. the Aerial perspective provides an overview of the hierarchies in your project.

2 In the Table Viewer. Inc. They represent and indicate how Architect sees the tables that were brought into the project when it was created. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using the Hierarchy Viewer and Table Viewer 213 .Project Design Guide Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes 7 2 The hierarchy in the Hierarchy Viewer shifts according to where you navigate in the aerial view. page 249 for information on updating logical table structures. as described above. If you make changes to the actual tables in the data warehouse. Using the Table Viewer The Table Viewer allows you to view all of the tables in your project as well as the joins and/or relationships between those tables and the names of the individual columns in each table. from the Schema menu. See The size of tables in a project: Logical table size. To view your project’s tables in the Table Viewer 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. you will need to update the logical table structure. select Options. To view more or less information about each table in the project 1 Open the Table Viewer. The tables that are displayed here are logical tables. Click a section of the aerial view display to shift your view of a hierarchy to that particular section. 2 Select Tables. select Graphical View.

.7 Creating Hierarchies to Organize and Browse Attributes Project Design Guide 3 From the Options menu. Inc. select or clear the options for any of the following. depending on what you want to see in the Table Viewer: • • • • • Show joins Use circular joins Show relationships Show relationship types Show columns 214 Using the Hierarchy Viewer and Table Viewer © 2007 MicroStrategy.

8 8. To see any enhancements and changes to your project schema. creating aggregate tables. This chapter introduces you to maintenance and optimization concepts such as tuning the interaction between your data warehouse and your project. you will need to make various schema changes. You can find this information in the sections listed below: • Updating your MicroStrategy project schema. page 216—As you continue to enhance the design and functionality of your project. you are ready to start thinking about ways to better maintain the project and optimize it for both the short and long term. Inc. and using partition mapping. and explains how to use these methods to enhance your project. you must update your project schema. 215 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. OPTIMIZING AND MAINTAINING YOUR PROJECT Introduction Once your MicroStrategy project is set up and populated with schema objects.

This can include adding new tables to your project or removing tables that are no longer used. Although the concepts are related. Partitions improve query performance by minimizing the number of tables and records within a table that must be read to satisfy queries issued against the warehouse. Whenever you make any changes to a schema object you must indicate to MicroStrategy that new schema object definitions have been included and that these definitions need to be loaded into memory. You can do any of the following to update your project schema: 216 Updating your MicroStrategy project schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 241—Aggregate tables store data at higher levels than the data was originally collected in the data warehouse. Rather. fact levels.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide • Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog. transformations. hierarchies. These summary tables provide quicker access to frequently-used data. attributes. . and so on within the project. page 250—Partition mapping involves the division of large logical tables into smaller physical tables. You can also tune the interaction between your data warehouse and your MicroStrategy project to bring your data into MicroStrategy in a way that meets your requirements. the project schema is not the same as the physical warehouse schema. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables. Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping. table sizes. and so on—in your project come together to form your project’s schema. and minimize the amount of data that must be aggregated and sorted at run time. your project must reflect these changes. the project schema refers to an internal map that MicroStrategy uses to keep track of attribute relationships. • • Updating your MicroStrategy project schema All of the schema objects—facts. Inc. page 218—As your data warehouse changes to meet new data logging requirements. reduce input/output and other resource requirements.

Updating your MicroStrategy project schema 217 . Manually updating the schema allows you to determine which specific elements of the schema are updated. 2 In the Schema Update dialog box. Inc. if in direct (2-tier) mode. Manually update the schema. Recalculate table logical sizes: Use this option to use MicroStrategy Desktop’s algorithm to recalculate logical table sizes and override any modifications that you have made to logical table sizes. Disconnect and reconnect to the project or the project source.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 • • • Stop and restart MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. • 3 Click Update. To manually update the schema 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. Logical table sizes are a significant part of how the MicroStrategy SQL Engine determines the tables to use in a query. Recalculate table keys and fact entry levels: Use this option if you changed the key structure of a table or if you changed the level at which a fact is stored. from the Schema menu. if in server-connected (3-tier) mode. or deleted a schema object. You can also update the schema with the last saved settings by clicking the Update Schema icon in the toolbar. © 2007 MicroStrategy. • Recalculate project client object cache size: Use this option to update the object cache size for the project. modified. select or clear the following check boxes: • • Update schema logical information: Use this option if you added. select Update Schema.

adding tables in the project through Project Builder can become a cumbersome process. From this list. page 239 218 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 219 Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. You can add warehouse tables to your project with the Warehouse Catalog or MicroStrategy Project Builder. Every project can have a unique set of warehouse tables. Adding tables through Project Builder is useful only when you are creating a project for the first time. the structure of the SQL catalogs. page 221 Modifying data warehouse connection and operation defaults. The Warehouse Catalog queries the data warehouse and lists the tables and columns that exist in it. you can select the tables to add to your project. This section covers the following topics: • • • • • • • What should I know before I use the Warehouse Catalog?. This section also discusses customizing catalog SQL statements.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog This section discusses how the Warehouse Catalog can control the interaction between the data warehouse and the database instance for a project. page 226 Customizing catalog SQL statements. Inc. page 219 Adding and removing tables for a project. and the default SQL statements used for each database. page 220 Managing warehouse and project tables. The Warehouse Catalog is better for maintaining the warehouse tables used for an existing project. page 233 Troubleshooting table and column messages. . as later.

For more information. In this case. then to MicroStrategy. 2 Log in to the project source that contains your project in MicroStrategy Desktop. so you know how the information in your data warehouse should be brought into MicroStrategy How to create a project Accessing the Warehouse Catalog To access the Warehouse Catalog 1 On the Windows Start menu. Inc. For more information on Query Builder. You can connect to OLAP cube sources such as SAP BW. You must use a login that has Architect privileges. you need to be familiar with: • • Your schema. Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources. and then select Desktop. For more information about privileges see the Permissions and Privileges appendix of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 Note the following: • You can also add tables to a project using MicroStrategy Query Builder. the OLAP Cube Catalog handles tasks similar to the Warehouse Catalog. and Microsoft Analysis Services instead of a relational database. point to Programs. refer to Appendix B. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. and expand your project. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 219 . • What should I know before I use the Warehouse Catalog? Before you begin using the Warehouse Catalog. then Desktop. Hyperion Essbase.

and click > to add the selected tables. as your project matures. To add or remove tables after creating a project 1 Access the Warehouse Catalog for your project as described in To access the Warehouse Catalog. you may need to remove tables from your project that are no longer used and are taking up space in the metadata. select the tables you want to add to the Warehouse Catalog. Click >> to add all the listed tables.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide 3 Select a project and then from the Schema menu. select the tables you want to add to the Warehouse Catalog. The list on the right shows all the tables already being used in the project: • To add tables—From the left side. . Click >> to add all the listed tables. page 219. and click > to add the selected tables. select Warehouse Catalog. You can access the Warehouse Catalog at any time to add additional tables from your data warehouse to your project and remove tables from your project. it may become necessary to add additional tables from the data warehouse to your project. The Warehouse Catalog opens after it retrieves the table information from the warehouse database. 2 The left side of the Warehouse Catalog lists all available tables and the number of rows each table contains. Inc. Log in to the project source that contains your project in MicroStrategy Desktop. Adding and removing tables for a project As you become aware of the additional needs of report designers and users. and expand your project. To remove tables—From the left side. • 220 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. Also.

but have not been included in the project. Managing warehouse and project tables The Warehouse Catalog allows you to view tables that have been included in the project. Menu File • Save Saves the current settings and status of the Warehouse Catalog. As you make changes to the tables in the warehouse. as well as those tables that are available in the warehouse but have not been included in the project. You can add tables to the project by double-clicking the tables or by selecting the tables and then clicking >.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 3 In the toolbar. click Save and Close to save your changes to the Warehouse Catalog. page 219. Warehouse Catalog has the following menu options. This process can take some time to complete. To access the Warehouse Catalog for a project. The table definitions are written to the metadata. 4 Update the project schema from the Schema menu. You can add or remove all the tables from one section to the other by clicking << and >> buttons. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 221 . Tables being used in the project: Displays tables that have been selected to be part of the project. Description • © 2007 MicroStrategy. see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. You can update it by selecting Read the Warehouse Catalog from the Actions menu. by selecting Update Schema. The Warehouse Catalog has the following sections: • Tables available in the warehouse: Displays tables that are located in the warehouse. You can remove tables from the project by double-clicking the tables or by selecting the tables and then clicking <. Inc. you need to periodically load the updates into the Warehouse Catalog.

automatic mapping. Viewing table structure To view the table structure of a table. changing or assigning default table prefixes and structures. see Data warehouse connection and read operations. Allows you to specify various settings for the Warehouse Catalog such as changing the database instance. Calculates the number of rows in the selected tables. This option is enabled when a partition mapping table is selected. and so on. Displays the list of tables referred to by the selected partition mapping table in the Table Partitions dialog box. Inc. Allows you to assign or update a database instance for the project. Allows you to import the prefixes from the warehouse table name space. page 219) and choose Table Structure from the 222 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. Displays the structure of a table selected in the Warehouse Catalog. right-click any table in the Warehouse Catalog (see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. For more information. row calculation. page 227 of this appendix. . • Table Structure • Calculate Table Row Count • Table Prefix • Table Database Instances • Import Prefix • Options Actions • Read the Warehouse Catalog Help Allows you to update and reflect the changes done to tables in the warehouse. Allows you to add or remove a table prefix for the selected table.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide Menu • Exit Tools • View Partitions Description Exits the Warehouse Catalog. Displays MicroStrategy help options Some of these options are also available through toolbar buttons and through right-click menus for quick access.

Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 shortcut menu. Updating table structure Whenever the structure of the warehouse table changes you have to update the table structure in the Warehouse Catalog for the changes to reflect in the MicroStrategy system. This option is selected by default. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 223 . which provides the following options: • • Click OK to apply the change to this column in all the tables it appears. delete. © 2007 MicroStrategy. or rename a column in a table associated with a project. Click Cancel to undo all data type changes. You can also click Update Structure to reflect any recent changes done to that table (see Updating table structure. page 223). You can also select Table Structure from the Tools menu. The warning message appears only if you have selected the Display a warning if the columns data types are modified when updating the table structure option in the Warehouse Catalog Options dialog box. 2 In the Tables being used in the project list. The table structure of the selected table is displayed in the dialog box. right-click the table that has changed and select Update Structure. Some examples of these type of changes are when you add. The Warehouse Catalog opens. Inc. page 219). This action results in no changes being applied to any tables or columns. you get a warning message of this change. To update the structure of a table 1 Access the Warehouse Catalog for your project (see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. When the data type of one or more columns is modified. The dialog box displays the columns available in the selected table and the data type of each column.

– From the Schema menu. – Repeat the first to steps of this procedure to open the Warehouse Catalog and update the table structure. Verify the changes from the information dialog box that opens and click OK to apply the change in this column to all the tables in which it appears. – Click Save and Close to save the changes and close the Fact Editor. the table structure is only partially updated with the Update Structure command. – From the list of source tables select the source table from which the fact has been created. The Fact Editor opens. the warehouse structure gets updated completely with the Update Structure command. this would apply if you rename a column in the table and the column is not being used in any fact expression. select Update Schema. • 224 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. 3 Click Save and Close to close the Warehouse Catalog dialog box. . The Modify Fact Expression dialog box opens. Then. you have to manually update the facts that use this column. – Click Update. Edit the fact expression and click OK. For example. Inc.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide If the data type of one or more columns is modified. The Schema Update dialog box opens. You are returned to the Fact Editor. – Select the fact expression and click Modify. For example. you receive a message warning of this change. If any of the object definitions have changed. • If no object definitions have changed. you have to manually update the schema objects that depend on the outdated structure. if you rename a column in a table. The procedure for manually updating the fact is as follows: – Right-click the fact and select Edit.

You can also select Show Sample Data from the Tools menu. MicroStrategy products know how to generate SQL for each table. click Reload table values. Specifying a secondary database to support database gateways MicroStrategy allows you to specify a secondary database instance for a table. Viewing sample data To view sample data from a table. one for the primary database and another for the secondary database. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The default database instance for the project is set to be the primary database. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 225 . The first 100 rows of the table are returned as sample data in the Values dialog box. One of them is the primary database and the other is the secondary database. To refresh the table data. From the perspective of MicroStrategy products in this environment. you must set the secondary database instance for any tables that are found in the secondary database. For example. Inc. you need to define two database instances. page 219) and choose Show Sample Data from the shortcut menu. In the Warehouse Catalog. in your environment you might have a gateway between two databases such as an Oracle database and a DB2 database.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 – Click Save and Close to save the changes and close the Warehouse Catalog dialog box. The primary database receives all SQL requests and passes them to the correct database. This way. right-click a table in the Warehouse Catalog (see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. which is used to support database gateways.

Inc. and name spaces Mapping schema objects and calculating logical sizes for tables 226 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. row counts. (in the pane on the right side) and select Table Database Instances. which allows you to perform the following tasks: • • • Data warehouse connection and read operations Displaying table prefixes. The Warehouse Catalog Options dialog box opens. The Available Database Instances dialog box opens. by choosing Options from the Tools menu (see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. 3 In the Primary Database Instance drop-down list. You cannot select the primary database instance as a secondary database instance. Modifying data warehouse connection and operation defaults You can specify various settings for data warehouse connection and operation defaults using the Warehouse Catalog.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide To specify a secondary database for a table 1 Access the Warehouse Catalog for your project (see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog. select the primary database instance for the table. The settings are available from the Warehouse Catalog. 6 From the toolbar. Example settings include changing the database instance. and so on. automatic mapping. 5 Click OK to accept your changes and return to the Warehouse Catalog. changing or assigning default table prefixes and structures. page 219 for steps to access the Warehouse Catalog). row calculation. select Save and Close to save your changes and close the Warehouse Catalog. 4 Select one or more Secondary Database Instances. The Warehouse Catalog opens. page 219). . 2 Right-click a table being used in the project.

the Settings option is disabled. Clicking Settings allows you to directly edit the catalog SQL statements that are used to retrieve the list of available tables from the Warehouse Catalog and the columns for the selected tables. Custom Database Login: You can either select the database login or clear the login to use no database login. Database Instance: You can select the database instance for the Warehouse Catalog from the drop-down list. which is divided into the following subcategories: • Warehouse Connection: Select the desired database instance to use for the project as well as the custom database login. you can select from the following: – Click Edit to modify the selected database instance. by © 2007 MicroStrategy. – Click New to create a new database instance. The default catalog SQL retrieves a DISTINCT list of tables and columns from all users. see the online help. The General tab of the Database Instances dialog box opens. For more information on the database login.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 Data warehouse connection and read operations You can modify the database instance and database login used to connect the data warehouse to a project. Inc. • Read Settings: You can customize the SQL that reads the Warehouse Catalog for every platform except Microsoft Access. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 227 . as well as change how the database catalog tables are read. You could restrict the information returned. or if it does but needs to be modified. The Database Instance Wizard opens. When connected to a Microsoft Access data source. for example. If the desired database instance does not appear in the Database Instance box. You can make these type of modification from the Catalog category. Refer to the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide for more information on either of these dialog boxes.

For more information. . For example. If performance is more important than obtaining the row count. You can also select the following check boxes: Count the number of rows for all tables when reading the database catalog: Select this option if you want to control whether or not the Warehouse Catalog should get the number of rows each table has when loading from the data warehouse. Ignore current table name space when reading from the database catalog and update using new table name space: This option allows you to switch between warehouses found in different database name spaces. By default this option is selected when you open the Warehouse Catalog for the first time. By default this option is selected. Inc. it may redefine the data type for a column included in the project. page 232 of this appendix. Display a warning if the column data types are modified when updating the table structure: Select this option if you want to be warned when the data type for a column stored in the project is different from the one read from the data warehouse. see Ignoring table name spaces when migrating tables. This setting should be cleared when the number of PMTs in the project is so large that reading their structure is causing performance problems when opening the Warehouse Catalog. Column Merging Options: When you add a new table to your data warehouse. do not select this option as it will have a negative effect on performance.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide specifying certain conditions and table owners (see Customizing catalog SQL statements. your project includes a table named Table1 that has 228 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. This option is helpful when you want to identify fact tables and aggregation tables. By default this option is selected. The check for the data type change is only performed when updating a table’s structure. Automatically update information for all Partition Mapping tables when reading the database catalog: Select this option to read the latest information for the partition mapping tables (PMTs) currently present in the project. By default this option is selected. page 233).

the column data type for C1 would be changed to char(4). Inc. the data type with the largest precision or scale is used. a warning is displayed and you are asked if you want to use the new data type. If the data type has been changed to a different compatible data type. © 2007 MicroStrategy. When you update the table structure. For example. The options below do not handle the merge if the data type has changed to an incompatible data type. depending on the option you select. but it has column C1 set to data type char(4). In the example above. the column data types are modified to maintain a consistent schema in one of three ways. In the example above. the column data type for C1 would be changed to char(4) since Table2 was added after Table1. as defined in Table2. – Use maximum denominator data type: This option updates the column data type to use the data type with the largest precision or scale. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 229 .Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 column C1 of data type char(1). This example is used to illustrate the options described below. Then a new table named Table2 is added to the project. If the data type has changed to an incompatible data type. as illustrated in the image below. – Use most recent data type: This option updates the column data type to use the most recent column definition. a column is changed from data type char to data type integer. This is because char(4) has a higher precision than char(1) defined in Table1.

and name spaces You can choose to show or hide table prefixes. Inc. . or restricted to only be read when a read is manually requested: Automatic: This option sets the Warehouse Catalog tables to be read as soon as the catalog browser is loaded. Manual: This option sets the Warehouse Catalog tables to be read only when the read catalog action is selected. Displaying table prefixes. You have the following options: Display table prefixes in the main dialog: Select this option to display all prefixes in table names. row counts. the Warehouse Catalog reads the 230 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. by using the View category. including new tables added to the project. This category is divided into the following subcategories: • Table Prefixes: You can specify whether table prefixes are displayed in table names and how prefixes are automatically defined for tables that are added to the project. From the example above. and name spaces. column C1 uses the char(1) data type for Table1.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide – Do not merge: This option renames the column in the newly added table. • Read Mode: The Warehouse Catalog can be automatically read upon opening the Warehouse Catalog. By default this option is selected. which allows the columns to have different data types. Column C1 in Table2 is defined as a separate copy of C1 and uses the char(4) data type. row counts. Automatically define prefixes for all tables that are added to this project: This setting enables/disables the following options: – Set a prefix based on the warehouse table name space or owner (import prefix): When this option is selected. This option can cause unwanted schema changes and should be used only when necessary.

this option is selected and the number of rows are shown. This option is only active when the database supports prefixes. The Table Prefixes dialog box opens. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 231 . Mapping schema objects and calculating logical sizes for tables The Schema category is divided into the following subcategories: • Automatic Mapping: When you add new tables to the Warehouse Catalog. For more information on modifying the prefix list. using the check box: Display the name space for each table (if applicable): You can show or hide the owner or table name space where the table is located in the warehouse. • Table Row Counts: You can show or hide the number of rows per table. Inc. – Modify prefix list: You can create a new tables prefix or delete an existing prefix by selecting this option. By default. using the check box: Display the number of rows per table: You can show or hide the values calculated for the number of rows for the tables. using the following options: © 2007 MicroStrategy. By default. You can select the default prefix from the Default prefix box drop-down list or create a new table prefix by clicking Modify prefix list. and associates it with the table being added. creates a prefix having the same text as the name space. this option is selected and table name spaces are shown. you can determine whether existing schema objects in the project are mapped to these new tables automatically. – Set a default prefix: Select this to add a prefix to tables when they are added to a project. • Table Name Spaces: You can show or hide the name space for each table.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 name space for each table being added. see the online help.

For example. Before going into production. Do not map schema objects to the new tables: Objects in the schema are not automatically mapped to tables you add to the project. With the Map schema objects to new tables automatically option selected.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide Map schema objects to new tables automatically: Existing objects in the schema automatically map to tables you add to the project. Ignoring table name spaces when migrating tables It is a common practice to establish a secondary warehouse with less information than the primary warehouse for development and testing. 232 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. the Warehouse Catalog automatic mapping settings do not determine whether the attribute and table are automatically mapped. Do not calculate table logical sizes: Logical sizes are not calculated for the tables you add to the project. Automatically mapping tables to schema objects when adding attributes or facts to a project is controlled by the Attribute Editor and Fact Editor. If the table was added to the Warehouse Catalog first and then the attribute was created. respectively. Then a new table which includes a YEAR_ID column is added to the Warehouse Catalog. These automatic mapping methods are only applied to existing schema objects when tables are added to the Warehouse Catalog. the Year attribute is automatically mapped when the new table is added. . the attribute Year with an attribute form mapped to YEAR_ID is included in a project. • Table Logical Sizes: You can select whether the Warehouse Catalog calculates logical sizes for new tables using one of the following options: Calculate the logical table sizes automatically: Logical sizes are automatically calculated for tables you add to the project. Inc. you change the project to point to the primary warehouse.

This method allows you to repeat the same table name in different table name spaces. and others) support the concept of a table name space.Read Settings options subcategory. DB2. This can cause a problem when you migrate from a warehouse that resides in a certain table name space to another warehouse in a different table name space. Customizing catalog SQL statements In all supported warehouse platforms other than Microsoft Access. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog . This is because the Warehouse Catalog is looking for a table named dbo. This information includes catalog tables.LU_STORE and admin. Inc. which is a way of organizing database tables into different storage spaces. For instance.LU_STORE. you can have LU_STORE in a table name space called dbo and another table LU_STORE in another table name space called admin. select the Ignore current table name space when reading from the database catalog and update using new table name space check box. The Warehouse Catalog interprets the table as already in the project and not found in the new warehouse. columns. the Warehouse Catalog saves information to the appropriate table name space.LU_STORE in the new production warehouse. The table name space provides an extra piece of information that uniquely identifies the table. You can find this option in the Warehouse Catalog Options dialog box under the Catalog . When you add tables to a project. and the table is actually stored as admin. Thus.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 Most database management systems (Oracle. 233 © 2007 MicroStrategy. This setting allows you to migrate much more easily between warehouses. the Warehouse Catalog defaults to identifying the table by both table name space and table name. and their data types. You now have two tables dbo.LU_STORE. If the check box is cleared. If you select this option. To solve this problem. the Warehouse Catalog ignores the current table name space when it reads the catalog information. MicroStrategy uses SQL statements to query the relational database management system (RDBMS) catalog tables to obtain warehouse catalog information. the Warehouse Catalog recognizes the two tables as the same table and saves the new table name space information.

In the following sections. .8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide These catalog SQL statements vary from platform to platform and can be customized according to the characteristics of the specific warehouse. that is. The name Full Catalog SQL refers to the SQL used to read all the tables and columns in one pass. which increases processing speed. The two retrieval options use different catalog SQL.or two-pass SQL mode. By default. In two-pass SQL mode. The MicroStrategy Warehouse Catalog can be configured to read the catalog information in one. This option is recommended only if the catalog SQL is well customized to limit the amount of data returned by it. Inc. but both can be customized in the Warehouse Catalog Options dialog box. Microsoft Access does not have catalog tables. reads all the tables and columns in one SQL statement. it first reads only the tables from the database. a similar ODBC call is used for the Generic DBMS database type. 234 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. One-pass SQL mode. the first SQL used in a two-pass catalog retrieval. This is the recommended option for interactive warehouse catalog building because no unnecessary catalog information is read from the database. but you can choose to use custom catalog SQL for the generic type if you wish. the name Catalog Table SQL refers to the catalog SQL to retrieve the tables in the warehouse. so an ODBC call must be used to retrieve information about tables and columns in Access. on the other hand. The structure of individual tables is read only when the table is selected.

This helps you to avoid confusing tables that share the same table name. A customized catalog SQL can omit the name space if duplicate table names do not present a problem in the warehouse database. A table name space is a partition of the database installation in which table names are unique. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 235 . page 235 SQL placeholder strings and incomplete catalog SQL. SQL placeholder strings and incomplete catalog SQL The default system catalog SQL can contain certain placeholder strings that can be resolved at run time or must be completed manually by the user. Inc. These placeholders are: • #LOGIN_NAME#—This placeholder is automatically replaced at run time with the login name used to connect to the database. you must understand several important concepts and procedures: • • • • • • The table name space. page 238 The table name space In a typical RDBMS platform.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 To customize a catalog SQL. page 236 Modifying catalog SQL. Depending on the type of RDBMS. this name space can be the name of the database. In both the Catalog Table SQL and Full Catalog SQL. You can leave this template in the customized SQL if you want the catalog SQL to yield © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 237 Default catalog SQL. page 236 Structure of Full Catalog SQL. page 235 Structure of Catalog Table SQL. a name space gives each table a unique name. or a combination of both database and owner. the owner of the table. The table name space is optional. a table name does not uniquely identify it in a particular database installation.

TABLE_NAME TAB_NAME FROM ALL_TAB_COLUMNS WHERE OWNER = '#LOGIN_NAME#' Structure of Full Catalog SQL Full Catalog SQL is expected to return between five and seven columns. The following aliases identify each column returned: • • NAME_SPACE (optional): the table name space TAB_NAME (required): name of the table 236 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. The string starts with #? and ends with ?#. The following example is the default Catalog Table SQL for Oracle 8.0: SELECT DISTINCT OWNER NAME_SPACE. #?Schema_Name?#. Each row of the SQL result must uniquely identify a table. this template is replaced with the name of the database user who owns the warehouse tables of interest. depending on the RDBMS platform and the customization. only the table name column is required. If a name space is not provided. Inc. #?Schema_Name?#—This catalog SQL placeholder is an incomplete SQL string that must be completed by the user before it can be executed. must be replaced with the name of the database containing the database tables. must be replaced with the name of the schema in which the database tables reside.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide different results depending on the warehouse login used. one identifying the name space of the table and the other the name of the table. The column that identifies the table name space uses the SQL column alias NAME_SPACE. Duplicates are not allowed. • #?Database_Name?#. Otherwise. The column that identifies the table name has the alias TAB_NAME. used with DB2 AS/400. . used with Teradata. The command #?Database_Name?#. Structure of Catalog Table SQL Catalog Table SQL is expected to return two columns.

The Warehouse Catalog opens. The catalog SQL can be modified in the Warehouse Catalog options for your project.0: SELECT U.uid = U.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 • • • • • COL_NAME (required): name of the column DATA_TYPE (required): a string or a number that identifies the major data type of the column DATA_LEN (required): a number that describes the length or size of the column data DATA_PREC (optional): a number that describes the precision of the column data DATA_SCALE (optional): a number that describes the scale of a floating point column data Full Catalog SQL must return its rows ordered first by NAME_SPACE. sysusers WHERE T. C. 'V') AND T. syscolumns C.name NAME_SPACE. C. To modify the catalog SQL for your project 1 Access the Warehouse Catalog for your project (see Accessing the Warehouse Catalog.scale DATA_SCALE FROM sysobjects T.prec DATA_PREC.type DATA_TYPE. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 237 . C. 2 Modifying catalog SQL You can customize and modify the catalog SQL that is run against your database for each project. if available. C. The following example is the default Full Catalog SQL for Microsoft SQL Server 7.name COL_NAME. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. page 219).id = C.type in ('U'.length DATA_LEN.id and T. and then by TAB_NAME. T.name TAB_NAME.uid ORDER BY 1. C.

Inc. The top pane controls the Catalog Table SQL and the bottom pane controls the Full Catalog SQL. The Catalog . 4 Click the Settings button. it is recommended you consult the default catalog SQL that MicroStrategy uses to support different database 238 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. 3 Expand the Catalog Category. select Options. the catalog SQL options are displayed as shown below. Default catalog SQL When customizing the catalog SQL that is executed on your database. The Warehouse Catalog Options dialog box opens. .8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide 2 From the Tools menu. and select Read Settings. The catalog SQL settings are unavailable if your project is connected to a Microsoft Access database.Read Settings options are displayed.

which retrieves a list of available tables in the Warehouse Catalog. click the upper-most Use Default button. Any text in the panes is overwritten with the default catalog SQL statements: • To generate and view the default Catalog Table SQL for your database platform.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 platforms. Troubleshooting table and column messages You may encounter the following messages while using the Warehouse Catalog: © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. The bottom pane controls the Full Catalog SQL. page 237). To generate and view the default catalog SQL 1 Access the catalog SQL options for your project (see Modifying catalog SQL. A dialog box for the catalog SQL options is displayed. 2 Generate and view the default catalog SQL for your database platform. You can generate the default catalog SQL in MicroStrategy for the database platform your project connects to. click the bottom-most Use Default button. • • You can use the default catalog SQL statements or compare and combine them with your own customized catalog SQL statements. • The top pane controls the Catalog Table SQL. This allows you to save any modifications you have made previously to the catalog SQL statements. Before performing the next step. Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog 239 . cut and paste the SQL statements in the two panes into any text editor. which retrieves column information for the selected tables. and then compare them to the default statements you are about to generate. To generate and view the default Full Catalog SQL for your database platform.

If there are any dependencies. In this case. a message is shown which explains that the table structure update cannot proceed because the table was not found in the warehouse. However the definition in the project may be inconsistent with the real physical structure in the warehouse. • When the Warehouse Catalog tries to update the structure of a table that is missing in the warehouse. . it displays an error message which gives you the following options: Leave the Table in the project: This leaves everything as is in the project metadata. column name. no changes occur and the original table structure remains intact. 240 Data warehouse and project interaction: Warehouse Catalog © 2007 MicroStrategy. you get a warning message showing the table name. Remove the table from the project. Columns data type changed When the table structure is updated for one or more tables in which the column data types have been changed. In this case. Two cases can be seen: • When the Warehouse Catalog is starting and retrieving the table information from the data warehouse and it detects that one or more tables already in the project are missing.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide • • • Tables missing Columns data type changed Columns missing Tables missing This happens when one or more tables already in the project are removed from the data warehouse. the Warehouse Catalog does not check for any dependencies until you save the changes. they are presented to you. This can result in SQL errors when running reports that need data from a “missing” table. and you have the option to proceed or cancel the operation. Inc.

You can click Cancel at any time to undo all data type changes. Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model. then a message is displayed that gives details on objects. The Building Blocks of Business Data: Facts. while retaining the traditional power of ROLAP to directly query the database to answer any questions. You are asked to remove the mapping before continuing with the update structure and original table structure is restored. Chapter 3. then no error message is shown. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables 241 . This section describes how and why aggregate tables are used. the Warehouse Catalog checks for the following: • • Column is not mapped to any schema object: If this is the case. MicroStrategy creates aggregates only on fact tables since lookup tables and relationship tables are usually significantly smaller. © 2007 MicroStrategy. This results in no changes being applied to the tables and columns. see Chapter 2. To understand aggregate tables. The Logical Data Model. Column is mapped to a schema object: If this is the case. which are mapped to the missing column and the update structure operation is canceled. and new data type. Aggregate tables provide quicker access to frequently requested information. For more information on these topics. you should be familiar with fact tables in the context of data modeling and data warehousing.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 original data type. Columns missing Missing columns are detected when Update Structure is performed. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables Aggregate tables are summary tables that store data at higher levels than it was stored when the data was initially captured and saved. Inc. and Chapter 5. If this happens.

8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide When to use aggregate tables MicroStrategy uses optimized SQL to query the relational database directly to answer users’ questions. Multidimensional OLAP (MOLAP) is sometimes considered by some to be the answer to this problem. MicroStrategy’s solution is the use of aggregate tables to provide quicker access to frequently-accessed data while still retaining the power to answer any user query. the MicroStrategy SQL Engine. RAM. Inc. CPU. Users can ask any question that is supported by the data in their warehouse and then analyze the results until they find a precise answer. MOLAP is not scalable for large projects because of the difficulty of maintaining every possible combination of aggregates as the number of attributes and the amount of data increases. However. 242 Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. Aggregate tables are advantageous because they • • • • • Reduce input/output. in combination with aggregate tables and caching. and swapping requirements Eliminate the need to perform dynamic calculations Decrease the number of physical disk reads and the number of records that must be read to satisfy a query Minimize the amount of data that must be aggregated and sorted at run time Move time-intensive calculations with complicated logic or significant computations into a batch routine from dynamic SQL executed at report run time In summary. The disadvantage to this relational OLAP (ROLAP) methodology is that accessing huge fact tables can be potentially time-consuming. . can produce results at about the same speed as MOLAP. This combined solution allows questions to be answered on the fly and is also scalable for large databases.

Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 Aggregation versus pre-aggregation Whenever the display level of data on a report must differ from the level at which the data is initially captured. You can build these pre-aggregated—or aggregate—tables as part of the ETL process. A report requesting month-level data is executed. and added to produce the monthly totals. aggregation occurs dynamically with a SQL statement at report run-time. Aggregation can also be completed before reports are executed. as in the previous example. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables 243 . For example. aggregation. sorted. © 2007 MicroStrategy. that is. must occur. sales data is stored by day in a fact table. an aggregate table with the sales data rolled up to the month level is useful. The daily values from the fact table are selected. Inc. This process is called pre-aggregation. If sales data is frequently requested at the month level. the results of the aggregation are stored in an aggregate table. the rolling up of data. By default. as shown below.

If the daily sales fact table is the lowest-level fact table and contains atomic-level data. That is. This ensures that all possible 244 Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. sorting. and calculation of data from many database rows in a large. it requires a completely aggregated schema to answer most questions.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide Pre-aggregation eliminates the reading. . as shown in the following example. every possible combination of aggregate associations must be generated when the multidimensional cube is built. Degree of aggregation While MOLAP can provide fast performance when it answers a question. it is referred to as a base table. an aggregate table is any fact table whose data is derived by aggregating data from an existing base table. lower-level fact table at run time. Inc. In these terms.

Consider the following factors when deciding whether to create aggregate tables: • • The frequency of queries at that level—Determining the frequency of queries at a specific level. Inc. A densely aggregated warehouse has a large number of aggregate tables while a sparsely aggregated warehouse has fewer. and therefore is not very scalable. if the aggregate table is useful in answering frequently-asked queries. However.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 questions can be answered. ROLAP. page 247 • © 2007 MicroStrategy. therefore. Only the aggregate combinations that you determine are beneficial must be created. the space in the RDBMS does not need to be consumed and the resources to build that table during the batch process do not need to be used. the degree of aggregation can be as dense or as sparse as is appropriate for your users. page 246 The compression ratio—Compression ratio. Also. do not waste database space for tables that will not be used. In a ROLAP environment. Sparse aggregation refers to the fact that a given project only requires as many aggregate fact tables as is useful to its users. since the creation and maintenance of aggregate tables requires additional work by the database administrator. That is. page 246 The relationship between the parent and child—Considering any related parent-child relationships. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables 245 . Build aggregate tables only if they can benefit users. its presence provides a response as fast as a MOLAP system can provide. This scenario becomes very difficult to maintain as the number of attributes and the amount of data increase. Not every attribute level or hierarchy intersection is suitable for pre-aggregation. provides much greater flexibility than MOLAP. if a certain aggregate combination is rarely or never used.

the department aggregate tables would not be used in this situation. based on the key combinations in a relationship table. If any table is not used. However. translation. they consume disk space and impose unnecessary burdens on the extraction. the query must use item-level data and summarize the department data dynamically. if users frequently want to exclude inactive items. trace the usage of any aggregate tables to determine how frequently they are used in a day-to-day business environment.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide Determining the frequency of queries at a specific level Build aggregate tables only if they can be useful to your users. as well as the database backup routines. MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager allows you to easily track table usage. consider the following hierarchy: A summary of data at the department level seems to be a good candidate for an aggregate table. eliminate it from the warehouse. Inc. see the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. If aggregate tables are never accessed. all 246 Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. For more information on Enterprise Manager. Considering any related parent-child relationships When an aggregate table is created. For example. when the parent-child relationship is altered. Therefore. However. and loading process. Once your warehouse is in production. the child records are usually summarized into the parent record. . usefulness is not always easy to quantify. In any hierarchical relationship.

In these cases. Frequent changes can mean aggregate tables are not optimal for this situation. These changes often occur because of organizational restructuring. the table size. consume resources. The average number of child records combined to calculate one parent record is called the © 2007 MicroStrategy. rolling up an entire hierarchy can avoid many problems with relationship changes. It is not affected by a reorganization within the geography hierarchy. For example. Also. a store can decide to reclassify the department to which items belong. If the tables are large. and complicate the batch process. a table contains one value for the sum of all stores. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables 247 . and fiscal weeks do not move into different months. or the addition. Dynamic relationships When the relationship between parent and child elements change. and the impact on the batch process. geographical realignment. such as sum or average. or discontinuation of items or services. Aggregate tables that contain dynamic relationships must be recalculated every time a change is made. they are a part of static relationships. the relationship is called dynamic. reclassification. Compression ratio The process of data aggregation applies an aggregate function. time hierarchies are seldom dynamic—days do not migrate into different weeks. to a set of child records to produce a single parent record. For example. Consider the frequency of the changes. Whether these relationships are dynamic or static change how they are aggregated into tables.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 tables that hold that relationship or data relevant to it must be updated. and then balance the disadvantages against the advantages of having an aggregate table. this process can take time. maintaining aggregate tables is very easy. For example. Inc. Static relationships When elements rarely or never change relationships.

Therefore. Creating aggregate tables You can integrate aggregate tables in your project using the Warehouse Catalog in MicroStrategy Desktop. pre-aggregating data is effective only if the compression ratio is significant. if the compression ratio is 3:2. One measure of effectiveness of an aggregate table can be estimated from this number. page 35. since it represents the decrease in records that must be read to respond to a query at that level. To determine when pre-aggregation is worthwhile for your system. For example. Recall that some of the reasons to build aggregate tables include the reduction of disk I/O and the number of records that must be dynamically sorted and aggregated. the aggregate table requires 2/3 of the base table’s storage space but yields only a 1/3 reduction in the number of records. Inc. the resource demands placed on the database server by dynamic aggregations decrease and therefore so does the effectiveness of pre-aggregation. 248 Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. you must balance the importance of speed of query response time and the availability of disk space and resources to maintain the schema. Also. the aggregate table reduces the number of records by 3/4 and uses only 1/4 of the storage space. if the compression ratio is 4:1. In contrast. the compression ratio suggests that an aggregate table can provide more efficient queries. for smaller base tables. When the number of elements differs significantly between two attributes in the same hierarchy. refer to Cardinalities and ratios.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide compression ratio. as outlined in the following procedure. . For more information on ratios.

When you run a report. 2 Use the new table in the desired fact expressions and attribute form expressions. add the table to the project. Architect is aggregate-aware. These size assignments are stored in the metadata and are calculated based on the table columns and their corresponding attributes. when either could provide the answer to a query? The answer is logical table size. Using summary tables to store data: Aggregate tables 249 . have only higher-level or summary data. If your aggregate table structure is consistent with your base fact table structure. Architect automatically adds it to the definitions of your existing attributes and facts.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 To use an aggregate table in an existing project 1 Using the Warehouse Catalog. Because the attribute levels are lower in the base fact © 2007 MicroStrategy. How does Architect know to use the aggregate table rather than the base fact table. Because Desktop uses the conceptual or logical attribute definitions when assigning sizes. see Adding and removing tables for a project. The size of tables in a project: Logical table size MicroStrategy Desktop assigns a size to every table in the project when you first add them to the project. The other tables. this measurement is known as the logical table size. based on logical table size. Changing the logical table size The initial logical table size is based on the number of attribute columns and the various levels at which they exist in their respective hierarchies. the Analytical Engine chooses the smallest of all tables. page 220. however. For steps to add tables using the Warehouse Catalog. In other words. Suppose the base fact table contains millions of rows of transaction-level detail. that contains enough data to answer the query. Inc.

not where the tables are split. By distributing usage across multiple tables. such as month or department. Either way. The terms “application” and “server” refer to what manages the partitioned tables. Logical tables are discussed in detail in Appendix C. tables are partitioned at the database level. For steps to use the Logical Table Editor. Of course. Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping Partition mapping involves the division of large logical tables into smaller physical tables. partitions improve the speed and efficiency of database queries. Partitioning by time limits growth of the database tables and increases stability. . this division is based on a definable data level.8 Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project Project Design Guide table. Time is the most common category for partitioning databases. the table as a whole is assigned a higher value for the logical table size than are the summary tables with higher-level attributes. a table with a higher-level attribute should be smaller in size. see the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. 250 Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping © 2007 MicroStrategy. Therefore. Inc. Server versus application partitioning Partitioning can be managed by either the database server or the MicroStrategy application. Logical Tables. the Logical Table Editor allows you to alter the logical table sizes based on their true relative sizes. this is not always true in a real warehouse. Partitions improve query performance by minimizing the number of tables and records within a table that must be read to satisfy queries issued against the warehouse. Logically.

Partition tables are usually divided along logical lines. Application-level partitioning In application-level partitioning the application. manages the partition tables. the partitioning is transparent to MicroStrategy. Refer to your database documentation for details on server partitioning for your particular platform. rather than the RDBMS server. the database server logically partitions the table according to parameters specified by the database administrator. Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping . manages the partitioned tables in RDBMS server-level partitioning. MicroStrategy manages the mapping between the logical table and the physical tables. MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy supports two types of partitioning: • • Metadata partition mapping. in application-level partitioning the relational database is unaware of the partitioned tables. page 251—stores the mapping information in the project metadata Warehouse partition mapping. You do not need to take any action in MicroStrategy to support the partitioning. rather than MicroStrategy. The original fact table is not physically broken into smaller tables. A partition base table (PBT) is a warehouse table that contains one part of a larger set of data. In contrast. 251 © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project 8 Server-level partitioning The database server. Inc. in this case. Since only the logical table is displayed to the end user. such as time or geography. Instead. This approach makes it easier for you to specify a flexible partitioning schema. page 254—uses a specialized warehouse table to determine which table to access Metadata partition mapping Metadata partition mapping is the mapping of partitions where the mapping of partitions is performed and maintained in the project metadata by the application.

8

Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project

Project Design Guide

In metadata partition mapping, you specify one or more partitioning attributes in the Metadata Partition Mapping Editor. Next you define what attribute elements within those attributes should point to which PBT. You create all of the rules for choosing the appropriate PBT here and the rules are stored in the MicroStrategy metadata. For steps to create a metadata partition mapping, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help.

Homogenous and heterogeneous partitions
Metadata partitions can be homogenous or heterogeneous. With heterogeneous partitioning, the PBTs can have different amounts of data stored in them at different levels. For example, one table can contain six months of sales data, while another stores an entire year. The PBT level, or key, refers to how the data is stored. For example, sales data for the current year can be stored at the daily level, while historical sales data is saved by month only. Heterogeneous partitions can therefore require additional long-term maintenance and organization because the data contained in them is stored at various levels throughout the partition. MicroStrategy stores one PBT level for each partition. If all the PBTs within a partition are not stored at the same level, the highest PBT level is used as the PBT level of the partition. For instance, if all the sales data in the previous example is stored in one partition, you cannot access current sales at the day level. This is because the PBT level for the partition is month, which is higher than day. If you save current data in a partition at the daily level and the historical data in another partition at the month level, you are able to fully access the data. In contrast, homogenous partitions must have the same amount of data stored at the same PBT level. The logical structure of the PBTs must be the same, that is, they must have the same facts and attributes defined. To continue with the previous examples, each table must store one year of data at the month level. Homogeneous partitions work well for frequently-accessed data such as information about the previous year.

252 Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project

8

When you define the particular PBT to which an attribute is linked in MicroStrategy, you do not need to specify whether or not the PBT is homogeneous or heterogeneous. MicroStrategy makes the distinction automatically depending, in part, on how the data is stored in the PBT.

Data slices
After PBTs are created, you define a data slice. The data slice acts as a filter that describes what portions of data are placed in the partition table. Based on this data slice, the MicroStrategy engine knows which table to get data from when generating the SQL. A data slice holds the parameters that a partition is based upon, for example, Month=January. Instead of retrieving data for all months, the server knows to access a particular table that contains the data for January only. By creating a data slice with the partition, you can retrieve specific data quickly without time-consuming joins and searches. It is important to create a reasonable and valid data slice because MicroStrategy cannot verify its accuracy or relevance. The data slice must make sense for the data. A poorly crafted data slice can lead to errors from generating incorrect SQL and retrieving the wrong data. Data slicing displays and can be modified only for the metadata partitioning. Each partition mapping table must include at least one data slice. In a heterogeneous mapping, data slices can exist at different levels and can be composed of different keys.

Attribute qualifications
To create data slices, you use attribute qualifications. Attribute qualifications are types of filters that are applied to attribute forms. These qualifications allow you to limit the type and amount of data that is returned for a report. For example, if you create a report that contains the attribute Country but you want to return only the data for France, you can create a qualification on the attribute Country and select France as the element that appears on the report.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping

253

8

Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project

Project Design Guide

For steps to create a data slice, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help.

Warehouse partition mapping
Warehouse partition mapping is the mapping of partitions, where the mapping is performed by and maintained in the data warehouse. You can define a warehouse partition by using the MicroStrategy Warehouse Catalog to add a table with a special structure. This table contains the map for the partition, and is stored in the warehouse. Warehouse partitions divide tables physically along any number of attributes, although this is not visible to the user. Warehouse partitions must be homogenous, unlike metadata partitions, so that the same amount of data is stored at the same PBT level and the same facts and attributes are defined. Homogenous partitioning divides data of equal levels, like January and February. A sample fact table and warehouse partitioning table are shown below for months. Note how the data exists at equal levels, for example, different months of the same year.

The original fact table, which contains all of the data, is not brought into the project. Rather, the database administrator creates multiple smaller physical tables in the data warehouse. Each table contains a subset of the data in the original fact table. The database administrator is responsible for keeping the partitions consistent and up-to-date. He or

254 Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project

8

she must also create and maintain a partition mapping table (PMT), which is used to identify and keep track of the partitioned base tables as part of a logical whole. After the PMT is created, when you run a report in Desktop or Web that requires information from one of the PBTs, the Query Engine first runs a pre-query to the PMT to determine which PBT to access to bring the data back for the report. The pre-query requests the PBT names associated with the attribute IDs from the filtering criteria. When it finds the name of the PBT, it calls the SQL Engine to write the appropriate SQL for the warehouse. When using warehouse partition mapping, it is usually not necessary to bring in the individual PBT tables into the project. Doing so can cause errors if such tables are mistakenly mapped directly to schema objects. You should only include the PMT table in the project. With this strategy you can map all related schema objects to the PMT, which then accesses the correct PBT in the warehouse. Note the following: • • There are no data slices in a warehouse partition. MicroStrategy supports warehouse partitions on both upgraded and newly created projects. These are added using the Warehouse Catalog Browser. For steps to add warehouse partitions, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help.

Metadata versus warehouse partition mapping
Metadata partition mapping does not require any additional tables in the warehouse. Metadata partition mapping is generally recommended over warehouse partition mapping in MicroStrategy. However, if you already have warehouse partition tables set up and are migrating to a newer version of MicroStrategy, you can continue to use the warehouse partitions. If you are creating partitions for the first time, however, it is recommended you implement metadata partition mapping.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping

255

8

Optimizing and Maintaining Your Project

Project Design Guide

Metadata partition mapping is recommended because you create the rules in MicroStrategy that the Query Engine uses to generate the SQL to run reports. Because you create the partitions directly in the metadata, it is easier to maintain. Metadata partition mapping also allows both heterogeneous and homogenous partitions, unlike warehouse partition mapping. With heterogeneous partitions, the PBTs can have different amounts of data stored in them at different levels. Only homogenous partitions can be used in warehouse partition mapping. For steps to map partitions, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help.

256 Dividing tables to increase performance: Partition mapping

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

9
9.

CREATING TRANSFORMATIONS TO DEFINE TIME-BASED AND OTHER COMPARISONS

Introduction
Suppose you want to compare how much revenue your company grew last year to how much it grew this year. This type of analysis, called a TY/LY comparison (This Year versus Last Year), is a commonly used form of time-series analysis and is relevant to many different industries, including retail, banking, and telecommunications. Transformations—schema objects you can create using attributes in your project—are one of the many MicroStrategy techniques used to perform time-series analysis. To calculate a variance or a growth percentage such as last year’s revenue versus this year’s revenue, it is very convenient to use a transformation. Transformations are often the most generic approach and can be reused and applied to other time-series analyses. To use a transformation, a report designer creates a metric and applies the transformation to it. This chapter discusses the different types of transformations and how to create them. It is assumed that you have some understanding of what metrics are, as transformation metrics
© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

257

9

Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons

Project Design Guide

are discussed in this chapter. For information on metrics and using transformations in metrics and reports, see the Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

Creating transformations
A transformation is a schema object that typically maps a specified time period to another time period, applying an offset value, such as current month minus one month. Usually defined by a project designer, transformations are used in the definition of a metric to alter the behavior of that metric. Such a metric is referred to as a transformation metric. For example, time-related transformations are commonly used in metrics to compare values at different times, such as this year versus last year or current date versus month-to-date. Any transformation can be included as part of the definition of a metric and multiple transformations can be applied to the same metric. Transformation metrics are beyond the scope of this guide; for information about transformation metrics, refer to the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Recall the example used in the introduction, the TY/LY comparison. To calculate this year’s revenue, you can use the Revenue metric in conjunction with a filter for this year. Similarly, to calculate last year's revenue, you can use the Revenue metric in conjunction with a filter for last year. However, a more flexible alternative is to use a previously created Last Year transformation in the definition of a new metric, last year’s revenue. With a single filter, on 2003 for example, the two metrics Revenue and Last Year Revenue give you results for 2003 and 2002, respectively. Since a transformation represents a rule, it can describe the effect of that rule for different levels. For instance, the Last Year transformation intuitively describes how a specific year relates to the year before. It can in addition express how each month of a year corresponds to a month of the prior year. In the same way, the transformation can describe how each day of a year maps to a day of the year before. This information defines the transformation and abstracts all cases into a

258 Creating transformations

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons

9

generic concept. That is, you can use a single metric with a last year transformation regardless of the time attribute contained on the report. While transformations are most often used for discovering and analyzing time-based trends in your data, not all transformations have to be time-based. An example of a non-time-based transformation is This Catalog/Last Catalog, which might use Catalog_ID-1 to perform the transformation.

Expression-based versus table-based transformations
The definition of the association between an original value and a transformed one can be represented in an expression that uses columns of the warehouse, constants, arithmetic operators, and mathematical functions. This is known as an expression-based transformation. However, it is sometimes desirable to precalculate these values and store them in a table designed for the transformation. This method is sometimes referred to as a table-based transformation. The advantage of a table-based transformation is the possible use of indexing to speed query times. Another advantage is that table-based transformations provide additional flexibility beyond what formula expressions can produce. The drawback of this kind of transformation is that it requires the creation and management of an additional table in the warehouse. However, once the table is created, it usually significantly decreases the query time. Returning to the TY/LY example, you have the option of using a simple formula such as Year_ID - 1 in the definition of the transformation or precalculating the data and storing it in a column in a table. A table-based transformation is required when a many-to-many transformation is performed. An example is a year-to-date calculation. A significant advantage to the dynamic calculation of an expression-based transformation is that the database administrator does not have to create and maintain a transformation table. The drawback is that the system must perform the calculation every time.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating transformations

259

9

Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons

Project Design Guide

A single transformation can use a combination of table-based and expression-based transformations. For example, you can create a last year transformation based on Year and Month. The ID of the Year attribute is in the format YYYY, so the transformation can use the expression Year_ID - 1. The ID for the Month attribute is in the format ‘MonthName,’ so you cannot easily use a mathematical expression. You must use a table instead. The following sections walk you through creating both a table-based transformation and an expression-based one.

Building a table-based transformation
The following example shows how to create a last year transformation based on a lookup table in MicroStrategy Tutorial, which pairs each year with the previous year. This transformation is used in the report displayed below, which compares revenue for this year and last year.

Creating the transformation metric and the report are discussed in the Transformation metrics section in the Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

260 Creating transformations

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Notice that this table contains a previous year column. Building an expression-based transformation This example shows how to create a last year transformation using an expression rather than a table. The Transformation Editor opens with the Select a Member Attribute dialog box displayed. 4 Select the LU_Year table from the Table drop-down list. A report designer can now use the transformation in a revenue metric to calculate last year’s revenue. one subtracted from the year 2005 results in the previous year. You have now created the transformation. Inc. which maps this year to last year. 6 Click OK. Name the transformation Last Year (Table). and select Transformation. The Year . The Year_ID is in the format YYYY. For example. 5 Double-click the PREV_YEAR_ID column to place it in the expression box. so the previous year is simply Year_ID minus one. © 2007 MicroStrategy. then create a report using that transformation metric to obtain last year’s revenue.Define a new member attribute expression dialog box opens. point to New. 7 Click Save and Close on the toolbar. Creating transformations 261 . The table's columns appear in the Available columns list. 2004. then double-click Year. 2 From the File menu. 3 Double-click Time to open the folder.Project Design Guide Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons 9 To create a last year transformation based on a table 1 Log in to the project source that contains your project in MicroStrategy Desktop and expand your project.

then double-click Year. from the File menu. point to New. The transformation will subtract 1 from the Year ID to calculate last year’s ID. The resulting report is displayed below. creating the transformation metric and the report are discussed in the Transformation metrics section in the Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Inc. The Transformation Editor opens with the Select a Member Attribute dialog box displayed. 3 Select the LU_Year table from the Table drop-down list.9 Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons Project Design Guide This transformation is added to the report shown in the table-based transformation example above. The table's columns appear in the Available columns list. 5 Type -1 in the expression box. To create a last year transformation based on an expression 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. 2 Double-click Time to open the folder. 262 Creating transformations © 2007 MicroStrategy.Define a new member attribute expression dialog box opens. Again. The Year . 4 Double-click the YEAR_ID column to place it in the expression box. . and select Transformation.

7 Click OK. For an expression-based transformation. in the Last Year transformation in the MicroStrategy Tutorial. For a table-based transformation. The message “Valid expression” appears with a green check mark. Name the transformation Last Year (Expression). A report designer can now use the transformation in a revenue metric to calculate last year’s revenue. Quarter. Transformation components 263 . You have now created the last year transformation. this is the transformation table defining the relationship. LU_MONTH. respectively. • Member expressions: Each member attribute has a corresponding expression. each member expression is based on a specific table. LU_QUARTER. For example. the member attributes are Year. • Member tables: These tables store the data for the member attributes. the different levels to which the rule applies. that is.Project Design Guide Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons 9 6 Click Validate. Transformation components All transformations have the following components: • Member attributes: This component contains the attributes to which the transformation applies. and LU_DAY. the member tables are LU_YEAR. for the member attributes Year. 8 Click Save and Close on the toolbar. Month. For example. Month. then add it to the report created in the previous example. and Day. and Day. Inc. Quarter. generally the lookup table corresponding to the attribute being transformed. © 2007 MicroStrategy. in the Last Year transformation.

this expression uses constants. this is a mathematical expression. the member expressions are LY_DAY_DATE. For example. Many-to-many transformations can lead to double-counting scenarios.” One day or month this year maps exactly to one day or month from last year. consider YearToDate defined as a many-to-many transformation and Revenue (YTD) as a transformation metric. Suppose this metric is used on 264 Transformation components © 2007 MicroStrategy. In the most generic case. For example. Since the data defines the rule. this is simply a column from a specific warehouse table specifically populated with data supporting the transformation. LY_QUARTER_ID. . However. and columns from the warehouse. and PREV_YEAR_ID. These are all columns from the lookup tables set in the Member tables field. Many-to-many: A typical many-to-many relationship is year-to-date.9 Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons Project Design Guide For an expression-based transformation. in the case of a many-to-many transformation. Inc. many other dates are included in the year-to-date calculation. in the Last Year transformation. It is particularly effective when no straightforward formula can express the rule. mathematical functions. if you store Month as 200001 (January 2000). The mapping can be one of the following: One-to-one: A typical one-to-one relationship is “last year to this year. typically the attribute ID column. many cases can exist where the data is not conducive to such calculation. For example. you cannot subtract one and receive December 1999 as the result. this approach provides considerable flexibility in the transformation definition. For instance. For one date. a separate table is required. For a table-based transformation. In fact. you can create a Last Year transformation using Year_ID-1 as the expression. arithmetic operators. LY_MONTH_ID. • Mapping type: This component determines how the transformation is created based on the nature of the data. The rule is then not encapsulated in an expression but directly in the data of the column.

Transformation metrics and joint child attributes Review the discussion of joint child attributes and relationships in Joint child relationships. Transformation metrics and joint child attributes 265 . a range of dates is specified in the filter. Each quarter is displayed. the joint child attribute Promotion is added to the previous report. a transformation metric displays the current attribute with transformed data. In a report. In this instance. with the previous year’s revenue. which is the member attribute on the template. For example. page 171. The report displays the quarter. a report contains Quarter and the transformation metric Last Year’s Revenue. In the report. The joint child attribute cannot be transformed because not all of its joint children—Quarter and Item—are time-related. Inc. the values for the transformation. page 171 before proceeding in this section. the © 2007 MicroStrategy. see Joint child relationships. that is. For example. as shown below: When a joint child attribute—an attribute that exists at the intersection of other indirectly related attributes—is added.Project Design Guide Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons 9 a report that does not include the Day attribute. the Revenue (YTD) metric will double count. a conflict arises. For more information about joint child attributes.

A sample report is shown below: The displayed attributes should still be current. remember that only the metric values are transformed. minus one year. Inc. That is. and the revenue data from the date-promotion combination. 266 Transformation metrics and joint child attributes © 2007 MicroStrategy. not the attributes. Notice that the Valentine’s Day promotion existed in 2003 but not in 2002. However. transformations “transform” metric values such as Revenue. but not attributes such as Promotion. In summary. the Valentine’s Day-Q1 2002 combination cannot be displayed on the report. since the joint child attribute Promotion essentially exists in both the time dimension and a non-time dimension. displaying transformed data. .9 Creating Transformations to Define Time-Based and Other Comparisons Project Design Guide promotion associated with a given quarter. it is not intuitive how the transformation should be performed. the Valentine’s Day promotion is not listed for Q1 2002 despite the existence of the last year transformation. again. since the Valentine’s Day promotion was not run in 2002. This is the case because. While you may want to see it listed for 2002.

What is the MicroStrategy Tutorial? The MicroStrategy Tutorial is a MicroStrategy project. and user community. MICROSTRATEGY TUTORIAL Introduction This appendix provides information on the MicroStrategy Tutorial. © 2007 MicroStrategy. A project is the highest-level of intersection of a data warehouse. and functions. the project is the environment in which all related reporting is done. You create projects that users access to run reports. A typical project contains reports. including the data model and physical warehouse schema. metrics. What is the MicroStrategy Tutorial? 267 . and a set of demonstration applications designed to illustrate the features of the MicroStrategy platform. Inc. which includes a metadata and warehouse. filters. metadata repository.A A. Conceptually.

© 2007 MicroStrategy. The key features include the following: • Hierarchies—Customer. and the Brand Managers subfolder contains a report called Brand Performance by Region. Each subfolder contains reports that would be of interest to the type of business user for which the subfolder is named. District Sales Managers. books. and business reports. such as Customer. 268 What is the MicroStrategy Tutorial? . Enterprise Performance Management. Category Managers. production and operational reports. Operations Managers. Category. Numerous customers and purchased items. such as scorecards and dashboards. the Billing Managers folder contains an Invoice report and a customer-level transaction detail report. Time. including Billing Managers. and Supplier Analysis. Products. Inc. The Supplier folder contains a Supplier Sales report. Each hierarchy can be viewed graphically through MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. managed metrics reports. invoices and statements. Human Resources Analysis. Products. Sales and Profitability Analysis. They are a sampling of the types of reporting documents that can be built using MicroStrategy Report Services. Inventory. or Call Center. Geography. Brand Managers. • Enterprise Reporting Documents: This folder contains various examples of different types of standard enterprise reporting documents. Company Executives. Options to create reports from MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web focusing on a particular analysis area. • • • MicroStrategy Tutorial reporting areas MicroStrategy Tutorial reports are grouped into four folders: • Business Roles: This folder contains subfolders that reflect different types of business intelligence users within an organization. and Time. Regional Sales Managers. movies and music. For instance. Inventory and Supply Chain Analysis. Promotions.A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide The theme of the MicroStrategy Tutorial project is a retail store for the time 2003 to 2006 that sells electronics. Reporting areas: Customer Analysis. Employee. and Suppliers.

Project Design Guide

MicroStrategy Tutorial

A

MicroStrategy Platform Capabilities: This folder contains examples of many of the sophisticated capabilities within the MicroStrategy platform. Evaluators of the software, as well as customers, can use the examples to get a better feel for many of the platform’s capabilities. Customers can use the examples to guide their own development. The subfolders under these folders are named according to the capabilities that their reports exemplify. For instance, the Graph Styles folder contains examples of most of the graph types that can be created in MicroStrategy, and the Analytics and Data Mining folder contains examples of Linear Regression models built within MicroStrategy.

Subject Areas: This folder contains reports that are categorized further by topic. Topics covered include Customer Analysis, Enterprise Performance Management, Human Resource Analysis, Inventory and Supply Chain Analysis, Sales and Profitability Analysis, and Supplier Analysis. Customer Analysis: Reports analyzing the customer base, studying areas such as Customer Income, Customer Counts, Revenue per Customer, and Revenue Growth. Enterprise Performance Management: Reports containing information on revenue amounts, trends and forecasts, profits, profit margins, and profit forecasts. These reports make it easy for an executive at any level of the company to understand how the company is performing as a whole or at the region, category, and subcategory levels. Human Resource Analysis: Reports containing information on employees, including headcount, birthdays, length of employment, and the top five employees by revenue. These reports are based on employees, time, geography, and sales. The Human Resources Analysis reports provide insight into human capital so that managers can boost the efficiency and effectiveness of their employees. Human Resource Representatives can highlight under-performing employees and misallocated headcount. Managers at all levels can focus on the

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

What is the MicroStrategy Tutorial?

269

A

MicroStrategy Tutorial

Project Design Guide

performance of their employees, drill down to an individual employee detail level, view trends, and extract intelligence not otherwise evident. Inventory and Supply Chain Analysis: Reports containing information based on supplier, product, cost, revenue and profit, such as Inventory and Unit Sales, or Inventory Received from Suppliers by Quarter. The Inventory reports track inventory information within the company and through to suppliers. Essentially, these reports show how many units of an item are on hand, how many are expected from a particular supplier, and how many units have been sold. Inventory reports are used to ensure that the supply chain is as efficient as possible. Using these reports, employees can analyze trends and details, quickly adjust inventory and distribution, and understand underlying supply chain costs and inefficiencies. Sales and Profitability Analysis: Reports analyzing revenue and profit from multiple perspectives. Examples include Sales by Region, Revenue over Time, and Brand Performance by Region. The Product Sales reports allow managers and analysts to monitor and analyze sales trends, track corporate revenue goals, compare store-to-store performance, and respond more quickly and accurately to feedback from the marketplace. In turn, executives can analyze sales trends and details, quickly adjust pricing and promotions, identify product affinities and key profit centers, and understand costs and revenue trends. Supplier Analysis: Reports containing supplier, sales, profit, and revenue information, such as Brand Sales by Supplier, Supplier Sell-Through Percentage, and Units Sold and Profit by Supplier. The Supplier reports allow managers and analysts to monitor and analyze vendor performance so that they can quickly identify performance problems. These reports track brands and items sold that came from a particular vendor. They also correlate profit and revenue information with particular suppliers so that relationships with key vendors can be strengthened.

270 What is the MicroStrategy Tutorial?

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

MicroStrategy Tutorial

A

These reports and documents are located in the Public Objects/Reports folder of the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Once the areas of analysis are determined, a data model is created.

MicroStrategy Tutorial data model
A logical data model graphically depicts the flow and structure of data in a business environment. It provides a way of organizing facts so that they can be analyzed from different business perspectives. For example, a simple logical data model for a retail company can organize all necessary facts by store, product, and time, which are the three common business perspectives typically associated with retail business. For detailed information about data modeling, see Chapter 2, The Logical Data Model. For MicroStrategy Tutorial, the areas of analysis discussed earlier, Customer Analysis, Human Resources Analysis, and so on, are organized into the following hierarchical groupings: • • • • • Geography Products Customers Time Promotions

These MicroStrategy Tutorial hierarchies are displayed on the following pages for your reference.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

271

A

MicroStrategy Tutorial

Project Design Guide

Data modeling notations
The following notations are used in graphical depictions of hierarchies.
Symbol Indicates entry point Definition An entry point is a shortcut to an attribute element in the Data Explorer. Creating an entry point grants you faster access to the attribute without having to browse through multiple attributes to reach different levels of the hierarchy.

attribute

A data level defined by the system architect and associated with one or more columns in the data warehouse lookup table. Attributes include data classifications like Region, Order, Customer, Age, Item, City, and Year. They provide a handle for aggregating and filtering at a given level. An attribute relationship in which every element of a parent attribute relates to multiple elements of a child attribute, while every element of the child attribute relates to only one element of the parent. The one-to-many attribute relationship is the most common in data models.

one-to-many relationship

Geography hierarchy
The Geography hierarchy contains attributes, such as Country and Region, as well as Distribution Center, Call Center, and employee-specific attributes. It is easy to understand why Country and Region are in the Geography hierarchy, but what about Distribution Center, Call Center, and the employee-related attributes? The data used in MicroStrategy Tutorial is based upon a fictitious company that sells electronics, movies, music, and books. The company does not have physical stores, but instead does its business from catalog and Web sales. Customers review the products in a printed or online catalog and call in their order over the phone. The order is then processed by an employee located at one of the call centers. The order is then fulfilled by a distribution center that holds the correct item and sends it through one of the shippers.

272 MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

MicroStrategy Tutorial

A

The Geography hierarchy contains the following attributes.
Attribute Country Region Call Center Distribution Center Manager Employee Experience Hire Date Salary Employee Age Employee Birth Date Employee Description Countries where the company does or hopes to do business in the future. Also refers to countries where employees work. Each country is split into regions. Where product phone-in orders are taken. Each call center is located in a different city. The location where product orders are sent out to customers. Currently, each is located in the same city as the call center it services. Person responsible for a specific call center. The number of years an employee has worked for the organization. The date on which a particular employee was hired. The amount of money an employee makes per year. The age of each employee. The date each employee was born. The lowest level in the Geography hierarchy, representing the individual responsible for each order placed. Example USA, Spain, France. Central, Northeast, Southwest. Atlanta, Boston, Charleston. Miami, New Orleans, Fargo. Peter Rose, Alice Cooper. 3, 5, 6. 2/16/97, 3/15/99. 24,000, 35,000. 29, 36, 52. 5/6/66, 1/1/77. Jennifer Lee, Laura Kelly.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

273

A

MicroStrategy Tutorial

Project Design Guide

Refer to the following image to see how all these attributes are organized into the MicroStrategy Tutorial Geography hierarchy.

Products hierarchy
The products hierarchy contains attributes, such as Category, Brand, Catalog, and Supplier. The Products hierarchy contains the following attributes.
Attribute Category Subcategory Description Products are organized into categories at the highest level. Used to further differentiate a subset of products within a category. Example Electronics, Music. Business, Cameras, Drama.

274 MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

MicroStrategy Tutorial

A

Attribute Warranty Brand Catalog Supplier Discontinued Code Item

Description The time period in months during which a manufacturer repairs a broken item (specific to Narrowcast Server). The manufacturer or artist for a particular product. The medium used to sell products. The distributor for a set of brands. 0 = discontinued product, 1 = non-discontinued product. The individual product sold.

Example 3, 5. Ayn Rand, 3Com, Sony. Spring 2002, Fall 2003. McGraw Hill, Disney Studios. 0, 1 The Great Gatsby, Sony Discman.

Refer to the following image to see how all these attributes are organized into the MicroStrategy Tutorial Products hierarchy.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

275

A

MicroStrategy Tutorial

Project Design Guide

Customers hierarchy
The Customers hierarchy contains customer demographic and purchase information, such as Customer Age, Income Bracket, Payment Method, and Ship Date. The Customers hierarchy contains the following attributes.
Attribute Customer Country Customer Region Customer State Customer City Customer Age Customer Birth Date Income Bracket Zip Code Customer Shipper Rush Order Description The highest level of differentiation for where Customers live The highest level of differentiation for where customers live. Each Customer Region is divided into multiple States. Each Customer State is broken down into cities. The age of a particular customer at a current point in time. The date on which the Customer was born. The salary range reported by the customer. The lowest level of differentiation for where customers live. The name of the individual customer. The vendor used to send products to the customer. (Currently not implemented in the project.) Indicates whether a customer chose to expedite delivery of an order. The way a customer pays for an order. The date on which an order is shipped from the distribution center. The tracking number associated with a particular group of items purchased. Amex, Check. 9/15/02, 3/26/03. 167, 2635. Example USA, Spain, France Northeast, South, France. Maine, North Dakota. Albany, Chicago, Memphis. 26, 38, 59. 8/4/50, 4/30/72. $31,000 - 40,000, $61,000 70,000. 07026, 36303. Selene Allen, Chad Laurie. Pronto Packages, MailFast.

Payment Method Ship Date Order

276 MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Project Design Guide

MicroStrategy Tutorial

A

Refer to the following image to see how all these attributes are organized into the MicroStrategy Tutorial Customers hierarchy.

Time hierarchy
The Time hierarchy contains time-specific attributes, Year, Quarter, Month, and Day.

© 2007 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Tutorial data model

277

Month of purchase. January. Inc. Calendar quarter of purchase. Promotions hierarchy The Promotions hierarchy contains Promotion and Promotion Type.A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide The Time hierarchy contains the following attributes. 2003. Q3 03. 278 MicroStrategy Tutorial data model © 2007 MicroStrategy. . Calendar date of purchase. 5/14/02. 12/26/03. Attribute Year Quarter Month of Year Month Day Description Calendar year of purchase. November. Calendar month of purchase. Jul 02. Refer to the following image to see how all these attributes are organized into the MicroStrategy Tutorial Time hierarchy. Example 2002. This hierarchy is useful for recording whether a sale was a promotional purchase. Q2 02. Aug 03.

Attribute Promotion Type Promotion Description (Currently not implemented in the project. Inc.Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial A The Promotions hierarchy contains the following attributes. Refer to the following image to see how all these attributes are organized into the MicroStrategy Tutorial Promotions hierarchy. 9/1/02 . MicroStrategy Tutorial data model 279 . 2/16/03 2/19/03. © 2007 MicroStrategy.9/4/02. You must log on as an Administrator.) Date range for a particular discount period under which an item is purchased (Sales Date). log on to the project source containing the MicroStrategy Tutorial and expand the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Example Mother’s Day. Labor Day. (Currently not implemented in the project. To view the MicroStrategy Tutorial data model 1 If you are not already using the MicroStrategy Tutorial. you can also view it directly in the product. Viewing the MicroStrategy Tutorial data model Although the MicroStrategy Tutorial data model is displayed in the previous pages. Specify the user name as Administrator and provide a blank password to complete these steps.) Type of discount period offered (Sale type).

click Auto arrange in the toolbar. point to Graphical View. It is a graphic-intensive technique that results in a data model representing the definition. or conceptual environment. 5 To view the entire hierarchy in the window. 4 To focus on a different entry point. 8 To save the layout view of the hierarchy. the HierarchiesMicroStrategy Tutorial dialog box opens. click Save in the toolbar. and relationships of data in a business. physical characteristics. Inc. but allows you to view the hierarchy in a way meaningful to you. MicroStrategy Tutorial schema A schema is a logical and physical definition of warehouse data elements. and then choose Hierarchies. technical. After the data model is created. this saved view is displayed.A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide 2 From the Schema menu. the next step is to create the schema. 3 To view a different hierarchy. . This does not affect the browse order. The next time you open the Hierarchy Viewer. Once loaded. click Fit in window from the toolbar. The logical data model is a picture of all the pieces of information necessary to understand your data and how it relates to your business. 280 MicroStrategy Tutorial schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. select it from the Hierarchy drop-down list on the toolbar. 7 To return to the default view. 6 You can rearrange the attributes by dragging and dropping them. and interrelationships. characteristics. select it from the Entry Point drop-down list in the toolbar.

Several physical warehouse schemas can be derived from the same logical data model. Item. This appendix shows the physical warehouse schema. Lookup tables are usually joined to fact tables in order to group the numeric facts in the fact table by dimensional attributes in the lookup tables. a primary key In a relational database. While the logical data model tells you what facts and attributes to create. or Account. They typically consist of descriptions of dimensions. the physical warehouse schema tells you where the underlying data for those objects is stored. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Store. The MicroStrategy Tutorial schema is divided into the following parts: • • • • • • Geography Products Customers Time Promotions Fact tables Schema notations The following notations are used in the graphical depictions of the MicroStrategy Tutorial schema.Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial A The physical warehouse schema is based on the logical data model. Inc. such as Day. The physical warehouse schema describes how your data is stored in the data warehouse. For more detailed information on the physical schema. refer to earlier chapters in this guide. Symbol LU_ Indicates Definition a lookup table A database table used to uniquely identify attribute elements. the set of columns required to uniquely identify a record in a table. including data types. MicroStrategy Tutorial schema 281 .

Freight Profit Revenue Rush Charge Unit Cost Unit Price Unit Profit Units Received Units Sold The compensation paid for the transportation of goods. The number of individual items acquired from a supplier. Unit price . Inc.unit cost. Relate tables contain the ID columns of two or more attributes. The amount of money charged by the supplier to the company per individual item purchased.A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide Symbol REL_ Indicates a relationship table Definition While lookup tables store information about one or more attributes. The amount of money charged to expedite delivery service. Fact Cost Discount End on hand Description The total amount charged by the supplier to the company. . 282 MicroStrategy Tutorial schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. Begin on hand The number of individual items available at the beginning of each month. The number of individual items bought by customers. relate tables store information about the relationship between two attributes. The number of individual items remaining at the close of each month. Also referred to as a PMT. A fact table is a database table containing numeric data that may be aggregated along one or more dimensions. The excess of the selling price of goods over their cost. A monetary reduction made from a regular price. thus defining associations between them. Fact tables may contain atomic or summarized data. The basic facts from which all metrics in the MicroStrategy Tutorial were created from are listed below. PMT_ a partition A warehouse table that contains information used to identify the mapping table partitioned base tables as part of a logical whole. The schema also contains fact tables. The amount of money charged by the company to the customer per individual item sold. The total income produced by a given source accounting for all product sales deducting discounts.

Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial A Geography schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. MicroStrategy Tutorial schema 283 .

A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide Products schema 284 MicroStrategy Tutorial schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. . Inc.

Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial A Customers schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy Tutorial schema 285 . Inc.

Inc.A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide Time schema 286 MicroStrategy Tutorial schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. .

Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial A Promotions schema Sales fact tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. MicroStrategy Tutorial schema 287 .

Inc. .A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide Inventory fact tables Miscellaneous fact tables 288 MicroStrategy Tutorial schema © 2007 MicroStrategy.

use the following options from the Options menu: • • • • Show joins: Select whether to connect the tables to represent the joins between the warehouse tables. the TablesMicroStrategy Tutorial dialog box opens with the physical view displayed. To view the MicroStrategy Tutorial schema 1 If you are not already using the Tutorial. point to Graphical View. Use circular joins: Select whether to use circular joins. use the following options from the Options menu: • • Show joins: Select whether to connect the tables to represent the joins between the table columns. 4 To change display preferences for the physical view. Show table prefixes: Select whether to display the table prefix as part of the table name. 2 From the Schema menu.Project Design Guide MicroStrategy Tutorial A Viewing the MicroStrategy Tutorial schema Although the MicroStrategy Tutorial physical schema is displayed in the previous pages. 3 To switch to the logical view. you can also view it or the logical schema directly in the product. Show column data types: Select whether to show the data type and size for each column. and then choose Tables. 5 To change display preferences for the logical view. log in to the project source containing the MicroStrategy Tutorial and expand the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Once loaded. © 2007 MicroStrategy. You must login as an Administrator to complete these steps. then Logical View. Use circular joins: Select whether to use circular joins. MicroStrategy Tutorial schema 289 . select View. Inc.

7 To view the entire schema in the window. 290 MicroStrategy Tutorial schema © 2007 MicroStrategy. 10 To save the layout view of the tables.A MicroStrategy Tutorial Project Design Guide • • Show relationships: Choose whether to map the relationships between the tables. and many-to-many relationships. click Auto arrange in the toolbar. 9 To return to the default view. one-to-many. as a link between the logical and physical views. • 6 To switch back to the physical view. select Copy as Metafile from the File menu. 8 You can rearrange the tables by dragging and dropping them. click the Fit in window button on the toolbar. Inc. This does not affect the relationships or joins. then Physical View. Show columns: Select whether to display the warehouse columns that define each attribute. many-to-one. 11 To copy the layout view. this saved view is displayed. Show relationship types: Choose whether to differentiate between one-to-one. but allows you to view the tables in a way meaningful to you. click Save in the toolbar. The next time you open the Table Viewer. select View. .

Hyperion Essbase. 291 . such as MicroStrategy. and Microsoft Analysis Services Introduction Many companies have both a data warehouse and an OLAP cube source such as SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (SAP BW). Integration with Analysis Services 2000. Inc. or Hyperion Essbase (Essbase).B CONNECTING TO OLAP CUBE SOURCES B. This appendix describes how MicroStrategy Intelligence Server integrates with these products using MultiDimensional Expressions (MDX). this appendix discusses the following topics: • • MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources. Microsoft Analysis Services (Analysis Services). This system setup requires an integrated business intelligence (BI) solution. page 298 © 2007 MicroStrategy. SAP BW. that can concurrently access OLAP cube sources and the data warehouse effectively. Analysis Services 2005. page 292 Understanding the SAP BW terminology. and Essbase uses XML for Analysis (XMLA). Specifically. The integration with SAP BW uses SAP’s OLAP Business Application Programming Interface (BAPI).

in addition to relational databases.5 and SAP BI 7. • • • Microsoft Analysis Services 2000 Microsoft Analysis Services 2005 Hyperion Essbase 7. page 337 Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers. page 311 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy. Intelligence Server can join data from different OLAP cube sources.1 and 3. MicroStrategy refers to SAP BW/SAP BI OLAP cube sources as SAP BW. page 317 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy.0.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • • • • • • • • • Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy. page 343 MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources MicroStrategy provides a rich set of functionality ranging from OLAP Services and Report Services to Narrowcast capabilities. and bring the data into one single MicroStrategy project. page 334 Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers. . page 302 Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy. all of which can be exposed via a unified Web interface. page 327 Connecting to Essbase servers.0 With version 7. page 340 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy. page 322 Connecting to SAP BW servers.1 292 MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using the MicroStrategy standard interface. Inc. SAP has renamed SAP BW to SAP BI. These additional OLAP cube sources include the following: • SAP BW 3.

Inc. see the MicroStrategy readme. This data is stored in cubes or other SAP objects. MicroStrategy has chosen to use the OLAP BAPI approach because it is the most native interface that SAP provides. If you use OLAP cube sources and MicroStrategy as your combined BI solution. MicroStrategy Web Universal is certified to run on SAP Web Application Server. MDX is similar to SQL but is used to query cubes. With the SAP BW OLAP BAPI Certification on MicroStrategy 8. Analysis Services and Essbase store data in cubes obtained from various sources. or another SAP data source system.5. the OLAP BAPI provides an open interface through which Intelligence Server can access the SAP BW data. To access the data. As SAP’s proprietary API for accessing SAP BW data and functionality. and MicroStrategy Web and SDK are certified to run with SAP Enterprise Portal through iView Packages. For more information on MDX syntax.com/ and search for MDX. Likewise. you can get the best out of both products. MicroStrategy Intelligence Server is certified to connect and execute reports against SAP BW cubes. Version 1.0. SEM.1 of the specification is available at www. MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources 293 . An MDX expression returns a multidimensional result set (dataset) that consists of axis data. With the Powered by Net Weaver Certification on MicroStrategy 7i -7. Defined by Microsoft. refer to http://msdn.xmla.microsoft. cell data. Rather. In other words. the Intelligence Server generates MDX.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B For MicroStrategy’s support status with the OLAP cube sources listed above.org and is the basis for the MicroStrategy implementation. including the following: © 2007 MicroStrategy. integration allows MicroStrategy to gain additional data sources for analysis.3. SAP BW obtains data from R/3. It is important to understand that the MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources does not change the overall structure of the MicroStrategy product. The XMLA integration provides a Web Service interface for OLAP and data mining functions. each of these products is simply another data warehouse that holds data for report generation. CRM. and properties data.

For information on Freeform SQL and Query Builder reporting. Once the data is retrieved. see the Troubleshooting the System chapter of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. refer to the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Inc. and Query Builder provides additional mechanisms for pulling data into the MicroStrategy platform for analysis. all of which can be accessed through MicroStrategy Web. Freeform SQL. Data is pulled from multiple OLAP cube sources using MDX and operational systems using Freeform SQL or Query Builder. Understanding MicroStrategy architecture The MicroStrategy platform offers OLAP Services. and Narrowcast Server functionality. Report Services. Support for SAP BW. . as illustrated in the following diagram.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • • • • • Access to OLAP cube sources and a regular data warehouse Five styles of BI Custom development of reports and applications Transaction-level analysis Integration with other systems via Web Services For troubleshooting and diagnostics logging routines related to OLAP cube sources. Analysis Services. it is treated in the same 294 MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources © 2007 MicroStrategy. Essbase.

Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B manner as data pulled from the relational data warehouse. which was represented by the database instance. This means that core MicroStrategy capabilities are available no matter what the original data source is. To understand the current MicroStrategy architecture better. each pointing to a data warehouse. it is helpful to review the basic object model of MicroStrategy 7i and how various data sources were accessed then. One database instance could be referenced by multiple projects in a configuration. Inc. Each project contained one project schema that held the logical model for that project. shown below. MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources 295 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. you could have multiple MicroStrategy projects. Object model in MicroStrategy 7i In the 7i metadata model.

296 MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources © 2007 MicroStrategy. a Report Services document can contain multiple datasets.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide When a report was executed. each of which can represent a distinct OLAP cube source. Object model in MicroStrategy 8 The MicroStrategy 8 model shown below highlights how a project can be extended to access OLAP cube sources through a separate database instance. You can create multiple reports to run against one cube. Each report can only reference one specific cube. which is a logical placeholder for a physical cube that exists in an OLAP cube source. but the only source is the data warehouse. due to the structure in OLAP cube sources where queries can only be run against one cube at a time. each OLAP cube report points directly to one cube in MicroStrategy. Inc. In addition. note that instead of pointing to the project schema. and a single MicroStrategy project can reference multiple database instances. . However. the SQL Engine would implicitly reference the schema to determine which table(s) should be queried.

report designers can create rich reports and analytics that take advantage of data from both data warehouses and OLAP cube sources. Query Builder reports. refer to the MicroStrategy Document Creation Guide. For information on Report Services documents. refer to the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B The model also shows how you can include any number of standard reports. For information on Freeform SQL and Query Builder reports. Freeform SQL reports. Authentication Most of the standard MicroStrategy platform authentication features also apply to OLAP cube sources and OLAP cube reports. MicroStrategy integration with OLAP cube sources 297 . By bringing these different types of reports together inside a document. described as follows: © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. and OLAP cube reports in one Report Services document.

you need to be familiar with the terms that are used to describe the SAP BW objects. In addition. Some of these terms are provided in the following section. . To enforce OLAP cube source security in MicroStrategy. then the same login information must be applicable to all sources. If multiple sources are configured for warehouse pass-through execution. refer to your SAP documentation. it is recommended that you use connection mapping or pass-through authentication. refer to the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. Further information is provided later in this appendix on how the SAP BW objects are related to those in the MicroStrategy environment. NT Authentication can be used to authenticate the user to the Intelligence Server.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • Standard authentication and LDAP authentication: are supported independent of the data source that is being used. page 302. For a comprehensive and detailed explanation on SAP BW objects. Inc. but not to the cube sources. • • • For information on authentication in general. NT authentication: used for database logins are not supported with OLAP cube sources. Connection mapping: is supported the same way as for standard MicroStrategy reports. 298 Understanding the SAP BW terminology © 2007 MicroStrategy. specific connection mappings may be designated for each database instance and user or group combination. This is explained in Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy. for example. Understanding the SAP BW terminology Before looking in depth into how MicroStrategy integrates with SAP BW. Warehouse pass-through authentication: is supported in the same way as for relational data providers. relational databases or OLAP cube sources.

three InfoCubes or two ODS objects. • • InfoCube: is the primary object that SAP BW uses to store data for analysis. To release a query for analysis in MicroStrategy. ODS object: is an operational data store object. InfoSets. for example. Any existing query can be released for analysis within MicroStrategy. InfoProvider: is a generic term defining all SAP BW data structures available for reporting and analysis purposes such as the following: InfoCube: is a multi-dimensional cube. The fact table at the center of an InfoCube contains the data available for analysis. ODS objects are flat relational tables and are similar to MicroStrategy fact tables. MultiProvider: is a logical union of two or more InfoProviders that are used to combine data from two different subject areas. The relationship between the InfoCube and the query cube is very similar to how a MicroStrategy report includes a subset of modeled attributes and metrics that are available in the data warehouse. Inc. InfoCubes define a specific domain of analysis in special areas. select the Allow External Access to This Query check box under the Extended tab in the SAP Query Properties dialog box in the Query Analyzer • © 2007 MicroStrategy. Query cube (or query): defines a subset of data from an InfoCube or another InfoProvider. finance or sales. They include objects such as characteristics and key figures. for example. Query cubes also provide MicroStrategy users access to additional InfoProviders including ODS objects. which are roughly equivalent to attributes and facts in a MicroStrategy project. Data is organized by dimension and stored physically in a star schema. and MultiProviders. which is described below. A query cube includes characteristics (dimensions/attributes) and key figures (metrics) from its source provider. Query cubes generally offer better performance than InfoCubes because they are smaller and can be scheduled and cached within SAP BW. Understanding the SAP BW terminology 299 .Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B • InfoObject: are the building blocks for individual cubes.

hierarchy nodes. These hierarchies are also available when you work with a cube in MicroStrategy. hierarchies. Defined in the Query Designer. When the query is executed. customer group. and number of call centers. a Sales Region characteristic can have North. all of which can be used in InfoCubes. variables can be of such types as characteristic values. and finally Item. they are presented with the traditional attribute-based parent-child relationships. SAP BW characteristics are similar to MicroStrategy attributes. but it is equivalent to an attribute form in MicroStrategy. and time. when the levels of a hierarchy are viewed in MicroStrategy. hierarchies can be associated with a specific characteristic within SAP BW. With this option enabled. and South specifications. However. numbers. and formulas. texts. • Key figure: describes numeric data. Central. ODS objects. • • 300 Understanding the SAP BW terminology . such as revenue. quantities. and master data attributes. For example. This is a different paradigm from MicroStrategy’s model where each attribute defines its own level. For example. SAP BW also has an object called an attribute. fiscal year. profit. designers can quickly access existing query cubes and business content when working in MicroStrategy. as noted later.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide interface. when each characteristic is translated into a cube. However. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Subcategory. these variables are filled with values by the system or by the user. product. You can also create calculated key figures and restricted key figures in the query definition in the Business Explorer. date. the Item characteristic might have a hierarchy that includes Category. In addition. and period. Variable: is used as a parameter of a query in SAP BW. This is similar to creating derived metrics and conditional metrics within the MicroStrategy environment. Hierarchy: is a way of defining the relationships among elements within a characteristic. There are five types of key figures: amount. it is treated as a separate dimension for analysis. Inc. such as sales region. • Characteristic: provides classification possibilities for a dataset.

For more information on variables. Understanding the SAP BW terminology 301 . standard prompts can also be created for this report. Inc. including all of the published query cubes. all the variables in this cube are represented as prompts. rows. page 308. see Supporting SAP BW variables.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B When an OLAP cube is imported into a MicroStrategy project. InfoCubes. Besides the above-mentioned terminology. When working in MicroStrategy. refer to documentation provided by SAP BW. For step-by-step instructions on how to create MicroStrategy reports from the data in SAP BW cubes. the report inherits all those prompts. you also need to have a basic understanding of the SAP Query Designer. and free characteristics. © 2007 MicroStrategy. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. columns. where you define queries. When the OLAP cube is used to create a MicroStrategy report. and MultiProviders. you will find a list of available cubes for reporting. For more information. You can select and combine InfoObjects or reusable structures for an InfoProvider and specify the view of the data (query view) by distributing them to filters. In addition.

it is helpful to understand how SAP’s metadata model is translated into MicroStrategy’s metadata model. The translation process involves the following steps: 1 From SAP BW to ODBO: SAP exposes its query cubes and InfoCubes to Intelligence Server through the ODBO model. if you are a report designer. . 302 Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. ODBO stands for OLE database for OLAP and is a protocol defined by Microsoft. Inc.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy As a Web or Desktop Analyst. but not identical. ODBO defines an object model that is used in conjunction with MDX to query cubes. However. when thinking about SAP objects. Thus. The ODBO model is similar to SAP’s standard model. keep in mind how those objects appear in ODBO. you can treat SAP BW reports as if they were standard MicroStrategy reports.

SAP BW ---> InfoCube ODBO ---> catalog MicroStrategy (catalog) • SAP BW: InfoCube Each InfoCube that has queries associated with it is exposed as a catalog in ODBO. The following image demonstrates how SAP BW objects are exposed in ODBO and then how they are related to objects in the MicroStrategy environment. Query cubes are accessed through their respective InfoCube catalogs. they are then translated into the MicroStrategy metadata model. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The following sub-sections—each starting with a table—describe each level of comparison from top to bottom as shown in the above illustration. Inc. Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy 303 .Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B 2 From ODBO to MicroStrategy: After SAP objects are translated into the ODBO model. You can then interact with SAP content while working within the paradigm that is consistent with the rest of MicroStrategy’s products.

• MicroStrategy: (Catalog) Each catalog includes one InfoCube and associated query cubes. SAP BW ---> N/A ODBO ---> schema MicroStrategy N/A • • SAP BW: not supported ODBO: schema Schema in ODBO provides another grouping mechanism. Cubes are treated in a manner very similar to tables in the MicroStrategy metadata. Therefore.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • ODBO: Catalog Catalogs are used to group cubes. The cube can be used to represent InfoCubes. Catalogs in MicroStrategy are represented in a folder. . a MicroStrategy cube maps the physical columns of an SAP BW cube to attributes and metrics. if any. ODBO catalogs are exposed in a few editors when selecting and managing cubes. MultiProviders. Inc. and query cubes. • MicroStrategy: not supported SAP BW ---> InfoCube/ query cube ODBO ---> cube MicroStrategy cube • • • SAP BW: InfoCube/query cube ODBO: cube MicroStrategy: cube A MicroStrategy cube is an object that is used to map the levels of an SAP BW cube into the MicroStrategy environment. 304 Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. In the same way that a regular table maps the physical columns of a relational table to attributes and metrics.

Shared dimensions allow a designer to use only one definition for a dimension across multiple cubes. • ODBO: dimension A dimension in ODBO defines a logical category of analysis. these same levels could either be specifically defined as part of the hierarchy. The SAP BW characteristic hierarchies appear as hierarchies to MicroStrategy users. They can only be seen inside the SAP BEx Query Designer when you build a query cube. Each characteristic in SAP is modeled as a dimension in ODBO and is shared across cubes. Inc. Dimensions in SAP BW are used to group characteristics and are not exposed through the ODBO interface. For more information. This hierarchy defines a number of levels including Year. Quarter. For example. A characteristic can have any number of additional hierarchies. Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy 305 . For example. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Therefore. see the following sub-section. For example. A characteristic appears as a dimension for MicroStrategy users. and Month. and the second level is the detailed data. each with an arbitrary number of levels. you can build a Time hierarchy that is attached to the Month characteristic.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B SAP BW ---> characteristic ODBO ---> dimension MicroStrategy dimension • SAP BW: characteristic Characteristics in SAP BW are similar to attributes in MicroStrategy. all dimensions in cubes coming from SAP BW are shared. which represents months just like it does in MicroStrategy. or they could be other characteristics that are used to define the levels of this one hierarchy. However. an InfoCube might include the Month characteristic. Time and Geography are dimensions along which you can slice data. Each characteristic (dimension) has at least one hierarchy with two levels: the first level is an aggregate of all the data.

The inclusion of the term “Level” is an SAP BW convention. • MicroStrategy: dimension A dimension object in MicroStrategy is very similar to an ODBO dimension.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Measures (metrics) are stored in a special measure dimension. architects have the option to rename the levels of a cube with a more readable convention. Measures in ODBO are called key figures in SAP BW. and so on. Inc. SAP BW ---> hierarchy ODBO ---> hierarchy MicroStrategy hierarchy • • • SAP BW: hierarchy ODBO: hierarchy MicroStrategy: hierarchy Hierarchies are used to group attributes (levels) together and define the relationships between these attributes. . measures are simply one more dimension of a cube. which are very similar to metrics in MicroStrategy. It is used to group attributes and define parent-child relationships. In this way. 306 Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy reuses the hierarchy objects to represent both dimensions and hierarchies from ODBO. and they are represented as physical columns. In MicroStrategy. Region Level 02. SAP BW ---> virtual level ODBO ---> level MicroStrategy attribute • SAP BW: virtual level Levels are generated automatically based on either the definition of the characteristic or the hierarchies associated with a characteristic. SAP BW levels have names such as Region Level 01.

SAP BW ---> characteristic value ODBO ---> member MicroStrategy (attribute element) • • • SAP BW: characteristic value ODBO: member MicroStrategy: (attribute element) Element values come from either the database or a cube. For example. This concept also applies to ODBO and SAP BW. SAP BW also supports navigational attributes. forms are sometimes referred to directly as attributes. SAP BW ---> characteristic attribute ODBO ---> property MicroStrategy attribute form • • • SAP BW: characteristic attribute ODBO: property MicroStrategy: attribute form Attribute forms provide additional information about a given attribute. In SAP BW. Inc.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B • • ODBO: level MicroStrategy: attribute (ID/DESC) MicroStrategy attributes map to ODBO levels. For example. the Customer attribute may have the forms First Name and Last Name. However. These attributes are presented as distinct dimensions when working in MicroStrategy. each ODBO level generates two physical columns and forms in MicroStrategy—ID and DESC. © 2007 MicroStrategy. 2003 and 2004 are elements of the Year attribute. Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy 307 .

308 Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Originally created in an SAP query cube. variables are represented as prompts in the MicroStrategy environment. For detailed information on variables. texts. you must remove them before importing the cube into MicroStrategy. hierarchies. 2 When a MicroStrategy report is created using a MicroStrategy OLAP cube. Otherwise. hierarchy nodes. If your SAP BW cube included variables of type Replacement Path. . The conversion process involves the following general steps: 1 When an SAP query cube is imported into a MicroStrategy project. Inc. Only variables with the Manual Entry/Default processing type are presented to users for resolution. the report inherits the prompts included in the OLAP cube. and formula elements. an error occurs when you attempt to import the SAP BW cube.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Supporting SAP BW variables Variables are used in SAP BW to enter values as parameters for the queries on a cube. refer to your SAP documentation. additional standard MicroStrategy prompts can also be created for the report. When the query is being executed. including characteristic values. variables are automatically turned into prompts in the MicroStrategy OLAP cube. Variable types with the Customer Exit/SAP Exit and Authorization processing types are automatically resolved by the SAP BW system. see the Prompts section of the Creating OLAP Cube Reports chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. these variables are filled with values. For more information. There are several types of variables. SAP BW variables of type Replacement Path cannot be imported into MicroStrategy. On top of the “inherited” variable prompts.

Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Mapping between variables and prompts can be viewed in the OLAP Cube Catalog. Inc. and measures/key figures. In addition. Selection Type. Details about this variable in SAP BW are displayed on the Variable tab. Rename the prompt. using the right-mouse click you can Edit the prompt in the Prompt Generation Wizard. Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy 309 . including Variable Name. dimensions. The OLAP Cube Catalog lists all the prompts that were converted from variables. in addition to cube names. Default Low. In the OLAP Cube Catalog. and Variable Ordinal. as shown in the following image. Variable Type. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Entry Type. you can view any variable’s properties by right-clicking its name and then selecting Properties. or Map the variable to a prompt in an existing MicroStrategy project. Default Low Description.

SAP Variable Type ---> Characteristic Value variable Hierarchy variable MicroStrategy Prompt Element list prompt or attribute qualification prompt N/A Notes See the note below for more information. Not supported. For more information about prompts in OLAP cube reports. . Both single and multiple selection are supported. so it is distinguished from a simple characteristic variable on date. Qualifications in the Including section cause the data to be brought into the query. When executing a Report Services document with multiple datasets using these cubes. the MicroStrategy interface qualifies on the key value of each element by default. 310 Relating objects from SAP BW to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. No major changes. you need to manually set the variable’s property in the OLAP Cube Catalog. Hierarchy Node variable Hierarchy element list prompt Text variable Formula variable N/A Value prompt: all types Characteristic value variables offer an “Including/Excluding” option. This allows the same prompt answer to be used to resolve multiple variables during document execution. while those in the Excluding section restrict the data from being displayed in the query.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide One prompt can be mapped to more than one variable across cubes. Not available from SAP BW. The following table contains information on how the different types of SAP BW variables are mapped to MicroStrategy prompts. To be consistent with the SAP functionality. After an OLAP cube report is executed. you can view the prompt details in the Report Details pane in the Report Editor. This is especially useful if you want to get a summary of the variable elements that are used in answering the variable prompts. see the Prompts section of the Creating OLAP Cube Reports chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. a prompt is displayed only once. If you use any SAP BW key date variables in your query. Inc.

© 2007 MicroStrategy. each of which is represented as a single flat dimension with one level. This representation is consistent with how characteristic variables are represented in SAP BW through the OLAP Business Application Programming Interface (BAPI). SAP BW structures Structures in an SAP BW query cube define the two axes of a query (rows and columns) and are of two types: key figure structures and characteristic structures. In addition to key figure structures. it is helpful to understand how Essbase’s metadata model is translated into MicroStrategy’s metadata model. you can treat OLAP cube reports from an Essbase OLAP cube as if they were standard MicroStrategy reports. Inc. you cannot drill down into the elements of characteristic structures. Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy As a Web or Desktop Analyst. The Properties [variable name] dialog box is displayed. Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy 311 . However.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Set the properties for key date variables 1 Right-click the variable name and select Properties. 2 On the Variable tab. In a MicroStrategy report. if you are a report designer. and then click OK. Each element of a key figure structure is represented as a unique metric in the MicroStrategy environment. select the Set Key Date check box. a query could also have characteristic structures.

B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide The translation process involves the following steps: 1 From Essbase to XMLA: Essbase exposes its databases through the XMLA model which is derived from the ODBO model used by SAP. 312 Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. keep in mind how those objects appear in XMLA. 2 From XMLA to MicroStrategy: After Essbase objects are translated into the XMLA model. The Essbase model predates XMLA so there are some differences. When thinking about Essbase objects. XMLA defines an object model that is used in conjunction with MDX to query cubes. You can then interact with Essbase content while working within the paradigm that is consistent with the rest of MicroStrategy’s products. they are then translated into the MicroStrategy metadata model. . The following image demonstrates how Essbase objects are exposed in XMLA and then how they are related to objects in the MicroStrategy environment.

Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B The following subsections (each starting with a table) describe each level of comparison from top to bottom as shown in the above illustration. if any. • XMLA: catalog Catalogs are used to group cubes. Essbase ---> N/A XMLA ---> schema MicroStrategy N/A • • Essbase: not supported XMLA: schema Schema in XMLA provides another grouping mechanism. Therefore. Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy 313 . XMLA catalogs are exposed in editors when selecting and managing cubes. • MicroStrategy: not supported Essbase ---> database XMLA ---> cube MicroStrategy cube • • Essbase: database XMLA: cube © 2007 MicroStrategy. Databases are accessed through their respective catalogs. Essbase ---> Application XMLA ---> catalog MicroStrategy (catalog) • Essbase: Application Each Application is exposed as a catalog in XMLA. Catalogs in MicroStrategy are represented as a folder. • MicroStrategy: (catalog) Each catalog includes one application and associated databases. Inc.

A MicroStrategy cube maps the physical columns of an Essbase cube to attributes and metrics in the same way that a regular table maps the physical columns of a relational table to attributes and metrics. Measures (metrics) are stored in a special measure dimension. • XMLA: dimension A dimension in XMLA defines a logical category of analysis. measures are simply one more dimension of a cube. The cube represents an Essbase database. Each dimension has a single hierarchy with the number of levels determined by the greatest depth in the outline. In this way. .B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • MicroStrategy: cube A MicroStrategy cube is an object that is used to map the levels of an Essbase cube into the MicroStrategy environment. Cubes are treated in a manner very similar to tables in the MicroStrategy metadata. a dimension represents the highest consolidation level in the database outline. Each dimension has a single root node or member and is a child of the outline root node which is the database. For example. The dimension therefore is both the highest level member in the dimension and the dimension itself. • MicroStrategy: dimension 314 Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. An Essbase dimension appears as a dimension for MicroStrategy users. These can be raw data or formulas with associated calculation or aggregation rules. Inc. Essbase ---> dimension XMLA ---> dimension MicroStrategy dimension • Essbase: dimension In Essbase. Measures in ODBO are the members of the dimension of type=Accounts in Essbase. Time and Geography are dimensions along which you can slice data.

In MicroStrategy. the outline defines a single hierarchy. It is used to group attributes and define parent-child relationships. Essbase ---> dimension XMLA ---> hierarchy MicroStrategy hierarchy • Essbase: dimension An Essbase dimension is defined as part of the database outline.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B A dimension object in MicroStrategy is very similar to an XMLA dimension. Essbase levels may have default names such as Time. MicroStrategy reuses the hierarchy objects to represent both dimensions and hierarchies from XMLA. Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy 315 . Therefore the dimension is the same as the hierarchy in Essbase. The outline is a hierarchical structure of database members with a parent containing its children. • • XMLA: level MicroStrategy: attribute (ID/DESC) © 2007 MicroStrategy. As a result. Inc. • • XMLA: hierarchy MicroStrategy: hierarchy Hierarchies are used to group attributes (levels) together and define the relationships between these attributes.Levels(0). architects have the option to rename the levels of a cube with a more readable convention. Essbase ---> level XMLA ---> level MicroStrategy attribute • Essbase: level Levels group together members in an Essbase database outline.

Until they are returned as rows in the property schema rowset they are not available as attribute forms in MicroStrategy.1. For example. each XMLA level generates the two physical columns and forms ID and DESC in MicroStrategy. 2003 and 2004 are elements of the Year attribute. However. the Customer attribute may have the forms First Name and Last Name. properties can be defined for a database as user defined attributes or attribute dimensions and used in an MDX statement. .3 does not return any properties in the XMLA property schema rowset. 316 Relating objects from Essbase to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. • • XMLA: property MicroStrategy: attribute form Attribute forms provide additional information about a given attribute. Inc. For example. Essbase ---> N/A XMLA ---> property MicroStrategy attribute form • Essbase: N/A Essbase as of version 7. However.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide MicroStrategy attributes map to XMLA levels. Essbase ---> member XMLA ---> member MicroStrategy attribute element • • • Essbase: member XMLA: member MicroStrategy: attribute element Element values come from either the database or a cube.

If you are a report designer. 2 From XMLA to MicroStrategy: After Analysis Services 2000 objects are translated into the XMLA model. The translation process involves the following steps: 1 From Analysis Services 2000 to XMLA: Analysis Services 2000 exposes its cubes through the XMLA model which is derived from the ODBO model. they are then translated into the MicroStrategy metadata model. You can then interact with Analysis Services 2000 content while working within the paradigm that is consistent with the rest of MicroStrategy’s products. Inc. XMLA defines an object model that is used in conjunction with MDX to query cubes. Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy 317 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. it is helpful to understand how Analysis Services 2000’s metadata model is translated into MicroStrategy’s metadata model.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy Microsoft Analysis Services 2000 (Analysis Services 2000) cubes are exposed directly for XMLA access.

• MicroStrategy: (catalog) 318 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. The following sub-sections—each starting with a table—describe each level of comparison from top to bottom as shown in the above illustration. Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> database catalog MicroStrategy (catalog) • Analysis Services 2000: database Each database is exposed as a catalog in XMLA. Therefore. Cubes are accessed through their respective catalogs. . XMLA catalogs are exposed in editors when selecting and managing cubes.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide The following image demonstrates how Analysis Services 2000 objects are exposed in XMLA and then how they are related to objects in the MicroStrategy environment. • XMLA: catalog Catalogs are used to group cubes.

Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> dimension dimension MicroStrategy dimension • Analysis Services 2000: dimension © 2007 MicroStrategy. Cubes are treated in a manner very similar to tables in the MicroStrategy metadata. if any.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Each catalog includes one database and associated cubes. a MicroStrategy cube maps the physical columns of an Analysis Services 2000 cube to attributes and metrics. Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> N/A schema MicroStrategy N/A • • Analysis Services 2000: not supported XMLA: schema Schema in XMLA provides another grouping mechanism. • MicroStrategy: not supported Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> cube cube MicroStrategy cube • • • Analysis Services 2000: cube XMLA: cube MicroStrategy: cube A MicroStrategy cube is an object that is used to map the levels of an Analysis Services 2000 cube into the MicroStrategy environment. Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy 319 . In the same way that a regular table maps the physical columns of a relational table to attributes and metrics. Inc. The cube represents an Analysis Services 2000 cube. Catalogs in MicroStrategy are represented as a folder.

related dimensions can be grouped together so that they represent hierarchies of the same dimension from an XMLA perspective. Measures in XMLA are the members of the Measures dimension in Analysis Services 2000. • MicroStrategy: dimension A dimension object in MicroStrategy is very similar to an XMLA dimension. a dimension is defined from one or more tables of data. It is used to group attributes and define parent-child relationships. An Analysis Services 2000 dimension appears as a dimension for MicroStrategy users. Inc. MicroStrategy reuses the hierarchy objects to represent both dimensions and hierarchies from XMLA. These can be columns in the table or calculated members represented by formulas with associated aggregation rules. . For example. measures are simply one more dimension of a cube. • XMLA: dimension A dimension in XMLA defines a logical category of analysis. • • XMLA: hierarchy MicroStrategy: hierarchy Hierarchies are used to group attributes (levels) together and define the relationships between these attributes. Time and Geography are dimensions along which you can slice data. Measures (metrics) are stored in a special measure dimension. In this way. Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> dimension hierarchy MicroStrategy hierarchy • Analysis Services 2000: dimension Using a structured naming approach. 320 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Each dimension can have one or more hierarchies.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide In Analysis Services 2000.

However. For example. Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> member property property MicroStrategy attribute form • Analysis Services 2000: member property A member property is a descriptive piece of information associated with the element of a level. each XMLA level generates two physical columns and forms in MicroStrategy—ID and DESC. Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> member member MicroStrategy attribute element • • • Analysis Services 2000: member XMLA: member MicroStrategy: attribute element Element values come from a cube. XMLA: property MicroStrategy: attribute form Relating objects from Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy 321 . • • XMLA: level MicroStrategy: attribute (ID/DESC) MicroStrategy attributes map to XMLA levels. 2003 and 2004 are elements of the Year attribute. • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. Member properties are returned in the XMLA property schema rowset.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Analysis Services 2000 ---> XMLA ---> level level MicroStrategy attribute • Analysis Services 2000: level Levels are mapped to columns in a table and are organized into hierarchies and dimensions.

This section is limited to information on the basic cube object and how it relates to the XMLA model. XMLA defines an object model that is used in conjunction with MDX to query cubes. Inc. 322 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. 2 From XMLA to MicroStrategy: After Analysis Services 2005 objects are translated into the XMLA model. they are then translated into the MicroStrategy metadata model.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Attribute forms provide additional information about a given attribute. The translation process involves the following steps: 1 From Analysis Services 2005 to XMLA: Analysis Services 2005 exposes its cubes through the XMLA model which is derived from the ODBO model. For example. You can then interact with Analysis Services 2005 content while working within the paradigm that is consistent with the rest of MicroStrategy’s products. . Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy Microsoft Analysis Services 2005 (Analysis Services 2005) has a unique modeling approach for building cubes. the Customer attribute may have the forms First Name and Last Name.

Therefore. XMLA catalogs are exposed in editors when selecting and managing cubes. Cubes are accessed through their respective catalogs. Inc. • XMLA: catalog Catalogs are used to group cubes. Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy 323 . Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> database catalog MicroStrategy (catalog) • Analysis Services 2005: database Each database is exposed as a catalog in XMLA. The following sub-sections—each starting with a table—describe each level of comparison from top to bottom as shown in the above illustration. • MicroStrategy: (catalog) © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B The following image demonstrates how Analysis Services 2005 objects are exposed in XMLA and then how they are related to objects in the MicroStrategy environment.

. Catalogs in MicroStrategy are represented as a folder. 324 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> N/A schema MicroStrategy N/A • • Analysis Services 2005: not supported XMLA: schema Schema in XMLA provides another grouping mechanism. a MicroStrategy cube maps the physical columns of an Analysis Services 2005 cube to attributes and metrics. In the same way that a regular table maps the physical columns of a relational table to attributes and metrics. The cube represents an Analysis Services 2005 cube. • MicroStrategy: not supported Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> perspective cube MicroStrategy cube • Analysis Services 2005: perspective A perspective in Analysis Services 2005 is a view of the defined cube and the list of perspectives includes the original cube. if any.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Each catalog includes one database and associated cubes. Inc. Cubes are treated in a manner very similar to tables in the MicroStrategy metadata. • • XMLA: cube MicroStrategy: cube A MicroStrategy cube is an object that is used to map the levels of an Analysis Services 2005 cube into the MicroStrategy environment.

Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> hierarchy hierarchy MicroStrategy hierarchy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy 325 . Measures in XMLA are the members of the Measures dimension in Analysis Services 2005. a data source does not always map directly to the tables in a relational database. These can be columns in the data source table or calculated members represented by formulas with associated aggregation rules. • MicroStrategy: dimension A dimension object in MicroStrategy is very similar to an XMLA dimension. Time and Geography are dimensions along which you can slice data. Each dimension can have one or more hierarchies. Inc. • XMLA: dimension A dimension in XMLA defines a logical category of analysis. Unlike Analysis Services 2000. Each attribute is used to define a hierarchy within the dimension and multi-level hierarchies can be defined as well. a dimension is defined from one or more data source tables. An Analysis Services 2005 dimension appears as a dimension for MicroStrategy users. Measures (metrics) are stored in a special measure dimension. All columns in the tables are eligible to become attributes of the dimension. For example.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> dimension dimension MicroStrategy dimension • Analysis Services 2005: dimension In Analysis Services 2005. measures are simply one more dimension of a cube. It is used to group attributes and define parent-child relationships. In this way.

each XMLA level generates two physical columns and forms in MicroStrategy—ID and DESC. However. Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> member member MicroStrategy attribute element • • • Analysis Services 2005: member XMLA: member MicroStrategy: attribute element Element values come from a cube. Inc. • • XMLA: hierarchy MicroStrategy: hierarchy Hierarchies are used to group attributes (levels) together and define the relationships between these attributes.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • Analysis Services 2005: hierarchy Analysis Services 2005 allows the definition of one or more hierarchies within a dimension as collections of attributes which become levels of the hierarchy. Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> level level MicroStrategy attribute • Analysis Services 2005: level Each attribute in a hierarchy becomes a level. 2003 and 2004 are elements of the Year attribute. . MicroStrategy reuses the hierarchy objects to represent both dimensions and hierarchies from XMLA. For example. 326 Relating objects from Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. • • XMLA: level MicroStrategy: attribute (ID/DESC) MicroStrategy attributes map to XMLA levels.

Connecting to SAP BW servers In addition to relational databases. 3. see the MicroStrategy readme. For more information on establishing a connection to SAP BW. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. This section discusses how to connect to SAP BW servers in the following environments: • • Connecting to SAP BW servers on Windows Connecting to SAP BW servers on UNIX and Linux © 2007 MicroStrategy. • • XMLA: property MicroStrategy: attribute form Attribute forms provide additional information about a given attribute. and 7. you need to establish a connection to the SAP BW system. MicroStrategy certifies connecting to SAP BW 3. MicroStrategy can also use SAP BW as a data source to conduct enterprise reporting and analysis.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Analysis Services 2005 ---> XMLA ---> member property property MicroStrategy attribute form • Analysis Services 2005: member property Attributes can be related as member properties when defining the levels of a dimension. the Customer attribute may have the forms First Name and Last Name. Connecting to SAP BW servers 327 . For any late-breaking changes to the certification status of connecting to various SAP BW versions. Inc.0.5.1. Member properties are returned in the XMLA property schema rowset. For example. Before creating any reports using the SAP BW data.

To connect to SAP BW servers on Windows 1 Open the SAP Service Marketplace and download the SAP Java Connector. You can use the following URL to download the Java Connector: https://service. In 328 Connecting to SAP BW servers © 2007 MicroStrategy.4 and JCo 2. Take the following steps to connect to SAP BW servers in Windows.0. you may have to perform some extra configuration and troubleshooting steps to connect to SAP BW servers.dll Locate the Path environment variable from your machine’s System Properties dialog (right-click on My Computer and select Properties). select Environment Variables.com/~form/sapnet?_SHOR TKEY=01100035870000463649 MicroStrategy certifies version 2.NET C/C++ run-time libraries on Windows platforms. For more information.sap. . Inc.1.dll Sapjcorfc.3 and also supports more recent versions. you are required to install the new Visual Studio . on the Advanced tab.1. See SAP Note 684106 for details on how to install them.” Depending on your system and SAP BW setup. refer to the Tech Note TN5800-800-0559.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Connecting to SAP BW servers on Windows Important note from SAP: “Starting with JCo 2.11. 2 Install the SAP Java Connector. 3 Place the following SAP Java Connector files in any directory that is referenced in the Path environment variable: • • Librfc32.

Connecting to SAP BW servers 329 . open a project source and expand Administration from the folder list. 4 Place the Sapjco. select a database connection or create a new database connection that provides the following information as required: • • • • Application Server is the name of the SAP BW Server or IP address. locate Path. For example. To specify database connection parameters 9 For the database instance. and then Database Instance from the File menu.jar in the Common Files MicroStrategy folder. Inc. To create a database instance for your SAP BW connection 5 In Desktop. Verify that the directory is included in the value for the Path variable.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B the list of System Variables. SAP Router String if you use an SAP Router. 6 From the folder list. 7 Select New. © 2007 MicroStrategy. The Database Instance editor opens. System Number from the SAP BW system. select Database Instance Manager. as shown below. Client Number from the SAP BW system. C:\Program files\Common files\MicroStrategy. 8 Create a database instance with SAP BW as the database connection type.

Inc. For more information. Depending on your system and SAP BW setup. To connect to SAP BW servers on UNIX/Linux 1 Open the SAP Service Marketplace and download the SAP Java Connector. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. refer to the MicroStrategy online help.com/~form/sapnet?_SHOR TKEY=01100035870000463649 330 Connecting to SAP BW servers © 2007 MicroStrategy. You can use the following URL to download the Java Connector: https://service. . refer to the MicroStrategy Tech Note TN5300-802-0734. For more information.sap. For more detailed steps on creating a database instance and related components to connect to SAP BW. To specify a database login 10 Create a database login with the user and password to use to connect to SAP BW. You can use either the Database Instances Editor or the Database Instance Wizard to create a database instance for SAP BW. For example.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • Language is the language code provided by your SAP administrator. Note the following: • • You can get the above information from your SAP Logon. you may have to perform some extra configuration and troubleshooting steps to connect to SAP BW servers. Connecting to SAP BW servers on UNIX and Linux Take the following steps to connect to SAP BW servers in UNIX. EN is the language code for English.

so sapjco. then xxxx_append_path LD_LIBRARY_PATH "${XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH:?}" export LD_LIBRARY_PATH fi • © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. For example. and create a new directory for them.so libsapjcorfc. /opt/var/MicroStrategy/SAP.o libsapjcorfc. for AIX: # # set up the environment for SAP # XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH='/opt/var/MicroStr ategy/SAP' if [ -n "${XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH}" ].jar 4 Edit the SAP. The default is Read Only. Open the SAP. copy them onto your machine.sh file in the MicroStrategy installation directory [INSTALL_PATH]/env/SAP.1. For example.sh by doing the following: • Add the Write and Execute privileges to this file. This information indicates where the server needs to point to use the downloaded files. You can type the command “chmod+wx SAP. AIX librfccm.so sapjco.so sapjco. For example.jar SUN librfccm.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B • MicroStrategy certifies version 2. use the command gunzip [file name] or gzip [file name]. Connecting to SAP BW servers 331 .so libsapjcorfc.3 and also supports more recent versions.jar Linux librfccm.sh file and enter the information for XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH=’’. 2 Select the zip file for the platform you want to use and unzip it. 3 Search for the files listed in the following table.sh” in the UNIX/Linux console.

Inc. 6 Restart the server to get the latest updates. 332 Connecting to SAP BW servers © 2007 MicroStrategy.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide For example. select Database Instance Manager. 8 From the folder list. open a project source and expand Administration from the folder list. To create a database instance for your SAP BW connection 7 In Desktop (available only in Windows). for Solaris: # # set up the environment for SAP # XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH='/opt/var/MicroStr ategy/SAP’ if [ -n "${XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH}" ]. 5 Add sapjco. . /install/jar. then xxxx_append_path LIBPATH "${XXXX_SAP_LIBRARY_PATH:?}" export LIBPATH fi • Save the file.jar to the installation directory. Make sure you have Write privilege to this directory. and then Database Instance from the File menu. 9 Select New. The Database Instance editor opens.

Connecting to SAP BW servers 333 . select a database connection or create a new database connection that provides the following information as required: • • • • • Application Server: name of the SAP BW Server or IP address SAP Router String. To specify database connection parameters 11 For the database instance. You can also refer to Tech Note TN5300-802-0734 for more information on setting up SAP BW with Intelligence Server Universal. For more information. as shown below.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B 10 Create a database instance with SAP BW as the database connection type. for example. You can use either the Database Instances Editor or the Database Instance Wizard to create a database instance for SAP BW. EN for English Note the following: • • You can get the above information from your SAP Logon. © 2007 MicroStrategy. if you use an SAP Router System Number from the SAP BW system Client Number from the SAP BW system Language: the language code provided by your SAP administrator. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. Inc.

refer to the MicroStrategy online help.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide To specify a database login 12 Create a database login with the user and password to use to connect to SAP BW. refer to MicroStrategy Tech Note TN1100-000-0635. For more detailed steps on creating a database instance and related components to connect to SAP BW. You can perform a test of the XMLA connection to your OLAP cube servers completely separate of any MicroStrategy dependencies with the XMLA Connectivity Test Tool provided with your MicroStrategy installation. you need to establish a connection to the Essbase servers. This section discusses how to connect to Essbase servers in the Windows or UNIX/Linux environment.1 specification found at www. You can think of XMLA as a Web Service that supports metadata and data queries against an OLAP Cube source. MicroStrategy can also use Essbase as a data source to conduct enterprise reporting and analysis. For information on how to use the XMLA Connectivity Test Tool.xmla. Inc. The Execute request queries cube data and results are returned in an ExecuteResponse message. 334 Connecting to Essbase servers © 2007 MicroStrategy. Before creating any reports using the Essbase data. Configuring the XMLA Provider The material in this section assumes familiarity with the XMLA 1.org. Connecting to Essbase servers In addition to relational databases. A Discover request supports queries to metadata and the results are packaged in a DiscoverResponse message. . and the configuration of the XMLA provider for each of these products.

see MicroStrategy Tech Note TN5300-802-0794. The web application server may be installed on a different machine from the Essbase server. Note the following: • For the latest information on the 3rd-party connection prerequisites given below. Consult your 3rd-party documentation for further details on system requirements and the latest updates. The Hyperion XMLA Provider must be installed and configured on a compatible web application server. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Make sure the XMLA 1. You can verify it is working by connecting to the provider URL from your browser. Inc. The application server that hosts the Hyperion XMLA provider must enable anonymous access to the XMLA application.1 and Apache Tomcat. • • • • Creating a database instance Perform the following steps to connect to Hyperion Essbase servers. Connecting to Essbase servers 335 . You should receive a confirmation from the provider that includes a display of currently configured properties. The Hyperion XMLA provider supports BEA WebLogic 6. Install Hyperion Enterprise Deployment Services 7. For information on installation procedures.1 on the application server machine to verify that access is available to the Essbase server via the Service Console. refer to your 3rd-party documentation.1 provider is correctly deployed and security settings are configured correctly. Information for correctly installing the XMLA provider can be found in the 3rd-party documentation for Hyperion’s Enterprise Deployment Services product.

http://fully-qualified-machinename:8080/ xmla/EssbaseXmlForAnalysis. as shown below. 4 Create a database instance with Hyperion Essbase as the database connection type. The fully-qualified-machinename is usually of the form machine. For Essbase the URL is most likely case sensitive. 2 Expand Administration from the Folder List and select Database Instance Manager. For example. • DSI: The DataSourceInfo (DSI) value is of the form: 336 Connecting to Essbase servers © 2007 MicroStrategy. . To specify database connection parameters 5 For the database instance. You can also use the IP address as the fully-qualified-machinename. The Database Instance editor opens. select a database connection or create a new database connection that provides the following information as required: • URL: This is the URL of the XMLA Provider that was configured for HTTP access.company. 3 From the File menu. Inc.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide To create a database instance for Essbase 1 From the Desktop Folder List.com. and then Database Instance. select New.domain. connect to a project source.

A cube in XMLA is a database in Essbase. Use the Essbase Administration Console to view the applications and databases available on the server. Inc. you should check that you meet all of the requirements listed in the tech note TN5200-802-0540. Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers . • Catalog: The Essbase Catalog value is the Essbase Application containing the database you want to work with in MicroStrategy. Before creating any reports using the Analysis Services 2000 data. You can perform a test of the XMLA connection to your OLAP cube servers completely separate of any MicroStrategy dependencies with the XMLA 337 • © 2007 MicroStrategy. For more detailed steps on creating a database instance and related components to connect to Analysis Services.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Provider=Essbase.Data source=<machine name> The value is split between the DSI setting and an additional connection string parameters setting. To specify a database login 6 Create a database login with the user and password to use to connect to the Web service hosting the Essbase XML Provider. Note the following: • Before connecting to your Analysis Services 2000 servers. Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers In addition to relational databases. This section discusses how to connect to Analysis Services 2000 servers in the Windows or UNIX/Linux environment. MicroStrategy can also use Analysis Services 2000 as a data source to conduct enterprise reporting and analysis. you need to establish a connection to the Analysis Services 2000 servers. refer to the MicroStrategy online help.

You can verify Analysis Services 2000 is working by connecting to the provider URL from your browser. Creating a database instance for Analysis Services 2000 1 In Desktop.org. The Execute request queries cube data and results are returned in an ExecuteResponse message. Inc. You should receive an XML response indicating that the site is available as an XMLA provider. refer to MicroStrategy Tech Note TN1100-000-0635. Information for correctly installing the XMLA provider can be found in your Microsoft documentation. A Discover request supports queries to metadata and the results are packaged in a DiscoverResponse message. open a project source and expand Administration from the folder list. Creating a database instance Perform the following steps to connect to Microsoft Analysis Services 2000 servers.1 provider is correctly deployed and security settings are configured correctly. 338 Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers © 2007 MicroStrategy.xmla. and the configuration of the XMLA provider for each of these products. You can think of XMLA as a Web service that supports metadata and data queries against an OLAP Cube source.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Connectivity Test Tool provided with your MicroStrategy installation. select Database Instance Manager. . Make sure the XMLA 1.1 specification found at www. 2 From the folder list. For information on how to use the XMLA Connectivity Test Tool. Configuring the XMLA Provider The material in this section assumes familiarity with the XMLA 1.

and then Database Instance. • DSI: With Analysis Services 2000 the DataSourceInfo (DSI) value is the configuration setting for your data source labeled as DataSourceName in the datasources.company. http://fully-qualified-machinename/xmla/ msxisapi.domain.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B 3 From the File menu. • © 2007 MicroStrategy.com. as shown below. The Database Instance Editor opens. For example. Catalog: Use Microsoft’s Analysis Manager to view the Analysis Server containing the cubes you want to work with in MicroStrategy. Inc.dll The fully-qualified-machinename is usually of the form machine. The database that contains the cube becomes the catalog for XMLA. To specify database connection parameters 5 For the database instance. You can also use the IP address as the fully-qualified-machinename. Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers 339 . the URL is not case-sensitive. 4 Create a database instance with Microsoft Analysis Services as the database connection type. For Analysis Services XMLA running on IIS. select a database connection or create a new database connection that provides the following information as required: • URL: This is the URL of the XMLA Provider that was configured for HTTP access.xml file. select New.

For information on setting up authentication for Intelligence Server with Analysis Services. you should check that you meet all of the requirements listed in the tech note TN5200-802-0542. For information on how to use the XMLA Connectivity Test Tool. Note the following: • Before connecting to your Analysis Services 2005 servers. Before creating any reports using the Analysis Services 2005 data. • 340 Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers © 2007 MicroStrategy.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide To specify a database login 6 Create a database login with the user and password to use to connect to Analysis Services. you need to establish a connection to the Analysis Services 2005 servers. This section discusses how to connect to Analysis Services 2005 servers in the Windows or UNIX/Linux environment. refer to the tech note TN5300-802-0755. refer to MicroStrategy Tech Note TN1100-000-0635. refer to the MicroStrategy online help. Inc. For more detailed steps on creating a database instance and related components to connect to Analysis Services. MicroStrategy can also use Analysis Services 2005 as a data source to conduct enterprise reporting and analysis. You can perform a test of the XMLA connection to your OLAP cube servers completely separate of any MicroStrategy dependencies with the XMLA Connectivity Test Tool provided with your MicroStrategy installation. Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers In addition to relational databases. .

open a project source and expand Administration from the folder list. Creating a database instance for Analysis Services 2005 1 In Desktop. 3 From the File menu. A Discover request supports queries to metadata and the results are packaged in a DiscoverResponse message. Inc.org. The Execute request queries cube data and results are returned in an ExecuteResponse message. Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers 341 . You can think of XMLA as a Web Service that supports metadata and data queries against an OLAP Cube source. Creating a database instance Perform the following steps to connect to Microsoft Analysis Services 2005 servers.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Configuring the XMLA Provider The material in this section assumes familiarity with the XMLA 1. Information for correctly installing the XMLA provider can be found in your Microsoft documentation.1 specification found at www. which includes configuring security settings. The Database Instance Editor opens. only the TCP/IP transport is configured. 2 From the folder list. © 2007 MicroStrategy. However. by default. and the configuration of the XMLA provider for each of these products. select Database Instance Manager.xmla. XMLA is the native access method for Analysis Services 2005. and then Database Instance. Follow Microsoft documentation to make sure that the XMLA provider is correctly configured for HTTP access. select New.

Inc. Unlike Analysis Services 2000. the URL is not case sensitive. The database that contains the cube becomes the catalog for XMLA. the DSI entry can be left blank. .domain. select a database connection or create a new database connection that provides the following information as required: • URL: This is the URL of the XMLA Provider that was configured for HTTP access. • To specify a database login 6 Create a database login with the user and password to use to connect to Analysis Services. For Analysis Services 2005 XMLA running on IIS. each URL will be configured to support only one data source.com. You can also use the IP address as the fully-qualified-machinename. as shown below. http://fully-qualified-machinename/xmla/ msmdpump.company. • DSI: For Analysis Services 2005.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide 4 Create a database instance with Microsoft Analysis Services as the database connection type. For example.dll The fully-qualified-machinename is usually of the form machine. To specify database connection parameters 5 For the database instance. 342 Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers © 2007 MicroStrategy. Catalog: Use Microsoft’s SQL Server Management Studio to view the Analysis Server which contains the cubes to work with in MicroStrategy.

page 337 © 2007 MicroStrategy. Like the Warehouse Catalog. refer to the MicroStrategy online help. where you can import OLAP cubes and remap the OLAP cubes before you create any OLAP cube reports. Note the following: • Once an OLAP cube is imported. The best place to start is with the OLAP Cube Catalog. The OLAP Cube Catalog is available only after an OLAP cube source database instance has been created. refer to Chapter 5. see one of the following sections: • – Connecting to SAP BW servers. the OLAP Cube Catalog can be accessed from the Schema menu on Desktop. you can remap an OLAP cube to MicroStrategy objects and create metrics within an OLAP cube with the OLAP Cube Editor. page 359. For more detailed steps on creating a database instance and related components to connect to Analysis Services. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 343 .Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B For information on setting up authentication for Intelligence Server with Analysis Services. you can start working with the OLAP cube data in MicroStrategy. Configuring and Connecting to Intelligence Server of the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. To learn how to create a database instance for an OLAP cube source. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy Once you understand the relationships among the objects in an OLAP cube source and MicroStrategy and connect to your OLAP cube source. see Mapping OLAP cubes. For more information. Inc. refer to the tech note TN5300-802-0755. page 327 – Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers. For information on setting OLAP cube schema loading options for an OLAP cube source database instance. page 349 and Creating metrics from OLAP cube data with MDX and compound metric techniques.

all the OLAP cubes are displayed. page 334 This section discusses how you can use the OLAP Cube Catalog to bring the OLAP cube data into a MicroStrategy project and what functions you can perform once the data is brought into MicroStrategy. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help (search for “OLAP Cube Catalog”). You can choose to load the schema for imported OLAP cubes when Intelligence Server starts or during OLAP cube report execution. as shown in the image below. . Importing OLAP cubes OLAP cube importing is performed on the Cube Selection tab. For information on setting OLAP cube schema loading options for an OLAP cube source database instance. under their respective catalog names in the Available Cubes pane. Configuring and Connecting to Intelligence Server of the MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide. SAP BW is used as the OLAP cube source but the procedure is similar for Analysis Services and Essbase.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide – Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers. refer to Chapter 5. When you open the OLAP Cube Catalog. Using the plus (+) or minus (-) sign next to a catalog name. page 340 – Connecting to Essbase servers. OLAP cubes can be imported into a MicroStrategy project only by an architect with the “Import OLAP cube” privilege. For details on how to use the OLAP Cube Catalog. 344 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. by default. Inc. you can expand or hide the cubes contained in this catalog.

If you create new cubes in Analysis Services and the cubes are not being displayed in the OLAP Cube Catalog. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B A catalog is marked with an icon showing a folder containing a cube. and a query cube is marked with a cube icon in green. 2 From the Schema menu. an InfoCube is marked with a cube icon in blue. log in to a project that is connected to an OLAP cube source. For details on how to make Analysis Services cubes available for import in the OLAP Cube Catalog. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 345 . select OLAP Cube Catalog. Inc. you may have to modify some permissions in Analysis Services. To import OLAP cubes 1 In Desktop. see MicroStrategy Tech Note TN4100-802-1879.

Once you select a valid OLAP cube source database instance. 6 Use one of the following methods to import the OLAP cubes: • • To import the selected OLAP cubes. Inc. Select Find from the Edit menu or click the Find icon on the toolbar to open the Find dialog box to search for a specific OLAP cube that you want to import.) Once the data is mapped to MicroStrategy objects. To import all OLAP cubes. select the OLAP cube to import. You can also select All to display the OLAP cubes for all catalogs. click the single arrow (>). page 349. click the double arrows (>>). click OK. 8 Click Save to save your progress. using this dialog box. • 3 Select the Cube Selection tab. a Database Instance dialog box opens. the OLAP Cube Catalog opens. you can use the OLAP Cube Catalog to map the OLAP cube data to MicroStrategy objects (see Mapping OLAP cubes. you can build reports that access the imported OLAP cubes. and the OLAP Cube Catalog opens. If you have multiple OLAP cube source database instances created for the project. . 346 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. 4 From the Catalog drop-down list.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide • If you have a single OLAP cube source database instance created for the project. 7 Once imported. 5 Click the plus (+) sign to expand the catalog folder and display the OLAP cubes in the Available Cubes pane on the left. the imported OLAP cubes are displayed in the Selected Cubes pane on the right. and select an OLAP cube source database instance to connect to. You can edit. create. The catalog contains all the OLAP cubes associated with it. After importing OLAP cubes.

under the associated MicroStrategy project. For example. you can right-click any OLAP cube in the Selected Cubes pane. Once the first OLAP cube for an OLAP cube source is imported into MicroStrategy. Inc. when a new characteristic or key figure has been added to the InfoCube in SAP BW you can use the Update Structure option to update the MicroStrategy OLAP cube to include these modifications. you choose OLAP cubes for your report from the Select Cube dialog box.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B To remove an OLAP cube. Importing OLAP cubes during report creation When you create an OLAP cube report. and select Remove [cube name]. you can also select the Update Structure option to synchronize with the updated definition of cube structures in the OLAP cube source. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 347 . a Data Explorer for that OLAP cube source is added to the MicroStrategy project. Using the right-mouse click. You can find the Data Explorer in the Folder List of Desktop. This dialog box can also be used by an architect with the “Import OLAP cubes” privilege to import cubes by using the Retrieve cubes option. This option is available only after a database © 2007 MicroStrategy.

. However. managed objects (attributes. and so on) are created to describe the OLAP cube. tables. metrics. In the Search for Objects dialog box. For detailed information. see the related sections above on connecting to the different OLAP cube sources. Managed objects When an OLAP cube is imported into a project. A managed object is just like a normal object except that it is created by the system and is stored in a special system folder that is hidden from users. one way to access managed objects is by using the Search for Objects function from the Tools menu on Desktop.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide instance has been defined. where you can search for a specific cube for your report by the cube’s name. You can click Find at the bottom of this dialog box to open the Find dialog box. and then select the Display Managed Objects option so that managed objects are displayed in the 348 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. columns. from the Tools menu select Options. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. Inc. For details.

This model is referenced by the SQL Engine to generate SQL at run time. The removal of unused managed objects is usually performed by an administrator. as described in Importing OLAP cubes. Once the managed objects are listed in the search result. much of the process centers on identifying logical entities. an OLAP cube. referred to as managed objects. To do this. metrics. For example. you can simply select a cube by using the OLAP Cube Catalog or Select Cube dialog box. After you have imported an OLAP cube. the architect can then define a logical and physical model in the MicroStrategy metadata. By default. instead of a single table. you can rename or edit any of them by right-clicking its name. they © 2007 MicroStrategy. such as SAP BW. Inc. Once the logical entities are identified. page 344. Intelligence Server creates new attributes. a MicroStrategy OLAP cube is created that maps to the definition of the source cube in the OLAP cube source. need to add an OLAP cube to a project in MicroStrategy. A managed object can be removed once it is no longer referenced by another object in the project. see the Managing Your Applications chapter of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. In the context of OLAP cube sources. that exist in physical tables. When you. When an OLAP cube is imported into MicroStrategy. For more information on removing a database instance and its related managed objects.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B search result. right-click an OLAP cube in Desktop and select Edit. are new and are part of the project. as the architect. you can perform the same mapping tasks available in the Cube Mapping tab of the OLAP Cube Catalog by editing the OLAP cube with the OLAP Cube Editor. an architect might identify that the key for the Customer attribute exists in the table LU_CUSTOMER. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 349 . and hierarchies that reflect the data and levels of the imported OLAP cube. such as attributes and facts. contains all the metadata information necessary to define a logical model and physical model. Mapping OLAP cubes When an architect defines a project. Although these objects.

see the Reporting on External Data Sources: OLAP Cube Reports chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Inc.) For example. If you decide to discontinue the use of OLAP cube reports. A new schema is created for each OLAP cube source database instance used in a MicroStrategy project. In addition. which ensures that a consistent logical model is maintained. a new managed object named Year has no relation to the Year attribute in the Tutorial project connected to the data warehouse. For more information on managed objects in OLAP cube reports. For more information on the benefits of remapping OLAP cube data to project attributes. For steps on how to perform these schema cleanup tasks. This allows data to be joined across sources in Report Services documents. page 356. you can remap OLAP cube data to existing attributes in a MicroStrategy project rather than new managed objects. see the Managing Your Applications chapter of the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide are not related to the project’s schema and schema objects (see Managed objects above. you can remove the OLAP cube source database instance and all of its associated managed objects. Once an OLAP cube is mapped. 350 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. see Why do you need to remap OLAP cubes?. . Remapping OLAP cube data to existing attributes can also facilitate the use of MicroStrategy features such as security filters. it can be used to build reports and documents in MicroStrategy.

only the ID and DESC forms are automatically mapped for each attribute. For SAP BW. you can map attribute forms for each attribute contained in the imported cube. you can use the plus (+) sign next to the attribute levels to display the attribute forms. • In the Physical View column. and attributes are represented by a green symbol with two side-by-side rectangles. By default. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 351 . with the same symbols for hierarchies and attributes as in standard reports. hierarchy is below the dimension with a green stacked boxes symbol. Inc. The Logical View in the right-hand column represents the equivalent structure in MicroStrategy. As shown in the image above: • The Physical View in the left-hand column represents the cube structure in the OLAP Cube Source.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B Using the Cube Mapping feature in the OLAP Cube Catalog shown below. the characteristic (dimension) is located at the very top with a green chart and box symbol.

You can also use the Show Technical Names icon on the toolbar to display the SAP BW terms for each attribute and its attribute forms. MicroStrategy retrieves the column data type through MDX. For more information. and Description in SAP BW. In the case of OLAP cube data that is mapped to attributes. page 308. Technical Name. In the Properties dialog box. This is because variables in SAP BW are represented as prompts in MicroStrategy. • • • For variables. the columns are often returned as a string of characters. refer to Supporting SAP BW variables. Use the Display All Columns icon on the toolbar to show additional attribute forms in the Physical View column and then map each one to an attribute form in the Logical View pane. . This can be the case even with ID columns of data that are of a 352 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. The Show Technical Names option applies to SAP BW OLAP cubes only. you can also perform the above-mentioned manipulations. you can view the information on its Name. Rename the attribute or metric so it has a different name in the MicroStrategy project from the name of the characteristic or key figure it is mapped to in SAP BW. For MicroStrategy attributes and metrics.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide By default. Manually setting column data types for OLAP cube data When OLAP cube data is mapped to MicroStrategy objects. Map the characteristic or key figure to an existing attribute or metric in the MicroStrategy project. only the ID and DESC forms are displayed. However. An ID form must be mapped for each attribute. you can perform the following manipulations by right-clicking the name in the Logical view column: • Edit the attribute or metric. Check the Properties of the characteristic or key figure. This option opens the Attribute Editor to edit attributes and the Metric Editor to edit metrics. the Prompt Generation Wizard is displayed. note that when you select Edit.

This allows the OLAP cube data to be correctly represented in MicroStrategy and facilitates the grouping of related attributes as the same attribute in a Report Services document. or as a later modification with the OLAP Cube Editor. you can then include the two OLAP cube reports as datasets of a Report Services document and group the two Product attributes. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 353 . By setting the Product ID attribute form to read the OLAP cube data as an integer. Returning data such as ID columns of attributes as strings can make it impossible to group attributes with common data as the same attribute in Report Services documents. but you know that its associated OLAP cube column is of type integer.0 you can manually select the column data type that is applied to a column of OLAP cube data mapped to an attribute. you have OLAP cube data that is mapped to a Product attribute in MicroStrategy. starting with the step to expand data in the Physical view column.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B numeric type such as integer. For example. but the same steps apply for the OLAP Cube Editor. © 2007 MicroStrategy.1. Starting in MicroStrategy 8. Inc. You can access the OLAP Cube Editor by right-clicking an imported OLAP cube and selecting Edit. OLAP cube data that is mapped to MicroStrategy metrics is automatically converted to a numeric data type and thus does not need its column data type to be manually set. You can do this same mapping for another OLAP cube and create reports including the Product attribute. The ID attribute form for Product is returned as a string. To manually set column data types for OLAP cube data You manually set column data types for OLAP cube data when you are mapping OLAP cube data to MicroStrategy objects. The following procedure uses the OLAP Cube Catalog. You can perform this task during the initial import and mapping procedure for an OLAP cube with the OLAP Cube Catalog.

7 Right-click the OLAP cube column data and select Data Type.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide 1 Log in to a project that is connected to an OLAP cube source. page 340 2 From the Schema menu. select the OLAP cube source database instance you want to connect to and click OK. • • If the project connects to only one OLAP cube source. select the OLAP cube you want to map to MicroStrategy objects. page 334 Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers. From the Select the Database Instance drop-down list. . 8 Clear the Use default from source check box. page 327 Connecting to Essbase servers. The Cube Mapping tab opens. The OLAP Cube Catalog: Cube Selection tab opens. 354 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. 4 Select the Cube Mapping tab. select OLAP Cube Catalog. page 337 Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers. 6 In the Physical view column. Inc. The Column Editor — Definition dialog box opens. 3 Move all OLAP cubes you want to import from the Available Cubes pane to the Selected Cubes pane by using the > button. the OLAP Cube Catalog: Cube Selection tab opens. expand the OLAP cube data until you find the OLAP cube column data for which to manually set the data type. The OLAP cube data is displayed in the pane below. 5 From the Catalog\Cube drop-down list. If the project connects to more than one OLAP cube source the Database Instance dialog box opens. see one of the following sections depending on your OLAP cube source: • • • • Connecting to SAP BW servers. For information on connecting to an OLAP cube source.

Unbalanced and ragged hierarchies include at least one branch that does not descend to the lowest level and one branch that includes a skipped level. Unbalanced hierarchies have at least one branch that does not descend to the lowest level. unbalanced. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 355 . and Item each branch would descend to a particular item. specify the byte length. 11 Click OK to save your changes and return to the OLAP Cube Catalog. • Balanced hierarchies have an equal number of levels in each branch of the hierarchy. select which data type to map the OLAP cube data as. precision. However. and Item are displayed on the report there is an empty cell for the Subcategory of Item number 22. and Month one branch might only have data down to the Quarter level. Ragged hierarchies have at least one branch that includes a member whose logical parent is not the level above that member. if you know that the structure of a hierarchy is unbalanced or ragged you must set the hierarchy’s properties to reflect its structure. The terms balanced. For example. a Product hierarchy may contain the levels Category. Quarter. in a Product hierarchy that includes Category. For example. and Item but Item number 22 does not have a Subcategory associated with it. When Category. Inc. 10 Depending on the data type selected. Unbalanced and ragged hierarchies By default. and scale for the data type. in a Time hierarchy that includes Year. all hierarchies of an OLAP cube are treated as balanced hierarchies. 12 Click Save and Close to save your changes to the OLAP cube and exit the OLAP Cube Catalog.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B 9 From the Data type drop-down list. Subcategory. Subcategory. and ragged are used to describe the different set of characteristics of hierarchical sets of data. • • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. Subcategory. For example.

2 On the Hierarchies tab. Date form support for MDX properties You can support mapping MicroStrategy date forms to MDX property data of the date data type by performing a special modification of a VLDB property. For information on how to support these date forms and qualifications. For detailed steps on mapping and remapping objects from OLAP cube sources to MicroStrategy objects. select the check box This hierarchy is unbalanced or ragged and then click OK.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide The steps below are necessary for any unbalanced or ragged hierarchy to prevent inaccurate results when applying certain types of filters. metrics. refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop online help (search for the “Mapping OLAP cubes” topic). This modification also allows you to perform date qualifications on the mapped MDX property data. Why do you need to remap OLAP cubes? Although you can use the automatically generated managed object attributes. please refer to MicroStrategy Tech Note TN1100-000-0636. The Properties dialog box is displayed. Set a hierarchy as unbalanced or ragged 1 In the OLAP Cube Catalog. and hierarchies you may want to remap OLAP cube data to existing attributes in the MicroStrategy project for the following reasons: 356 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. right-click the hierarchy name in the Physical View column and select Properties. A hierarchy in the Physical View column is represented with a green stacked boxes symbol. The word “(Unbalanced)” will be displayed next to the name of the hierarchy in the Logical View column. .

Inc. MicroStrategy security filters can be applied to attributes in OLAP cube reports. it is recommended that you do the remapping initially so that subsequent users can take advantage of the mapping. Remapping simply replaces the managed object attributes that are used to represent the OLAP cube’s structure with attributes in an existing MicroStrategy project. This also prevents maintenance issues because reports need to be modified if an OLAP cube is remapped after the report is created. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 357 . if an OLAP cube report and a standard report both use the Year attribute. but the nature of the cube is not changed.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B • Report designers can integrate the logical model of the project with the data in the imported OLAP cube. However. you can map an OLAP cube level to the Year attribute in your project. • • • You can remap the levels of an OLAP cube. the security filter on Year is applied. For example. thus creating a relation between the two sets of data. they can be remapped to project attributes that participate in the ROLAP schema. metrics and hierarchies can only be remapped to other managed object metrics and hierarchies that are mapped to OLAP cube source data. Administrators can search for dependents and manage access control lists (ACLs) for attributes that map both to the data warehouse and an OLAP cube source. © 2007 MicroStrategy. If a user with a security filter on Year runs the OLAP cube report that contains Year. then Year can be used to group the data within a document. For example. Data can be joined across sources within a Report Services document. three OLAP cubes can share the same managed object metric named Revenue. When should you remap cubes? Although you can remap the columns either when an OLAP cube is first imported or later on after you have created a project. For example. In the case of attributes.

The one on the left exists in a specific OLAP cube. C u b e A ttr ib u te s C u s to m e r R e g io n P r o je c t A ttr ib u te s R e g io n Ye a r C u b e Ye a r Q u a r te r M onth of Ye a r C u s to m e r S ta te C u b e Q u a r te r C a ll C e n te r M onth C ube M o nth C u s to m e r C ity E m p lo ye e Da y Example 2: Partially mapped cube After an OLAP cube source has been included in MicroStrategy as an OLAP cube. and Month. shown in the diagram below. The difference between the two examples is that the OLAP cube has been partially remapped so that it shares the attributes Year. also shows two logical models. Although both models have a Time hierarchy. Quarter.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide Example 1: Unmapped cube You can map managed object attributes for your OLAP cubes instead of using project attributes. Example 2. This feature allows you to quickly start creating reports for your OLAP cube data. The drawback with this setup is that you cannot create a relation between your OLAP cube data and your project data. . The diagram below shows two logical models. Inc. you can map the attributes within the OLAP cube to existing project attributes. Since this relation is not created. none of the individual attributes are shared. and Month information for both your 358 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. and the one on the right exists in a MicroStrategy project. With this technique. you can create a Report Services document that contains Year. Quarter. you cannot join data from these different sources in a Report Services document and you cannot support project security filters in OLAP cube reports.

Inc. these metrics cannot be directly integrated with data from a separate relational data source. see the Designing Documents chapter of the MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide. Metrics created with MDX combine the robust set of MDX functions and expressions with MicroStrategy analytical tools such as prompts. that change applies to all the OLAP cubes that share that dimension. any security filters for Year. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 359 . except by using calculated expressions in Report Services documents. Metrics created to map to your OLAP cube data are related only to their associated OLAP cube. © 2007 MicroStrategy. In this case. and Month are applied to OLAP cube reports that include these mapped attributes. Quarter. Therefore. For information on creating calculated expressions. changes to the Time dimension apply to OLAP cubes in the project that contain this dimension. Creating metrics from OLAP cube data with MDX and compound metric techniques When you map your OLAP cube data into MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B data warehouse and OLAP cube sources. Cu b e A ttrib u te s C usto m e r R e gio n Proje c t A ttrib u te s R e gio n Ye a r Ye a r Q ua rte r M o nt h o f Ye a r C usto m e r S ta te Q ua rte r C a ll C e nte r M o nt h M o nt h C usto m e r C ity Em plo ye e Da y The dimensions of OLAP cubes are always shared. you can take advantage of MDX (MultiDimensional eXpressions) to create advanced metrics. Therefore. In addition. when a level is remapped. You can also use basic arithmetic expressions to create these advanced metrics from OLAP cube data.

where Revenue and Total Expenses are both metrics. such as Discount * 1. see the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. • MDX customization: Rather than relying only on MicroStrategy to create MDX to return data from your OLAP cube source. . You can reference one or more MicroStrategy metrics mapped to OLAP cube data using custom MDX just as you can with a standard arithmetic expression. Inc. To use MDX to create your calculated measures you must enclose MDX in double quotes (“”). and so on). For tips and insights on how to build analysis with MDX in MicroStrategy. to build a Profit metric. The expression can be as simple as a metric multiplied by a constant value. you can create your own custom MDX to return data for a metric. 360 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy.*. You can also use prompts in these compound and custom MDX metrics (see Using prompts within OLAP cube metrics. see How to build analysis into metrics with custom MDX.5. The metrics created in this way for an OLAP cube are stored in a Compound Metrics folder within the Metrics folder for the OLAP cube. Once you create metrics using these techniques you can include them in your MicroStrategy reports and report filters in the same ways that you can include any MicroStrategy metric. These metrics can also reference multiple MicroStrategy metrics within the OLAP cube with an expression such as Revenue .Total Expenses. where Discount is a metric mapped to data in the OLAP cube. You can use MicroStrategy analytical and aggregation functions with metrics mapped to OLAP cube data only if the metric you create is defined as a smart metric. page 363.-. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide You can create metrics that map to OLAP cube data using either of the following techniques: • Compound metrics: A compound metric is any MicroStrategy metric with an expression that includes a MicroStrategy metric and an arithmetic expression./. For examples of smart metrics. The MDX you create is passed to your OLAP cube source to be executed and to return the data. For general information on smart metrics. This technique allows you to use MDX functions and flexibility to query and report on your OLAP cube data. If you do not make the metric a smart metric you can only use basic operators (+. page 366).

To create a metric from OLAP cube data with MDX and compound metric techniques 1 Log in to a project that is connected to an OLAP cube source. Inc. 4 Select the Cube Mapping tab. From the Select the Database Instance drop-down list.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B You can create these metrics during the initial importing and mapping procedure of your OLAP cube data with the OLAP Cube Catalog. depending on your OLAP cube source: • • • • Connecting to SAP BW servers. select OLAP Cube Catalog. The OLAP Cube Catalog: Cube Selection tab opens. These metrics can also be created as a later modification to an OLAP cube with the OLAP Cube Editor. For information on connecting to an OLAP cube source. 3 Move all the OLAP cubes to import from the Available Cubes pane to the Selected Cubes pane by using the > button. starting with the step to access the Edit menu. If the project connects to more than one OLAP cube source the Database Instance dialog box opens. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 361 . page 337 Connecting to Analysis Services 2005 servers. © 2007 MicroStrategy. page 327 Connecting to Essbase servers. page 334 Connecting to Analysis Services 2000 servers. The following procedure uses the OLAP Cube Catalog. the steps below apply for the OLAP Cube Editor. After right-clicking an OLAP cube and selecting Edit to access the OLAP Cube Editor. select the OLAP cube source database instance to connect to and click OK. page 340 2 From the Schema menu. • • If the project connects to only one OLAP cube source. see one of the following sections. the OLAP Cube Catalog: Cube Selection tab opens.

For example.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide 5 From the Catalog\Cube drop-down list.5” You cannot validate MDX in the Metric Editor as you can for a standard expression that is not enclosed by double quotes. Make sure to enclose the entire expression in double quotes. You can use MicroStrategy analytical and aggregation functions with metrics mapped to OLAP cube data only if the metric you create is defined as a smart metric.Cost to create a Profit metric. enter your custom MDX in the Definition pane of the Metric Editor.[Discount Amount] * 1. Validating MDX verifies that the entire expression is enclosed in double quotes. Inc. it does not validate the syntax of the expression. 7 Create the expression for your metric: • If you are creating a compound metric. while also including any required constants. 9 In the Object name text field. page 366. you can enter the following: “[Measures]. arithmetic operators. 362 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. The OLAP cube data is displayed in the pane below. you can simply drag and drop metrics from the OLAP cube’s Metrics folder. For an example of creating a metric that includes a prompt. select the OLAP cube to map to MicroStrategy objects. see Using prompts within OLAP cube metrics. . 10 Click Save to save your metric. The Save As dialog box opens. For example. The Metric Editor opens. select Add New Compound Metric. if you have Revenue and Cost metrics in your OLAP cube you can create the expression Revenue . enter a name for your metric. and MicroStrategy analytical and aggregation functions. 6 From the Edit menu. 8 Click Save and Close. • If you are creating a metric using custom MDX.

1. TN5200-81x-2342—How to write a custom metric formula in MDX to ignore grouping on a cube dimension in MicroStrategy 8. To use MDX to create your metrics you must enclose MDX in double quotes (“”).x TN5200-81x-2343—How to write a custom metric formula in MDX to filter on an attribute in MicroStrategy 8.[Total Sales]” is valid syntax for a metric defined with MDX. “[Measures]. For example.1.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B 11 Click Save and Close to save your changes to the OLAP cube. Inc. For additional best practices and examples.1.x TN5200-81x-2344—How to write a custom metric formula in MDX to implement a transformation in MicroStrategy 8. refer to the following MicroStrategy Tech Notes: • • TN5200-81x-2345—How to create customized metric expressions for OLAP cube sources in MicroStrategy 8. • • Basics Creating your own custom MDX allows you to draw further analysis from your OLAP cube source into MicroStrategy.x Creating such analysis requires appropriate knowledge of both MDX and MicroStrategy. How to build analysis into metrics with custom MDX You can build sophisticated analysis into your OLAP cube metrics by creating your own custom MDX. This allows you to further combine the analysis capabilities of MDX and MicroStrategy. only basic principles of analysis with the use of MDX and MicroStrategy is provided.1. This section provides some tips and best practices on how to build analysis into metrics with custom MDX. Be aware that MicroStrategy does not validate any custom MDX created by users to build metrics for OLAP cubes. MDX syntax and functionality is not described in depth in this section.x. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 363 .

A conditional metric allows you to apply a filter to only one metric on a report while not affecting the other metrics. along with viewing your total revenue on a report. Conditional metrics Using MDX.CurrentMember). You can also perform basic arithmetic in your MDX. [Measures].[Total Sales] * . the function is passed to the OLAP cube source and processed as a pass-through function. as shown in the report below.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide The expression shown above is a simple expression that returns the Total Sales data from an OLAP cube. For example.06” Along with these simple expressions. you can create conditional metrics in MicroStrategy from your OLAP cube data. as shown below: “sum(YTD([Quarter]. Inc. you can use the MDX year-to-date (YTD) function to create transformation-style analysis on your OLAP cube data. For example. When you include an MDX function in your custom MDX. . you can also utilize MDX functions to create more advanced analysis. the following expression applies a multiplier to the Total Sales data: “[Measures]. you can also display revenue for a certain category such as electronics.[Profit])” This expression returns year-to-date values by quarter for profit data. For example. In 364 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Report designers can include these metrics on reports to view multiple perspectives of data on the same report.

[2006])” Prompts All of the MDX examples in the sections above are static expressions.[Category]. © 2007 MicroStrategy.[Year]. Using the ApplySimple function. You can include more than one condition for each metric. The example below shows the basic structure of an ApplySimple statement to create metrics with custom MDX. The values that identify data depend on how you have defined data in your OLAP cube source.[Category].[2])” In the example above. a second condition on the year is included by adding another comma and conditional expression: “([Measures].[Revenue].Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B the example expression below. you can create the same metric to return electronics revenue for only the year 2006. Prompts are objects in MicroStrategy that provide users the ability to dynamically select what data is returned to their report to analyze. In the example expression below. Inc. The report shown below uses this metric to compare total revenue with electronics revenue. For example. meaning they will produce the same MDX every time. bold highlights the part of the expression (including the comma) that applies the condition to the revenue data: “([Measures].[Revenue]. 2 identifies the electronics category. you can include prompts in your MDX to provide dynamic analysis on your OLAP cube data. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 365 .[2].

the prompts are displayed to the user for completion.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide ApplySimple(“MDX expression with placeholders for objects”.objectN) A simple application of this technique is to use a constant value prompt in your project as a multiplier of metric data as shown below. When the metrics are included on a report and the report is run.. you can also include MicroStrategy prompts with the metrics.[Revenue].object0. To provide this analysis to users. page 364. allowing users to determine the data to see on the report.?valueprompt) In the example syntax above. For example. Inc.. ApplySimple(“([Measures]. you can include an element list prompt on the Category attribute of the OLAP cube as shown below. ApplySimple(“([Measures]. For metrics created using MDX expressions. The syntax for including a prompt as an object to replace a placeholder is ?promptname.[Total Sales] / #0)” . #0 is a placeholder in the MDX expression for the value prompt. you must use the ApplySimple function to 366 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. Using prompts within OLAP cube metrics If you are creating new metrics in your OLAP cube. For metrics created with compound metric techniques without any custom MDX.. .object1. see the Using prompts within OLAP cube metrics section below. you can simply include a prompt in the metric definition.. you can allow users to choose what category to view revenue for. rather than always returning the revenue data for electronics. You can also use this technique with the conditional metrics techniques described in Conditional metrics. This adds flexibility to your queries.#0)”. ?elementlistprompt) For more information on and a procedure for creating metrics in OLAP cubes with prompts.

Make sure to enclose the entire expression in double quotes.#0)”. • ApplySimple(“([Measures]. © 2007 MicroStrategy. you can enter expressions similar to the following: • ([Discount Amount] * ?constantprompt) This expression applies a special discount amount. page 361) until the step to create an expression for the metric. In this example it is assumed that CategoryElementPrompt is the name of an element list prompt in the project that references a Category attribute within the OLAP cube. For example. ?CategoryElementPrompt) This expression creates a Revenue metric. which is conditional on an element list prompt answered by the user running the report. Users can then choose to view revenue data for different categories such as Books or Music. 2 Enter your expression in the Definition pane of the Metric Editor. Inc.Project Design Guide Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources B include prompts in the metric definition. The Save As dialog box opens. In this example it is assumed that constantprompt is the name of a value prompt in the project and Discount Amount is a metric within the OLAP cube. Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy 367 . The following types of prompts can be included with metrics built from custom expressions: • • • Element list prompts defined on an attribute of the associated OLAP cube Value prompts Object prompts defined on objects of the associated OLAP cube To use prompts within OLAP cube metrics 1 Follow the steps in the procedure above (To create a metric from OLAP cube data with MDX and compound metric techniques. 3 Click Save and Close. entered by the user running the report.[Revenue].

you need to also delete those reports or remove the Profit metric from the reports before you can remove the Profit metric from the OLAP cube. enter a name for your metric. Inc. and the Profit Margin metric is returned. you must first remove the Profit Margin metric. Removing compound metrics from OLAP cubes When you remove metrics based on multiple metrics of an OLAP cube. Once this metric is created in your OLAP cube. dependencies may need to be resolved before you can remove the metric. If the Profit metric is included on any reports. and you can then remove the metric from the OLAP cube. This makes the Profit Margin metric dependent on the Profit metric. a list of reports that depend on the metric is also returned. You then create a new compound metric named Profit within the OLAP cube by subtracting the OLAP cube’s cost data from its revenue data. For example. If a compound metric of an OLAP cube has been added to any reports. a search for dependent objects is automatically triggered. a list of metrics that are dependent on the metric you are removing is returned. and its data is automatically mapped to MicroStrategy metrics. To remove the Profit metric. 6 Click Save and Close to save your changes to the OLAP cube and exit the OLAP Cube Catalog. You must remove all of the metrics and reports which depend on the metric you are trying to remove. you create a Profit Margin metric that uses the Profit metric you just created. If you try to remove the Profit metric. you import an OLAP cube. 5 Click Save to save your metric and return to the OLAP Cube Catalog.B Connecting to OLAP Cube Sources Project Design Guide 4 In the Object name text field. This removes the dependency between the metric and the report. . 368 Integrating OLAP cubes into MicroStrategy © 2007 MicroStrategy. When you try to remove a metric with dependent metrics. You can remove the compound metric from the report rather than deleting the report. Then you can remove the metric.

369 . While logical tables are set up in a project by using the Warehouse Catalog. Inc.C C. There are three types of logical tables in the MicroStrategy environment: logical tables. with a focus on how you can use the logical view feature to take advantage of the enhanced schema support in MicroStrategy. which point to physical tables in the data warehouse. table aliases. LOGICAL TABLES Introduction Logical tables represent tables in the data warehouse. logical views are created using the Table Editor. logical views are defined using SQL queries against the data warehouse. and logical views. This chapter introduces you to the different types of logical tables. Different from the logical tables. © 2007 MicroStrategy.

logical tables and all the other schema objects are stored in the Schema Objects folder. One physical table can have more than one table aliases. These physical tables are referenced in the SQL that is generated for the report. logical tables in the MicroStrategy schema consist of attributes and facts. Once created. based on which attributes. It does not point directly to a physical table and is defined using a SQL query against the warehouse. Inc. you can define your logical view using the SQL statement as well as view the content of all the logical tables and their associated warehouse tables. the logical view can be used in the same way as the Type 1 logical table. . Using the Logical Table Editor. using the Warehouse Catalog.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide Logical tables Logical tables are MicroStrategy objects that form the foundation of a schema. the whole SQL query is displayed in the place of physical tables as for Type 1 logical tables. Logical views are created using the Table Editor. and other schema objects can be defined. 3 Logical view: is a logical table that points to a SQL statement instead of directly to a physical table. 2 Table alias: is an additional logical table that points directly to an existing physical table. facts. These attributes and facts are part of the report definition that the MicroStrategy Engine refers to when a report is executed. The logical view is also referenced in the SQL that is generated for the report. 370 Logical tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. While physical tables in a data warehouse consist of columns. A logical table is created for each physical table that is imported into a project. In the MicroStrategy Tutorial. There are three types of logical tables: 1 Logical table: is a logical representation of a table that the Engine uses to generate SQL. page 175). A table alias is created outside of the Warehouse Catalog. A table alias can have a different name from the physical table. Table aliasing is used to create attribute roles (see Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles. This type of logical table maps directly to physical tables in the data warehouse.

then define the new attributes using the appropriate tables. Logical views are a little different from the above-mentioned logical tables and table aliases for the following reasons: • • • Logical views do not map directly to physical tables in the data warehouse. please refer to the MicroStrategy online help (search for “Step-by-step instructions to create a table alias”). One way to do this is to create explicit table aliases. you can create MicroStrategy schema objects. you need to create an attribute in the logical model for each of the roles. For more information on how to use the Warehouse Catalog. instead of being imported from a data warehouse or duplicated from existing logical tables. How should I use logical tables? 371 . you can create a table alias to resolve the double usage case. For step-by-step instructions. Inc. For detailed information on attribute roles. if the Customer table is used to represent both Ship to Customer and Bill to Customer.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C How should I use logical tables? The most common logical tables are the ones that are imported into the project from the data warehouse using the Warehouse Catalog. please refer to the MicroStrategy online help (search for “Warehouse Catalog”). which is accessed from the Schema menu. Logical views are defined using SQL queries. To create a table alias. Logical views are created from scratch. For example. First. create a table alias by copying an existing logical table and giving it a new or different name. such as attributes and facts. page 175. When an attribute plays more than one role. Basically. right-click the logical table name and select Create Table Alias. © 2007 MicroStrategy. you create multiple logical tables pointing to the same physical table and define those logical tables as the lookup tables for the attributes in different roles. please refer to Attributes that use the same lookup table: Attribute roles. Based on these tables.

Inc. please refer to Logical view examples. This means that you can use the logical views to build attributes and facts and that you can also create table aliases for the logical views. page 376. The Update Schema option can be accessed from the Schema menu. . once logical views are created. table aliases. or logical views to the project. The biggest benefit of using logical views is that you can model a MicroStrategy schema that cannot be supported with only the physical database structures in the warehouse.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide However. There are many common modeling scenarios that are easier to manage with the use of logical views. Whenever you create or add logical tables. you need to update the schema. 372 How should I use logical tables? © 2007 MicroStrategy. they can be used in the same way as the regular logical tables (brought into the project using the Warehouse Catalog). such as the following: • • • • Slowly-changing dimensions Attribute form expressions from multiple tables Consolidated dimension tables Recursive hierarchies For common usage examples.

The SQL statement panel is where you type in your SQL query. Any physical table in the project database instance can be used in the SELECT statement. One way to access the Table Editor is to select New from the File menu and choose Logical Table. Creating a Logical View involves a few simple steps that require you to provide your own SQL statement and map the columns in the statement to the correct data types (see the following information). on the other hand. Detailed instructions on how to create them are provided in the online help (search for “Tables”). Creating logical tables 373 . Logical views. while the Mapping panel is where you map for the columns returned by the SQL query. are created in MicroStrategy Desktop using the Table Editor. Object Browser lists all tables and columns that have been imported into the project. Inc. For detailed instructions. and table aliases are created by duplicating existing logical tables. © 2007 MicroStrategy. As illustrated in the following image.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C Creating logical tables Most logical tables are brought into the project by using the Warehouse Catalog. please refer to the online help (search for “Creating logical views”).

Although common table expressions (CTEs) are also supported for some databases. 374 Creating logical tables © 2007 MicroStrategy. you can also drag and drop columns from the Object Browser to the Column Object cell. If you used an existing column in the mapping in Step 5. 5 Select a Data Type for the column by using the drop-down list. Inc. you map an existing column to the logical view. 4 Type in the column name under Column Object. these expressions cannot be nested in the SQL because this would result in invalid SQL syntax. You can drag and drop columns from the Object Browser to insert into the statement). The Table Editor is displayed with the Physical View tab selected by default. Please check your database for best usage. the order of the columns does not have to match the order in which the column aliases appear in the SQL statement. the change will affect all the tables with that column. you inherited the data type of that column. select New and then Logical Table. However. 3 Click Add to map columns returned by the SQL statement. . The names of the columns must match exactly the column aliases defined in the SQL statement. type in your SQL statement. By doing this.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide To create a logical table in the Table Editor 1 From the File menu. This creates a new column. It is recommended that you use derived tables to define logical views because the logical view SQL syntax becomes nested inside SQL statements generated by the Engine. 2 In the SQL Statement panel. Alternatively. Keep in mind that if you change the data type.

7 Save and close the logical table. For a logical view—which maps to a SQL statement—the Engine inserts the SQL syntax in the FROM clause. if applicable. however. Because the MicroStrategy Engine does not parse through the SQL syntax. 8 From the Schema menu. the statistics log does not contain any information about the actual physical tables accessed. It is your responsibility to ensure the accuracy and validity of your SQL statements. Using SQL for logical views Since SQL queries are the key to creating logical views. you should be experienced with using SQL before you use the logical view feature. Therefore. are not nested in the SQL because this would result in invalid SQL syntax. make sure that your RDBMS is optimized to answer the query that you create. the logical view is logged instead. For best usage. The Engine generates derived table syntax to represent the logical view. CTEs. Creating logical tables 375 . When the Engine needs to use a logical table that maps directly to a physical database table. Derived tables are advantageous because they are nested in the SQL generated by the Engine. © 2007 MicroStrategy. In addition. it inserts the name of the table into the FROM clause. in which case table objects accessed would are not logged either. It is recommended that you use derived tables to define logical views. In the SQL generated for a report. Inc. please check your database.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C 6 Modify the Precision and Scale of the column. select Update Schema to ensure that the new logical table is loaded into the project. logical views are generated as either a derived table or a common table expression (CTE) depending on the type of database that you use. although CTEs are also supported by some databases. The same holds true if you use a view in the database. you should also understand that the SQL query entered for logical views is not modified in any way by MicroStrategy.

Market. • Too many rows in the dimension table may slow down the SELECT DISTINCT query. If there is no distinct list of attribute elements. While it is possible to model a schema with such a dimension table. The following is an example lookup table for Store. Business case 1: Distinct attribute lookup table Many star schemas feature a single lookup table that is shared by all the attributes in one dimension (see the following example). This restriction applies to summary tables as well as to intermediate results that may be generated by the SQL Engine. for example. thus affecting element browsing requests that display a list of attribute elements. Usually. the logical view simply appears as additional syntax in the report SQL generated by MicroStrategy. you may double count if you have to join to a table where that attribute is part of the key. often two problems arise: • The model cannot support fact tables at the level of attributes that are not keys.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide The results of logical views are not cached. Inc. the MicroStrategy Engine joins the fact table with one lookup table and does the aggregation. . Lookup_store Store_ID Store_Name Market_ID Market_Name Region_ID Region_Name Level 376 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy. when populating pick lists for prompts. Logical view examples The following business cases are intended to help you understand how you can use the logical view feature in your applications. and Region. in one-SQL-pass reports.

you want to define an attribute based on the Date difference between two Date columns (Ship_Date and Order_Date) in two different tables as follows. Usually.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C In this table. Market and Region are not the keys. you can use the Logical View feature to define another logical table Lookup_Market as follows: Select Market_ID. a11.a11. Therefore.Market_ID Group by a11. the case is on Date columns. Market_Name.Region_ID from Lookup_Store where level=1) a11.Sales) From (select Market_ID. SUM(a12. When it is joined with a Market-level fact table (Market_Sales). F_Table1 Ship_Date Order_ID Fact1 © 2007 MicroStrategy.Market_Desc. Market_Name.Region_ID From Lookup_store Where level=1 Then use this table as the lookup table for Market. For example.Market_ID. a direct join between the fact table and the above lookup table may result in double-counting. Inc. Market_Sales a12 Where a11.Market_ID. the following report SQL is generated: Select a11. To avoid that.Market_Name Business case 2: Attribute form expression across multiple tables Customers often request the ability to generate an attribute form expression across multiple tables. if the requested fact table is at the Market or Region level. Logical view examples 377 .Market_ID = a12.

“Slowly” typically means after several months or even years. Indeed. a company may annually reorganize their sales organization or recast their product hierarchy for each retail season. it may be better to model separate dimensions. Ralph Kimball has been particularly influential in describing dimensional modeling techniques for SCDs (see The Data Warehouse Toolkit. Usually. Inc. For example.Order_ID The new logical table (logical view) looks like the following table.Fact2 From F_table1.Order_ID=F_table2. For example. if dimensional relationships change more frequently. you can use the following SQL query to create a logical table to calculate the Date difference and then define the attribute on that new column: Select Ship_Date-Order_Date Cycle_time.Order_ID. and a new attribute can be defined on the Cycle_Time column. F_table1. .C Logical Tables Project Design Guide F_Table2 Order_Date Order_ID Fact2 Using the Logical View feature. SCDs are well documented in the data warehousing literature. dimensional hierarchies are presented as independent of time. a Type I SCD 378 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy. Logical view Cycle_Time Order_ID Fact1 Fact2 Business case 3: Slowly changing dimensions Slowly changing dimensions (SCDs) are a common characteristic in many business intelligence environments. F_table2 Where F_table1. Fact1. Kimball has further coined different distinctions among ways to handle SCDs in a dimensional model. for instance).

Inc. For information on compound keys. and Kelly moved from District 38 to 39 on 7/1/2004. as-was analysis One of the capabilities available with slowly changing dimensions is the ability to perform either “as-is” analysis or “as-was” analysis: • “As-is” analysis presents a current view of the slowly changing relationships. show me sales by District according to the way Districts were organized at the time the sales transactions occurred. page 43. for example.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C presents only the current view of a dimensional relationship. Example 1: Compound key with Effective Date and End Date One way to physically store an SCD is to employ Effective Date and End Date columns that capture the period of time during which each element relationship existed. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Logical view examples 379 . show me sales by District according to the way Districts are organized today. The discussion below is based on an example sales organization that changes slowly in time as the territories are reorganized. please refer to Lookup tables: Attribute storage. As-is vs. a Type II SCD preserves the history of a dimensional relationship. For example. “As-was” analysis presents a historical view of the slowly changing relationships. In the example below. • The techniques described here provide the flexibility to perform either type of analysis. For example. sales representatives switch districts in time. and so forth. They also provide you an easy way to specify which type of analysis you would like to perform. Sales Rep Jones moved from District 37 to District 39 on 1/1/2004.

such as a transaction date. the fact table must include a date field.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide LU_SALES_REP Sales_Rep_ID 1 2 3 4 1 3 Sales_Rep_Name Jones Smith Kelly Madison Jones Kelly District_ID 37 37 38 38 39 39 Eff_Dt 1/1/1900 1/1/1900 1/1/1900 1/1/1900 1/1/2004 7/1/2004 End_Dt 12/31/2003 12/31/2099 6/30/2004 12/31/2099 12/31/2099 12/31/2099 When using this type of dimensional lookup table. Inc. LVW_CURRENT_ORG 380 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy. . FACT_TABLE Sales_Rep_ID 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 4 Trans_Dt 9/1/2003 9/10/2003 9/15/2003 3/1/2004 3/10/2004 3/15/2004 9/5/2004 9/15/2004 9/20/2004 Sales 100 200 150 200 250 300 125 275 150 To specify the MicroStrategy schema 1 Create a logical view to represent just the current District-Sales Rep relationships.

Trans_Dt. @Desc = sales_rep_name – Tables: LU_SALES_REP (lookup). Trans_Dt 3 Create a table alias LU_CURRENT_DISTRICT for LU_DISTRICT. The resulting view is an “as-was” or historical view. LVW_HIST_DISTRICT_SALES select District_ID. Logical view examples 381 .Project Design Guide Logical Tables C select Sales_Rep_ID. @Desc = district_name – Tables: LU_CURRENT_DISTRICT (lookup). FACT_TABLE • Current District: – @ID = district_id. 4 Define the following attributes: • Sales Rep: – @ID = sales_rep_id. Inc.End_Dt group by District_ID. which captures the Sales Rep-District relationships that existed at the time the transactions occurred. District_ID from LU_SALES_REP where End_Dt = '12/31/2099' 2 Create another logical view that performs the “as-was” join between the lookup table and fact table. sum(sales) sales from LU_SALES_REP L join FACT_TABLE F on(L. @Desc = district_name © 2007 MicroStrategy.Eff_Dt and L.Trans_Dt between L. resulting in a fact view at the District level.Sales_Rep_ID) where F. LVW_CURRENT_ORG. LVW_CURRENT_ORG – Child: Sales Rep • Historical District: – @ID = district_id.Sales_Rep_ID = F.

LU_SALES_REP. . Inc. trans_dt – Tables: LU_TIME (lookup) . LVW_HIST_DISTRICT_SALES 6 Define the metric as required: • Sales: SUM(sales) The result of this is a logical schema that looks like the following: LU_CURRENT_DISTRICT LU_CURRENT_ORG LU_SALES_REP FACT_TABLE Current District Sales Rep Current District Sales Rep Historical District Sales Rep Date Sales LU_TIME Date LVW_HISTORICAL_ DISTRICT_SALES Month Historical District Date Sales 382 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy. LVW_HIST_DISTRICT_SALES • Month: – @ID = MONTH_ID – Tables: LU_TIME (lookup) 5 Define the Sales fact: • • Expression: sales Tables: FACT_TABLE. FACT_TABLE. LVW_HIST_DISTRICT_SALES – Child: Sales Rep • Date: – @ID = date_id.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide – Tables: LU_DISTRICT (lookup).

sum(sales) sales from LU_SALES_REP L join FACT_TABLE F on (L.Month_ID • Report results As-is analysis Specify the “as-is” analysis by using the Current District attribute on reports: • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. a12. Month. Trans_dt) a11 join LU_TIME a12 on (a11.SALES) WJXBFS1 From (select District_ID.District_ID) group by a11. sum(a11.Sales_rep_ID) where F. max(a13.END_DT group by District_ID.Trans_dt = a12. Sales Resulting SQL Select a11.EFF_DT and L.Date_ID) join LU_DISTRICT a13 on (a11.trans_dt between L.District_ID District_ID.Sales_rep_ID = F. a12.Month_ID Month_ID. Report definition: Current District.Distrcit_ID. Sales Resulting SQL Logical view examples 383 .District_Name) District_Name.District_ID =a13. Inc.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C As-was analysis Specify the “as-was” analysis by using the Historical District attribute on reports: • • Report definition: Historical District. Month. Trans_dt.

max (a14.SALES) WJXBFS1 from FACT_TABLE a11 join (select Sales_rep_ID.Sales_Rep_ID = a12.District_ID) group by a12. Another common characteristic is to include an indicator field that identifies the current relationship records.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide select a12.District_ID District_ID. Inc.Month_ID Month_ID. a13.District_ID.Month_ID • Report result Example 2: New surrogate key for each changing element A more flexible way to physically store a SCD is to employ surrogate keys and introduce new rows in the dimension table whenever a dimensional relationship changes. . District_ID from LU_SALES_REP where END_DT = '12/31/2099')a12 on (a11.Sales_Rep_ID) join LU_TIME a13 on (a11. LU_SALES_REP Sales_Rep_CD 1 2 3 Sales_Rep_ID 1 2 3 Sales_Rep_Name Jones Smith Kelly District_ID 37 37 38 Current_Flag 0 1 0 384 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy.District_ID = a14.Trans_dt = a13.Date_ID) join LU_DISTRICT a14 on (a12.District_Name) District_Name. An example set of records is shown below. sum(a11. a13.

FACT_TABLE Sale-Rep_CD 1 2 3 5 2 3 2 6 4 Sale 100 200 150 200 250 300 125 275 150 Specifying the MicroStrategy schema 1 Create a logical view to represent just the current District-Sales Rep relationship. Inc. A transaction date field may or may not exist.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C Sales_Rep_CD 4 5 6 Sales_Rep_ID 4 1 3 Sales_Rep_Name Madison Jones Kelly District_ID 38 39 39 Current_Flag 1 1 1 When using this type of dimensional lookup table. the fact table must also include the surrogate key. LVW_CURRENT_ORG select Sales_rep_ID. Logical view examples 385 . © 2007 MicroStrategy. District_ID from LU_SALES_REP where Current_flag = 1 2 Create a table alias LU_CURRENT_DISTRICT for LU_DISTRICT.

.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide 3 Define the following attributes: • Sales Rep Surrogate: – @ID = sales_rep_cd – Tables: LU_SALES_REP (lookup). @Desc = district_name – Tables: LU_CURRENT_DISTRICT (lookup). @Desc = district_name – Tables: LU_DISTRICT (lookup). LU_SALES_REP – Child: Sales Rep • Date: – @ID = date_id. LVW_CURRENT_ORG – Child: Sales Rep • Historical District: – @ID = district_id. Inc. trans_dt – Tables: LU_TIME (lookup). @Desc = sales_rep_name – Tables: LU_SALES_REP (lookup). LVW_CURRENT_ORG – Child: Sales Rep Surrogate • Current District: – @ID = district_id. FACT_TABLE • Sales Rep: – @ID = sales_rep_id. FACT_TABLE • Month: – @ID = MONTH_ID – Tables: LU_TIME (lookup) – Child: Date 4 Define the Sales fact: • Expression: sales 386 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Month.Date_ID) join LU_DISTRICT a14 on (a12.District_ID = © 2007 MicroStrategy. max(a14.Sales_Rep_CD) join LU_TIME a13 on (a11. Sales Resulting SQL select a12.Distrcit_Name) Distrcit_Name.District_ID District_ID. Inc. Logical view examples 387 .Sales_Rep_CD = a12.Month_ID Month_ID.SALES) WJXBFS1 from FACT_TABLE a11 join LU_SALES_REP a12 on (a11.Trans_dt = a13. sum(a11.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C • Tables: FACT_TABLE. LVW_HIST_DISTRICT_SALES 5 Define the metric as required: • Sales: SUM(sales) The result is a logical schema as follows: LU_CURRENT_DISTRICT LU_CURRENT_ORG LU_SALES_REP FACT_TABLE LU_TIME Current District Sales Rep Current District Sales Rep Surrogate Sale rep Historical District Sales Rep Surrogate Date Sales Date Month LVW_HISTORICAL_ DISTRICT_SALES Historical District As-was analysis Specify the “as-was” analysis by using the Historical District attribute on reports: • • Report definition: Historical District. a13.

District_ID from LU_SALES_REP where current_flag = 1) a13 on (a12. sum(a11.Date_ID) join LU_DISTRICT a15 on (a13. a14.SALES) WJXBFS1 from FACT_TABLE a11 join LU_SALES_REP a12 on (a11.District_ID.District_ID) group by a12.District_ID) group by a13. Month.Sales_Rep_CD) join (select Sales_rep_ID.Sales_Rep_CD = a12.Month_ID Month_ID.Sales_Rep_ID) join LU_TIME a14 on (a11. Sales Resulting SQL: select a13.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide a14.Trans_dt = a14.Month_ID 388 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy.Distrcit_Name) District_Name. a13. a14.District_ID District_ID. .District_ID. Inc.Sales_Rep_ID = a13.District_ID = a15.Month_ID • Report results As-is analysis Specify the “as-is” analysis by using the Current District attribute on reports: • • Report definition: Current District. max(a15.

day_date) © 2007 MicroStrategy.day_date day_date. The MTD transformation can then be defined using the MTD_DATE column.day_date >= B. lu_day B Where A. If you do not already have such a table in the warehouse and your circumstances do not allow you to add additional tables to the database. Select A. you need to define transformations. one-to-many transformations require tables in the database that map each date to all the previous dates that make up “month-to-date”. then you can use the logical view approach to address this issue as long as you already have a lookup table for the Day attribute.day_date)= MONTH(B.day_date And YEAR(A. such as Last Month. such as month-to-date and year-to-date calculations. Logical view examples 389 . The SQL below can be used to define a logical MTD_DATE table. Although one-to-one transformations. which contains the Day attribute.day_date mtd_date From lu_day A. Select day_date day_date.day_date) = YEAR(B.day_date >= B. can be defined in terms of an expression.day_date ytd_date From lu_day A.day_date) The same technique can be used to define a year-t0-date transformation. B. Inc. B.day_date And MONTH(A. lu_day B Where A.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C • Report result Business case 4: One-to-many transformation tables In order to support time-series analysis.

. you could model an attribute hierarchy as follows: • • • Business Unit -< Department -< Employee Hire Date -< Employee Emergency Contact -< Employee In addition.. George . Jane Taylor. James Dawson. which means not all employees have contacts on record. Dawson.. Martha ... EMPLOYEE EMP_ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME HIRE_DATE DEPT_ID EMERGENCY CONTACT EMP_ID CONTACT_FIRST_NAME CONTACT_LAST_NAME CONTACT_PHONE_NUMBER DEPARTMENT DEPT_ID DEPT_NAME BUS_UNIT_ID Given this structure. 390 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy.. For example. the relationship between Employees and Emergency Contacts is such that each employee may have up to one contact. Abraham Walker. 555-1212 555-3456 555-9876 . no metrics).C Logical Tables Project Design Guide Business case 5: Outer joins between attribute lookup tables A common request is the ability to generate an outer join between attribute lookup tables for a report that contains only attributes (that is. . Department Marketing Finance R&D Finance . Emergency Contact Phone Number NULLS are displayed for employees who do not have emergency contacts. Inc. Mary Walker.. consider the tables below. John Larkins.. One of the reports you probably would like to create may look like the following: Employee Gonzalez.

you can perform an outer join using a logical view. described as follows. @[Last Name] = LAST_NAME Tables: EMPLOYEE (lookup). Logical view examples 391 . @[First Name] = CONTACT_FIRST_NAME. the SQL generated would join the EMPLOYEE table to the EMERGENCY_CONTACT table. In order to see all employees. EMERGENCY_CONTACT • Department: @ID = DEPT_ID Tables: DEPARTMENT (lookup). @[First Name] = FIRST_NAME. you would not get the desired output: • Employee: @ID = EMP_ID. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C However. and only those employees who have emergency contacts would appear in the final result. if you model the attributes as described below. EMPLOYEE Child: Employee • Hire Date: @ID = HIRE_DATE Tables: EMPLOYEE (lookup) Child: Employee • Emergency Contact: @ID = CONTACT_PHONE_NUMBER. Inc. @[Last Name] = CONTACT_LAST_NAME Tables: EMERGENCY_CONTACT (lookup) Child: Employee Using the above model.

LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT 392 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy. E. @[Last Name] = LAST_NAME Tables: EMPLOYEE (lookup).C Logical Tables Project Design Guide Using a logical view for an outer join To perform an outer join for the case described above. E. The new logical table LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT can then be used to define attributes as follows: • Employee: @ID = EMP_ID.EMP_ID = C.CONTACT_PHONE_NUMBER from EMPLOYEE E left outer join EMERGENCY_CONTACT C on (E.EMP_ID) LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT EMP_ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME HIRE_DATE DEPT_ID CONTACT_FIRST_NAME CONTACT_LAST_NAME CONTACT_PHONE_NUMBER Make sure to include all columns from the original child table (for example. C. @[First Name] = FIRST_NAME.CONTACT_FIRST_NAME.HIRE_DATE. Inc. .EMP_ID.CONTACT_LAST_NAME. you can use the following SQL and the list of columns to map to the view: select E. C.DEPT_ID.LAST_NAME. E. E. C.FIRST_NAME. EMPLOYEE).

Inc. LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT Child: Employee • Hire Date: @ID = HIRE_DATE Tables: EMPLOYEE (lookup). it will be executed against the EMPLOYEE table. @[Last Name] = CONTACT_LAST_NAME Tables: EMERGENCY_CONTACT (lookup). @[First Name] = CONTACT_FIRST_NAME. Now if we run a report with Employee and Emergency Contact attributes. the EMPLOYEE table will be outer joined to the EMERGENCY_CONTACT table. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Logical view examples 393 . LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT Child: Employee • Emergency Contact: @ID = CONTACT_PHONE_NUMBER. the EMERGENCY_CONTACT table will be joined only when necessary. and NULLs will be returned for any employees who do not have emergency contacts. This technique is applicable any time that the lookup tables should always be outer joined. EMPLOYEE. LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT Child: Employee The Employee attribute is not represented in the original EMERGENCY_CONTACT table and all attributes represented in the EMPLOYEE table are also represented in the LVW_EMERGENCY_CONTACT table. The technique does not work when the lookup tables should sometimes be outer joined and sometimes be inner joined.Project Design Guide Logical Tables C • Department: @ID = DEPT_ID Tables: DEPARTMENT (lookup). Also note that if we run a report that includes only the Employee attribute.

Inc.C Logical Tables Project Design Guide 394 Logical view examples © 2007 MicroStrategy. .

DATA TYPES Introduction To generate SQL or retrieve data from data sources. © 2007 MicroStrategy.D D. MicroStrategy automatically maps the columns within those tables to MicroStrategy-specific data types. Mapping of external data types to MicroStrategy data types 395 . MicroStrategy must be aware of the data types that exist in your database. Each column from your database becomes associated with a MicroStrategy data type. Mapping of external data types to MicroStrategy data types When you create a project and add tables from your data warehouse to the MicroStrategy Warehouse Catalog. As each RDBMS supports a different set of data types. Inc. MicroStrategy generalizes them into a set of MicroStrategy-specific data types.

see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Therefore. as with custom groups. For more information about data marts and custom groups.” This allows MicroStrategy to maintain a consistent SQL generation process. a column within that table has a data type of “SMALLINT. Suppose you add a table to the Warehouse Catalog. in part. and generating the correct syntax for literals. In your relational database.” MicroStrategy maps this column to a MicroStrategy-specific data type. 396 Mapping of external data types to MicroStrategy data types © 2007 MicroStrategy.D Data Types Project Design Guide This external-to-internal mapping is necessary. It is strongly recommended that you do not alter the mapping file (DTMAPPING. For information about how your relational database’s data types are mapped to MicroStrategy data types and the specific mappings that pertain to your RDBMS. MicroStrategy must map every column brought into the project schema to an internal data type. refer to MicroStrategy Technical Note TN5200-7X0-0166. for example. The data type is also used whenever multi-pass SQL is used.pds) in any way. . and data mart tables. The MicroStrategy data type stores data values internally and in the metadata repository and is later used during SQL generation when defining intermediate tables. Data types that may be conceptually the same can have different names. Inc. because each database names data types in different ways. “INTEGER.

Similar to ANSI BLOB. Inc. LongVarChar Large strings of characters. Timestamp Combinations of calendar date and time of day. Fixed-length bit strings. Similar to ANSI NUMERIC. Unsigned Unsigned integer values. Numeric Fixed point numbers up to 15 digits of precision.Project Design Guide Data Types D MicroStrategy data types When the data warehouse catalog is read from the Warehouse Catalog. Similar to ANSI DECIMAL. Similar to ANSI FLOAT. all columns in the database are automatically mapped to one of the following MicroStrategy data types. Real 4-byte floating point numbers. Similar to ANSI DOUBLE PRECISION. Date Calendar dates. Time Time of day. Data Type Big Decimal Binary Description High-precision fixed point numbers. Similar to ANSI TIMESTAMP. MicroStrategy data types 397 . Similar to ANSI CHAR. Double 8-byte floating point numbers. Similar to ANSI DATE. Decimal Fixed point numbers up to 15 digits of precision. © 2007 MicroStrategy. Integer Signed integer values. Similar to ANSI TIME. Float 4-byte floating point numbers. LongVarBin Large strings of bits. Similar to ANSI INTEGER. Char Fixed-length character strings. Similar to ANSI BIT. Similar to ANSI CLOB. Similar to ANSI REAL.

Date Datetime Email HTML Tag Number 398 Format types © 2007 MicroStrategy. It represents dates in the MM/DD/YYYY format. it implies that the data type in the database has not mapped to one of the MicroStrategy data types. page 400. which represents high-precision fixed point numbers. For more information about Big Decimal. Format Type Big Decimal Description Information is stored and displayed in the Big Decimal form. You specify the format type of an attribute form in the Form Format: Type drop-down menu in the Attribute Editor. Information is stored and displayed in the form of an e-mail address. Information is stored and displayed both as date and time in the format specific to the data. The date follows the MM/DD/YYYY format and time follows the HH:MM:SS format. Format types Attribute forms are also associated with a MicroStrategy format type. The attribute form format types are described in the following table.D Data Types Project Design Guide Data Type Varbin Description Variable-length bit strings. see Big Decimal. Similar to ANSI VARCHAR. which specifies how attribute form values should be displayed on MicroStrategy interfaces. Varchar Variable-length character strings. Inc. Information is stored and displayed as dates in a sequential form to perform calculations on the dates. Information is stored and displayed as an HTML tag. Similar to ANSI BIT VARYING. Information is stored and displayed in a number format. If the Warehouse Catalog displays a column with data type as Unknown. .

For example. JPG. you notice that the Year attribute is assigned an “Integer” data type. When you return to the Definition pane in the Attribute Editor. Although you have the option to continue by clicking Yes. If you select a format type that is incompatible with the data type and click OK to exit the Attribute Editor. This format type must be compatible with the data type you assigned in the Column Alias tab. you create a new column alias and assign it the “Date” data type. URL Data type and format type compatibility If you change the MicroStrategy data type of one of the columns in your project—using a column alias. The data type of your column must be consistent with the format type you select because SQL generation issues can occur if the format type and data type are incompatible. Inc. In the Column Alias tab. © 2007 MicroStrategy. such as bitmap. you edit the ID form of the Year attribute in the Attribute Editor. This displays only the time and not the date. Information is stored and displayed as time in the HH:MM:SS format. Information is stored and displayed in a text format. you must select an appropriate format type from the Form Format: Type drop-down menu.Project Design Guide Data Types D Format Type Picture Text Time Description stored and displayed the form of an image file. a warning message appears notifying you of the incompatibility. or GIF. doing so can still result in SQL generation issues. However. Data type and format type compatibility 399 . for example—you must also change the format type of the attribute. You are warned in the Attribute Editor whenever you have selected a format type that is incompatible with the data type of your column. Information is stored and displayed as either an absolute or a relative Universal Resource Locator.

Data Type Big Decimal Binary Char Date Decimal Double Float Integer LongVarBin LongVarChar Numeric Real Time Timestamp Unsigned Varbin Varchar Compatible Format Types Big Decimal Number. Picture Text. some of the data type-format type combinations below may not work with your specific data. Text Text. Different format types are compatible with different data types given the specific data in your column. HTML Tag. Text. Date or Time depending on data Number Picture. URL. E-mail. Datetime Number Number Number Number Picture. Therefore. URL. Picture Big Decimal Big Decimal is a MicroStrategy-specific data type that allows users to support high-precision attribute ID values that have more than 15 digits of precision. HTML Tag Date. Datetime Datetime. Text Number Number Time. Text depending on data Picture. . such as BIGINT and 400 Big Decimal © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. E-mail.D Data Types Project Design Guide The following chart is intended to guide you in assigning format types that are compatible with the data type you have assigned to a column.

For more information about these operations. you can define a filter as "Customer@ID exactly #12345678#". When using the Big Decimal data type. and page-by. follow the rules listed below: • Constant: You can force a constant to be stored as a Big Decimal value by enclosing it in hash marks. Examples of such attribute ID values are account numbers. Using the Big Decimal data type With the Big Decimal data type. drilling. You must use the Big Decimal data type to handle these values. MicroStrategy preserves the precision of attribute ID values and attribute ID forms when displaying IDs and performing operations such as filtering. you may see numbers truncated starting with the 16th digit.Project Design Guide Data Types D DECIMAL (precision. such as account numbers and other long integers. Big Decimal 401 . For example. If you do not associate high-precision database fields with the Big Decimal data type. because these data values have higher precision and cannot be stored in normal numeric data types. see the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. Attribute ID: Follow the steps in the topic Defining attributes with high-precision ID forms in the MicroStrategy Desktop online help. and page-by may not return results. credit card numbers. Inc. even though 12345678 does not necessarily require the Big Decimal data type. These numeric columns can have more than 15 digits of precision. Attribute form: If you change the column data type to Big Decimal on the Column Alias tab in the Attribute Editor. you must also select Big Decimal as the form format type in the Form format: Type drop-down menu in the Definition tab. The WHERE clause in the report SQL statement in drill reports may truncate numbers starting from the 16th digit. and long integers. scale) data types. You can define attributes that are identified by numeric columns in the database. • • © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Note that the Warehouse Catalog does not automatically map DECIMAL(p. or metric values are displayed in Graph view. you must explicitly identify high-precision constants by enclosing the value within hash (#) symbols. the metric is used in a calculated field in a document. Some number formatting strings are not supported in MicroStrategy Desktop. s) or NUMERIC(p. When qualifying on a Big Decimal metric. Number formatting strings are not supported on the Web. consider the following drawbacks: Precision is lost when any Analytical Engine calculation is performed. Inc.D Data Types Project Design Guide • Metric: Although it is possible to define Big Decimal as the data type for metric values. 402 Big Decimal © 2007 MicroStrategy. For example. the metric is subtotaled. #1234567890123456#. . This is because Big Decimal should only be used when the column is used as an attribute ID form. s) columns to the Big Decimal MicroStrategy data type even when the precision is greater than 15.

and prompts are derived from schema objects. The definition of application objects such as reports. documents. aggregate table A fact table that stores data that has been aggregated along one or more dimensions. All of these objects can be built and manipulated in MicroStrategy Desktop. custom groups. filters. MicroStrategy supports two methods of application-level partitioning: metadata partition mapping and warehouse partition mapping. the application rather than partition the database server manages the partition tables. MIN. application object An object used to provide analysis of and insight into relevant data. and AVG. Compare database-level partition. COUNT. metrics. Inc. © 2007 MicroStrategy. MAX. See pre-aggregation. application-level In application-level partitioning. Reports and documents can also be created and manipulated in MicroStrategy Web. templates.GLOSSARY aggregate function A numeric function that acts on a column of data and produces a single result. aggregate function 403 . Examples include SUM.

Inc. ID. and Abbreviation could be forms of the attribute Customer. City. For example. New York and Dallas are elements of the attribute City. attribute relationship See relationship. January. attribute role A database column that is used to define more than one attribute. Name. Last Name. Item. and March are elements of the attribute Month. Attributes include data classifications like Region. February. and Year.Glossary Project Design Guide attribute A data level defined by the system architect and associated with one or more columns in a data warehouse lookup table. Age. Long Description. Every attribute supports its own collection of forms. attribute form A mapping to the columns in the warehouse that are used to expression represent a specific attribute form in SQL. Customer. attribute form One of several columns associated with an attribute that are different aspects of the same thing. defined by the attribute forms. Billing City and Shipping City are two attributes that have the same table and columns defined as a lookup table. They provide a means for aggregating and filtering at a given level. . For example. 404 attribute © 2007 MicroStrategy. Order. See also: • • • • • • attribute element attribute form child attribute constant attribute derived attribute parent attribute attribute element A unique set of information for an attribute.

whose execution is faster because they need not run against the database. cardinality The number of unique elements for an attribute. axis 405 . Inc.Project Design Guide Glossary axis A vector along which data is displayed. and Page. See also: • • column row base fact column A fact column represented by a single column in a fact table. browse attribute An attribute a user can directly browse to from a given attribute in a user hierarchy. if the results of that report are cached. © 2007 MicroStrategy. This is normally done for frequently requested reports. the job is submitted to the database for processing. he places template units—attributes. Column. Results from the data warehouse are stored separately and can be used by new job requests that require the same data. the results can be returned immediately without having to wait for the database to process the job the next time the report is run. when a user runs a report for the first time. cache A special data store holding recently accessed information for quick future access. There are three axes—Row. When a user defines a template for a report. In the MicroStrategy environment. metrics. consolidations. business intelligence A system that facilitates the analysis of volumes of complex (BI) system data by providing the ability to view data from multiple perspectives. and custom groups—along each axis. However. dimensions.

406 child attribute © 2007 MicroStrategy. This is used to determine where aggregate tables would have the greatest impact.Glossary Project Design Guide child attribute The lower-level attribute in an attribute relationship. the specific name of the column to be used in temporary tables and SQL statements. Inc. a primary key consisting of more than one database column. . the more you stand to gain by creating an aggregate table that pre-calculates the higher-level data. compound attribute An attribute that has more than one key (ID) form. See also: • • parent attribute relationship column 1) A one-dimensional vertical array of values in a table. For example. See also: • • axis row column alias In a fact definition. the compression of ratio between monthly data and yearly data is 12:1. compression ratio The average number of child records combined to calculate one parent record. 3) MicroStrategy object in the schema layer that can represent one or more physical table columns or no columns. 2) The set of fields of a given name and data type in all the rows of a given table. Column aliases also include the data type to be used for the fact and allow you to modify the names of existing metrics for use in data mart reports without affecting the original metric. The larger the compression ratio between two attributes. compound key In a relational database.

database instances. Users can navigate through hierarchies of attributes that are defined by the administrator to find the data they need. Data Explorer A portion of the interface used to browse through data contained in the warehouse. conditionality 407 . See also data source. and analysis. system. it organizes data and allows coordinated updates and loads. A data warehouse can be thought of as one type of data source. © 2007 MicroStrategy. configuration object A MicroStrategy object appearing in the system layer and usable across multiple projects. typically very large. Used for decision support or business intelligence. data source A data source is any file. and Hyperion Essbase. 2) A copy of transaction data specifically structured for query. and OLAP cube sources such as SAP BW. Configuration objects include these object types: users. Microsoft Analysis Services 2000 and 2005.Project Design Guide Glossary conditionality Conditionality of a metric enables you to associate an existing filter object with the metric so that only data that meets the filter conditions is included in the calculation. See also: • • data warehouse OLAP cube source data warehouse 1) A database. database login IDs. or storage location which stores data that is to be used in MicroStrategy for query. containing the historical data of an enterprise. constant attribute See implicit attribute. Inc. reporting. schedules. which refers more specifically to using a database as your data source. and analysis. Excel files. reporting. Other data sources include text files.

on report data after it has been returned from the database. such as the data warehouse DSN. Age might be calculated from this expression: Current Date–Birth Date Compare implicit attribute. description column Optional columns that contain text descriptions of attribute elements.Glossary Project Design Guide database instance 1. . there is usually only one instance per machine. 2. lower attribute level. Database server software running on a particular machine. Although it is technically possible to have more than one instance running on a machine. derived fact column A fact column created through a mathematical combination of other existing fact columns. calculations on other metrics. derived metric A metric based on data already available in a report. Inc. For example. degradation A type of fact extension in which values at one level of aggregation are reported at a second. and other data warehouse specific information. A MicroStrategy object created in MicroStrategy Desktop that represents a connection to the warehouse. not in the database. 408 database instance © 2007 MicroStrategy. It is calculated by Intelligence Server. that is. derived attribute An attribute calculated from a mathematical operation on columns in a warehouse table. Compare allocation. A database instance specifies warehouse connection information. Use a derived metric to perform column math. Login ID and password.

entry level The lowest level set of attributes at which a fact is available for analysis. which lets you easily recognize tables and columns and the data stored in those columns. entity relationship A diagram that provides a graphical representation of the diagram (ERD) physical structure of the data in the source system. For example. element browsing Navigating through hierarchies of attribute elements. or the addition. For example. reclassification. or discontinuation of items or services. © 2007 MicroStrategy. drill 409 . a shortcut to an attribute in the Data Explorer which is helpful in allowing users to more easily access frequently-used attributes in the Data Explorer. geographical realignment. a store may decide to reclassify the department to which items belong. See also: • • • • • page-by pivot sort subtotal surf dynamic relationship When the relationship between elements of parent and child attributes changes. viewing the list of months in a year. These changes often occur because of organizational restructuring. Inc. entry point In a user hierarchy. The new data is retrieved by re-querying the Intelligent Cube or database at a different attribute or fact level.Project Design Guide Glossary drill A method of obtaining supplementary information after a report has been executed.

Multiple qualifications in a single filter are combined using logical operators. fact expression A mapping of facts to physical columns in the warehouse. often numeric and typically aggregatable. 2) A schema object representing a column in a data warehouse table and containing basic or aggregated numbers—usually prices. fact column A column in a database table that contains fact data. stored in a data warehouse. and disparate existing database systems. . 1) The process used to populate a data warehouse from transformation. A filter is composed of at least one qualification. loading (ETL) 2) Third-party software used to facilitate such a process. transformation. Using a filter on a report narrows the data to consider only the information that is relevant to answer your business question. and loading (ETL) © 2007 MicroStrategy. See also metric. or inventory quantities in counts. fact 1) A measurement value. 410 extraction. since a report queries the database against all the data stored in the data warehouse. Inc.Glossary Project Design Guide extraction. Fact tables can contain atomic or summarized data. or sales in dollars. filter A MicroStrategy object that specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in the report results. Facts can have multiple fact expressions. A filter is normally implemented in the SQL WHERE clause. fact table A database table containing numeric data that can be aggregated along one or more dimensions. Examples include "Region = Northeast" or "Revenue > $1 million". Fact expressions can be as simple as a fact column name from the warehouse or as sophisticated as a formula containing fact columns and numeric constants. which is the actual condition that must be met for the data to be included on a report.

though nothing is saved in a column. highly normalized Schema type where lookup tables contain unique schema developer-designed attribute keys. both containing customer names. you may wish to create columns in the database with a value of 1 for every row to get around COUNT limitations. The order of the attributes is typically—though not always—defined such that a higher attribute has a one-to-many relationship with its child attributes. Inc. A form group must be created to create a compound key. but the description columns are present as well. You do not have to actually create the column. which identifies that an attribute form requires more than one ID column to uniquely identify its elements. heterogeneous column Columns in different tables in a database that store the same naming data but have different names. because in the Attribute Editor. For example. Such an attribute has its expression defined as a constant value. All attributes must have an ID column. though. implicit attribute An attribute that does not physically exist in the database because it is created at the application level. For example. form group 411 © 2007 MicroStrategy. hierarchy A set of attributes defining a meaningful path for element browsing or drilling. one column named Customer in one table and one named Customer Name in a different table. highly denormalized Schema type where not only are higher-level attribute ID schema columns present within all related tables. homogeneous column Columns in different tables of a database that contain the naming same data and have the same column name. . See also compound key.Project Design Guide Glossary form group A grouping of attribute forms that are related in a way that justifies combining the forms into a single form. ID column A column that contains attribute element identification codes.

which arranges data for efficient database use. They typically consist of descriptions of dimensions. logical data model A graphical representation of data that is arranged logically for the general user. item. Inc. joint children Joint child relationships are another type of many-to-many relationship where one attribute has a many-to-many relationship to two otherwise unrelated attributes. but like facts. 412 joint children © 2007 MicroStrategy. as opposed to the physical data model or warehouse schema. promotion has a many-to-many relationship to both item and quarter. Implicit attributes are useful in analyzing and retrieving information. A business might run this promotion around Valentine's Day (Q1) and again at Christmas time (Q4). In this case. you can use constant attributes to create a COUNT to keep track of the number of rows returned. they exist at the intersection of multiple attribute levels. When analyzing data. Compare derived attribute. You can use constant attributes when building metrics. Lookup tables are usually joined to fact tables to group the numeric facts in the fact table by dimensional attributes in the lookup tables. and quarter. These relationships can be modeled and conceptualized like traditional attributes.For example. locked hierarchy A hierarchy that has at least one attribute that may not be browsed by end users. Any constant is acceptable. . where you can sum the column holding the constant to create a COUNT. lookup table A database table used to uniquely identify attribute elements. consider the relationship between three attributes: promotion. Hierarchies are usually locked if there are so many attribute elements that element browsing is not usable.Glossary Project Design Guide you can just enter a “1” in the expression to create a count. An example of a promotion might be a “Red Sale” where all red items are on sale.

It can even be held in a different RDBMS. and vice versa. © 2007 MicroStrategy. and (2) every element of the child attribute can relate to multiple elements of the parent. managed object 413 . hierarchies and other schema objects for Freeform SQL. Inc.Project Design Guide Glossary managed object A schema object unrelated to the project schema. many-to-many An attribute relationship in which multiple elements of a parent attribute can relate to multiple elements of a child attribute. Managed objects are used to map data to attributes. See also metadata shell. and needs to the underlying database structure. which is created by the system and stored in a separate system folder. metrics. See also: • • • • one-to-one one-to-many many-to-one relationship many-to-one An attribute relationship in which (1) multiple elements of a parent attribute relate to only one element of a child attribute. and OLAP cube reports. See also: • • • • one-to-one one-to-many many-to-many relationship metadata A repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data warehouse with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of the business view. terms. Query Builder. Metadata can reside on the same server as the data warehouse or on a different database server.

the process terminates. an application that allows for the distribution of personalized business information to subscribed users. When the primary thread terminates. attributes. file services. multithreaded Characteristic of a process that supports the simultaneous execution of multiple threads. More concretely. an object is the highest grouping level of information about one concept. Inc. SMS. Narrowcast Server is a proactive information delivery server that allows for this distribution of information through e-mail. but here the higher-level attribute ID columns are present within all related tables. . including folders. metrics. and so on. metric 1) A business calculation defined by an expression built with functions. In MicroStrategy. an object is any item that can be selected and manipulated. See also metadata. facts. 414 metadata shell © 2007 MicroStrategy. The startup code initiates the primary thread of a process by passing the main function address to the operating system.Glossary Project Design Guide metadata shell A set of blank tables that are created when you initially implement a MicroStrategy business intelligence environment. For example: sum(dollar_sales) or [Sales] . printers. object Conceptually. moderately normalized Schema type having the same basic structure as the highly schema normalized schema. See also fact. facts. reports. and mobile devices. narrowcast application In a business intelligence environment. or other metrics. used by the user to achieve the goal of specified data analysis. MOLAP Multidimensional online analytical processing.[Cost] 2) The MicroStrategy object that contains the metric definition.

while every element of the child attribute relates to only one element of the parent. You can import and map data from these different OLAP cube sources in MicroStrategy to query. Inc. Microsoft Analysis Services. and Hyperion Essbase are referred to as OLAP cube sources. The one-to-many attribute relationship is the most common in data models. MicroStrategy can integrate with OLAP cube source data as well as access data from a relational database concurrently. which is imported into MicroStrategy and mapped to various objects to allow query. reporting. and analyze data with MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Glossary OLAP cube An OLAP cube is a collection or set of data retrieved from an OLAP cube source. report on. OLAP cube 415 . OLAP cube source When integrated with MicroStrategy. See also OLAP cube source. See also: • • OLAP cube data source one-to-many An attribute relationship in which every element of a parent attribute can relate to multiple elements of a child attribute. and analysis on the data. the third-party tools SAP BW. See also: • • • • one-to-one many-to-many many-to-one relationship © 2007 MicroStrategy.

and vice versa. online transaction Typically. Transactional processing involves the simple recording of transactions such as sales. See also: • • • • one-to-many many-to-one many-to-many relationship online analytical A system with analytical processing that involves activities processing (OLAP) such as manipulating transaction records to calculate sales trends. databases or mainframes that store transactional processing (OTLP) data. the user can page through the cube. Since a grid is two-dimensional. trend reporting. By varying the selection of elements. and profit analysis. growth patterns. page-by Segmenting data in a grid report by placing available attributes. and metrics on a third axis called the Page axis. or deposits. Inc. consolidations. See also: • • • • • drill pivot sort subtotal surf 416 one-to-one © 2007 MicroStrategy. only a slice of the cube can be seen at any one time. inventory. withdrawals.Glossary Project Design Guide one-to-one An attribute relationship in which every element of the parent attribute relates to exactly one element of the child attribute. percent to total contributions. . The slice is characterized by the choice of elements on the Page axis.

Partition tables are usually divided along logical lines. See also: • • child attribute relationship partial relationship An attribute relationship in which elements of one attribute relate to elements of a second attribute. Partitions minimize the number of tables and records within a table that must be read to satisfy queries issued against the warehouse. Also referred to as a PBT. parent attribute 417 . such as time or geography. Inc. while the opposite is not necessarily true. such as month or department. partition mapping The division of large logical tables into smaller physical tables based on a definable data level. See also: • • • • relationship one-to-many many-to-one many-to-many partition base table A warehouse table that contains one part of a larger set of data. © 2007 MicroStrategy. See also partition mapping.Project Design Guide Glossary parent attribute The higher-level attribute in an attribute relationship with one or more children. partitions improve the speed and efficiency of database queries. By distributing usage across multiple tables.

metrics.Glossary Project Design Guide partition mapping table A warehouse table that contains information used to identify the partitioned base tables as part of a logical whole. it knows to forward those calls to the Intelligence Server port number that is specified in the call. See also schema. For example. It organizes the logical data model in a method that make sense from a database perspective. See also: • • • • • drill page-by sort subtotal surf port number The port number is how a server process identifies itself on the machine on which it is running. Also. 418 partition mapping table © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. . and so on). Narrowcast Server. Command Manager. Subset of cross-tab. to reconfigure a grid report by interchanging row and column headers. Web. consolidations) on different axes. pivot To reconfigure data on a grid report by placing report objects (attributes. Also referred to as a PMT. when the Intelligence Server machine receives a network call from a client (Desktop. and hence the associated data. See also: • • partition base table partition mapping physical warehouse A detailed graphic representation of your business data as it schema is stored in the data warehouse.

and synchronization objects. with the results stored in an aggregate table. pipes. it should match the name space field since it is used to qualify on a specific table belonging to a certain owner or name space. See also table name space. the Catalog Server uses it to obtain table sample values and row counts. See also: • • aggregate table aggregation prefix A prefix is stored in the project metadata associated with a table or tables and is used by the Engine to generate SQL. Prefixes can be defined and modified from the Warehouse Catalog interface.Project Design Guide Glossary pre-aggregation Aggregation. The project object is specified when requesting the establishment of a session. metrics. 2) An object containing the definition of a project. Inc. metadata repository. A direct project source is a two-tier connection directly to a metadata repository. process An executing application comprising one or more threads. Processes use temporary private address spaces and control operating system resources such as files. Also. and user community. © 2007 MicroStrategy. One project source can contain many projects and the administration tools found at the project source level are used to monitor and administer all projects in the project source. project source Defines a connection to the metadata repository and is used by various MicroStrategy products to access projects. pre-aggregation 419 . A server project source is a 3-tier connection to a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. or the calculation of numeric data at a specific attribute level. that is completed before reports are run. dynamic memory allocations. filters. and functions. as defined in (1). containing reports. project 1) The highest-level intersection of a data warehouse. In most cases.

thus defining associations between them. A typical example with a filter is choosing a specific attribute on which to qualify. as in “type login ID and password at the prompt. AND NOT. Qualifications are used in filters and custom groups. Examples include "Region = Northeast" or "Revenue > $1 million". ratio The relationship in quantity. or size between the cardinalities of related attributes. a window requesting user input. You can create multiple qualifications for a single filter or custom group.” qualification The actual condition that must be met for data to be included on a report. quality relationship The relationship between a parent attribute and two or more “joint child” attributes. relational database A relational database management system (RDBMS) is a management system program that lets you create. and administer a relational database. and then set how to combine the qualifications using the logical operators AND. OR. The parent attribute is referred to as a “quality” because its definition is complete only with the intersection of its joint children. Inc. update. . See also cardinality. A relational database is a collection of data items organized as a set of formally-described tables from which data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without having to reorganize the database tables. 420 prompt © 2007 MicroStrategy. IBM DB2 and Microsoft SQL Server. The leading RDBMS products are Oracle. amount.Glossary Project Design Guide prompt 1) MicroStrategy object in the report definition that is incomplete by design. relate table A table containing the ID columns of two or more attributes. The user is asked during the resolution phase of report execution to provide an answer that completes the information. and OR NOT. 2) In general.

and then present it in a visually pleasing manner. report design The process of building reports from basic report components using the Report Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. analyze that data. See also: • • filter template report creation The process of building reports from existing. predesigned reports in MicroStrategy Desktop or in MicroStrategy Web. a report allows users to query for data. © 2007 MicroStrategy.Project Design Guide Glossary relationship An association specifying the nature of the connection between one attribute (the parent) and one or more other attributes (the children). City is a child attribute of State. For example. relationship 421 . Inc. See also: • • • • • • • • parent attribute child attribute partial relationship quality relationship one-to-one one-to-many many-to-one many-to-many report The central focus of any decision support investigation.

operators. the fields in each table. The attribute and fact columns in those tables are considered part of the schema itself. a primary key that requires only one column to uniquely identify a record within a table. functions. filter. In relational databases. Inc. simple key In a relational database. and transformations. Schema objects directly reflect the warehouse structure and include attributes. and the relationships between fields and tables. schema object A MicroStrategy object created. . See also: • • axis column schema 1) The set of tables in a data warehouse associated with a logical data model. which can be accessed from MicroStrategy Desktop. and so forth. the schema defines the tables. 2) The layout or structure of a database system. shortcut object A MicroStrategy object that represents a link to any other MicroStrategy object such as report. server instance The combination of an Intelligence Server running with a particular server definition. usually by a project designer.Glossary Project Design Guide row The horizontal axis of a report. that relates the information in the logical data model and physical warehouse schema to the MicroStrategy environment. 422 row © 2007 MicroStrategy. These objects are developed in MicroStrategy Architect. facts. partition mappings. metric. server definition A MicroStrategy object stored in the metadata containing information about the configuration of an Intelligence Server. tables. hierarchies.

statistics tables Tables that are used to record a variety of statistical information about the usage and performance of a MicroStrategy system. Structured Query The query language standardized in 1986 by the American Language (SQL) National Standards Institute (ANSI) and used to request information from tables in a relational database and to manipulate the tables’ structure and data. and so forth). Inc.Project Design Guide Glossary sort Arranging data according to some characteristic of the data itself (alphabetical descending. drill page-by pivot sort surf sort 423 . star schema A highly denormalized physical warehouse schema in which lookup tables are consolidated so that every attribute ID and description column for a given hierarchy exists in one table. See also: • • • • • © 2007 MicroStrategy. See also: • • • • • drill page-by pivot subtotal surf source system Any system or file that captures or holds data of interest. subtotal A totaling operation performed for a portion of a result set. numeric ascending.

Inc. Compare user hierarchy. The layout and format of these objects are defined within the template's view definition. it is not explicitly created but is automatically deduced by the MicroStrategy platform from all information available to it. and functions to existing analysis objects. custom groups. attributes. See also: • • • • • drill page-by pivot sort subtotal system hierarchy The superset hierarchy containing all attributes in a project. This is needed to uniquely identify each table saved in the project when comparing table information in the metadata to the real one in the warehouse. 424 surf © 2007 MicroStrategy. Unlike a browse hierarchy. attribute elements. Each table object in the metadata stores the name space or owner from which it came. table name space A field that is read from the warehouse catalog and used to organize databases. metrics. table size The estimated size of a database table in terms of number of rows. This field cannot be modified from the product since it is actually stored in the warehouse. . and so on) that defines the columns of data to be included in the result set.Glossary Project Design Guide surf To add filters. template The data definition portion of the template consists of the group of objects (attribute. metrics.

For example. user hierarchy A named set of attributes and their relationships. multidimensional representation of data. They are user-defined and are used to define the browse and drill relationships between attributes. such as current month minus one month. applying an offset value. transformation metric An otherwise simple metric that takes the properties of the transformation applied to it. a transformation can also map different objects. Add a transformation for last year and the metric now calculates last year’s total sales. Time transformations are used in metrics to compare values at different times. threshold Used to create conditional formatting for metric values. a conceptual. a metric calculates total sales.Project Design Guide Glossary transformation A schema object that maps a specified time period to another time period. Unlike a physical cube. a virtual cube does not perform data retrieval and consequently lacks the performance problems and size limitations associated with a physical cube. such as this year versus last year or current date versus month-to-date. such as defunct product codes to new ones. virtual cube 1) In an OLAP data model. if revenue is greater than $200. A virtual cube maps MicroStrategy objects such as hierarchies and metrics to OLE DB for OLAP objects. Inc. but a definition of the virtual cube structure is stored in MicroStrategy metadata. For example. Although the vast majority are based on time. format that cell to have a blue background with bold type. No physical cube is created or loaded. 2) The result of mapping a logical data model to an OLE DB for OLAP multidimensional model after hierarchies and metrics have been selected from a project. transformation 425 . arranged in specific sequences for a logical business organization. © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Inc.Glossary Project Design Guide 426 virtual cube © 2007 MicroStrategy. .

Inc. 320 level 321 member property 321 relating objects 317 Analysis Services 2005 catalog 342 connecting to 340 DSI 342 hierarchy 326 relating objects to MicroStrategy 322 URL 342 427 .INDEX A accessing Project Creation Assistant 78 Warehouse Catalog 219 adding tables to a project 79 aerial perspective of hierarchy 200. 212 aggregate function defined on 247 aggregate table defined on 241 advantages 242 base table 244 compression ratio 248 effectiveness 248 integrate into project 249 logical table size 249 parent-child relationship 246 pre-aggregation 243 query frequency 246 aggregate-aware 249 aggregation defined on 243 degree of 244 dense 244 dynamic 243 sparse 244 alias attribute column 156 © 2007 MicroStrategy. 180 allocation expression 121 Analysis Services 2000 catalog 339 connecting to 337 DSI 339 metadata models 317 relating objects to MicroStrategy 317 URL 339 Analysis Services 2000 to MicroStrategy cube 319 database 318 database instance 338 dimension 319. 105 table 178. fact column 96.

See attribute element. See joint-child relationship. simple expression 148 system hierarchy 159 attribute component. 428 . Attribute Creation Wizard about 129 using 130 Attribute Editor about 135 creating attribute forms 146 creating attributes 136 updating hierarchies 197 attribute element defined on 23 about 140 © 2007 MicroStrategy. derived attribute 150 derived expression 150 display 189 element. report display form 190 role. See report display form and browse form. compound 183 compound key 184 creating in Project Creation Assistant 130 creating using Attribute Editor 136 cross-dimensional. See attribute form. See attribute relationship. expression 127 filtering in a hierarchy 203 form. 164 MicroStrategy to Analysis Services 2000 321 MicroStrategy to Analysis Services 2005 326 MicroStrategy to Essbase 315 MicroStrategy to SAP BW 307 multiple counting in relationship 166 nonrelated 161 one-to-many relationship 160 one-to-one relationship 160 overview 22 parent 24 properties 127. attribute constant 155 in hierarchy 25 joint child relationship 171 many-to-many relationship 160. 128 qualification 253 ratio 35 relationship. heterogeneous mapping 153 identifying 30 implicit. See attribute role.Index Project Design Guide Analysis Services 2005 to MicroStrategy cube 322 database 323 database instance 341 dimension 325 level 326 member 326 member property 327 perspective 324 relating objects 322 analysis. Inc. See report display form and browse form. MicroStrategy 294 atomic defined on 244 attribute defined on 10 Attribute Creation Wizard 129 Attribute Editor 135 browse form 190 cardinality 35 child 24 column alias 156 component. time-series 257 application for Essbase 313 application-level partition defined on 251 architecture.

Project Design Guide Index for Analysis Services 2000 321 for Analysis Services 2005 326 for Essbase 316 for SAP BW 307 overview 23 attribute form defined on 37 creating using Attribute Editor 146 display 189 expression 147 for Analysis Services 2000 321 for Analysis Services 2005 327 for Essbase 316 for SAP BW 307 group 186 qualification 253 attribute relationship defined on 24 about 159 as property of attribute 127 identifying 31 in lookup table 44 overview 24 attribute role defined on 175 automatic recognition 179 automatic recognition of 177 explicit table alias 178. See column data type. Inc. See hierarchy. SAP BW 300 child attribute 24 class. derived fact 47 description 41 fact 41 heterogeneous naming 49 homogeneous naming 50 ID 41 physical warehouse schema 40. 223 base fact column 47 data type. 41 column alias attribute 156 429 B base fact column 47 base table defined on 244 pre-aggregation 243 BI architecture 2 browse attribute 207 form 190 browsing © 2007 MicroStrategy. characteristic attribute vs. . attribute form 307 characteristic value 307 characteristics. column defined on 41. 180 authenticating OLAP cube reports 297 automatic attribute role recognition 177 about 207 enabling in a hierarchy 209 building a logical data model 26 business intelligence (BI) system defined on 1 C calculating growth percentage 257 variance 257 calculating logical table sizes 231 cardinality for an attribute 35 Cartesian join 159 catalog for Analysis Services 2000 318 for Analysis Services 2005 323 for Essbase 313 for SAP BW 304 SQL 234 category. See hierarchy.

data provider. See database instance. Inc.Index Project Design Guide fact 96. 105 column data type changed 240 manually setting for OLAP cube 352 compound attribute defined on 183 creating 184 compound key defined on 42 and compound attributes 184 compound metric. See project source. See joint child relationship. cube 319 for Analysis Services 2000 319 for Analysis Services 2005 324 for Essbase 314 for SAP BW 304 mapping 349 customizing catalog SQL 233 D Data Explorer defined on 209 about 209 enabling hierarchy browsing 196. data slice 253 data source defined on 6 data type and mapping 395 Big Decimal 400 changed in column 240 high-precision 400 warehouse catalog 397 data warehouse defined on 5 and physical schema 39 connecting to 72 schema type 51 structure 51 Warehouse Catalog 218 database 323 connection operations 227 custom login 227 gateway support 225 instance. . creating for OLAP cube 359 compression ratio defined on 248 Configuration Wizard 71 connecting to a database 227 to Analysis Services 2000 337 to Analysis Services 2005 340 to Essbase 334 to SAP BW 327 consolidating lookup tables 58 constant attribute 155 creating attributes 136 compound attributes 184 compound metric for OLAP cube 359 facts 87 logical data model 26 project 75 creating hierarchies 194 cross product join 116 cross-dimensional attribute. 209 data model. See logical data model. read operations 227 secondary 225 database instance defined on 67 for Analysis Services 2000 338 for Analysis Services 2005 341 for Essbase 335 for SAP BW 329 for SAP BW (UNIX/Linux) 333 database management system 233 degradation defined on 118 dense aggregation 244 derived 430 © 2007 MicroStrategy.

180 expression map 98 expression. See MicroStrategy Desktop. See extraction. 315 for SAP BW 306 See also hierarchy. 97 Fact Editor 88. 320 for Analysis Services 2005 325 for Essbase 314. 6 F fact defined on 85 allocation expression 121 base fact column 47 column defined on 41 column alias 96. entry level defined on 87 entry point 205 ERD. transformation. See entity relationship diagram. transformation. See hierarchy. dimension for Analysis Services 2000 319. attribute 140 entity relationship diagram (ERD) defined on 29 entity. and loading (ETL) process defined on 4.Project Design Guide Index attribute 150 fact 99 fact column 47 description column defined on 41 Desktop. fact 98 expression-based transformation 259 creating 261 member expressions 264 member tables 263 extension. and loading. 105 creating 87 cross product join 116 degradation defined on 118 derived 99 derived fact column 47 disallowing 122 expression 98 extension 107 Fact Creation Wizard 88 fact definition 96. member 316 relating objects 311 ETL. 92 fact entry level 87 431 . example data model sample 26 physical schema 289 project 267 table data sample 225 explicit table alias 178. direct access approach 292 disallowing fact entry level 122 drilling using hierarchies 209 dynamic aggregation 243 dynamic relationship defined on 247 E element. level 107 extraction. Inc. Essbase catalog 337 connecting to 334 database instance 335 DSI (DataSourceInfo) 336 metadata models 311 relating objects to MicroStrategy 311 URL 336 Essbase to MicroStrategy application 313 database 313 dimension 314. 315 level 315 © 2007 MicroStrategy.

200. 200. enabling 209 creating 194 defining 32 displaying 201 drilling 209 entry point 205 facts in 25 filtering attributes in 203 for Analysis Services 2000 320 for Analysis Services 2005 326 for Essbase 315 for SAP BW 306 Hierarchy Editor 198. fact column defined on 41 base 47 derived 47 heterogeneous 102 Fact Creation Wizard 88 Fact Editor 88. . structure 199 system hierarchy 197 unbalanced 355 user hierarchy 197 Hierarchy Editor 198. See fact table. 210 Hierarchy Viewer 200 © 2007 MicroStrategy. 210 Hierarchy Viewer 200 in a logical data model 25 in SAP BW 300 limited 202 locked 201 organization 198 Project Creation Assistant 197 ragged 355 See also dimension. 209 Attribute Editor 197 attribute filter 203 attributes in 25 browse attribute 207 browsing 207 browsing.Index Project Design Guide fact relation 114 heterogeneous fact column 102 identifying 29 implicit 99 in hierarchy 25 level extension 96. 93 fact expression 98 fact table defined on 86 column naming 51 in a warehouse 46 level 48 overview 21 filtered hierarchy 203 flag 172 form attribute form 143 expression 147 group 186 G gateway support for database 225 growth percentage calculation 257 H heterogeneous attribute mapping 153 column naming defined on 49 432 fact column 102 partition mapping 252 hierarchy defined on 193 aerial perspective 212 and the Data Explorer 196. Inc. 107 overview 21 table 46 table relation 110 table.

330 join. I implicit attribute 155 fact 99 importing OLAP cubes 343.Project Design Guide Index highly denormalized schema 57 higher level lookup tables 58 highly normalized schema 52 homogeneous column naming 50 partition mapping 252. . See Essbase. 280 ratio 35 sample 26 schema type 51 source of structure 29 unique identifier 34 Logical Table Editor 250 logical table size 249 login. 304 InfoObjects 299 InfoProviders 299 international technical support xxiii J Java Connector 328. 254 Hyperion Essbase. Inc. 344 InfoCube 303. cross product 116 joint child attribute transformation metrics 265 joint child relationship 171 joint children defined on 171 for Analysis Services 2005 326 for Essbase 315 virtual 306 limited hierarchy 202 locating OLAP cubes 348 locked hierarchy defined on 201 logical data model defined on 17 attributes in 24 building 26 cardinality 35 conventions 33 design factors 59 for MicroStrategy Tutorial 271. custom 227 lookup table defined on 43 attribute relationships and 44 consolidating 58 many-to-many relationship 44 one-to-one relationship 44 K key compound 42 figures 300 simple 42 M managed object 349 managed objects OLAP cubes 348 many-to-many relationship defined on 160 design considerations 164 example 32 lookup table 44 relate table 45 many-to-many transformation 433 L level extension 107 for Analysis Services 2000 321 © 2007 MicroStrategy.

MicroStrategy Project Builder. . MicroStrategy architecture 294 object model 7i 295 object model 8 296 MicroStrategy Desktop 11 MicroStrategy metadata. Microsoft Analysis Services 2005. See member property. See MultiDimensional Expressions. See Analysis Services 2000.Index Project Design Guide and table-based transformations 259 double-counting 264 mapping OLAP cubes 343 OLAP cubes examples 358 schema objects in Warehouse Catalog 231 mapping type about 264 many-to-many 264 one-to-one 264 MDX. See metadata. tables 263 member property for Analysis Services 2000 321 for Analysis Services 2005 327 metadata defined on 8 connecting to 72 shell 65 table 71 metadata model Analysis Services 2000 317 Essbase 311 SAP BW 302 metadata partition mapping attribute qualification 253 data slice 253 overview 251 versus warehouse partition mapping 255 metadata shell defined on 65 metric creating compound metrics for OLAP cube data 359 creating with custom MDX 359 prompts within custom MDX 366 removing compound metrics from OLAP cubes 368 transformations 258 Microsoft Analysis Services 2000. Inc. member attributes 263 expressions 263 for Analysis Services 2000 321 for Analysis Services 2005 326 for Essbase 316 property. MicroStrategy to Analysis Services 2000 317 attribute 321 attribute element 321 attribute form 321 catalog 318 cube 319 dimension 320 hierarchy 320 MicroStrategy to Analysis Services 2005 322 attribute 326 attribute element 326 attribute form 327 catalog 323 cube 324 dimension 325 hierarchy 326 MicroStrategy to Essbase 311 434 © 2007 MicroStrategy. See Analysis Services 2005. See Project Builder.

OLAP cube defined on 343 creating compound metrics 359 creating metrics with custom MDX 359 importing 344 integration 292 manually setting column data type 352 mapping 349 prompts within custom MDX metrics 366 remapping 356 removing 347 removing compound metrics 368 searching for 348 source 291 unbalanced and ragged hierarchies 355 OLAP Cube Catalog 309. MultiDimensional Expressions about 291 remapping objects 356 multiple counting 164 MultiProviders 299 O object models in MicroStrategy 7i 295 in MicroStrategy 8 296 using SAP direct access 296 object. See logical data model. 435 . See OLAP cube.Project Design Guide Index attribute 315 attribute element 316 attribute form 316 catalog 313 cube 314 dimension 314 hierarchy 315 MicroStrategy to SAP BW 302 attribute 307 attribute element 307 attribute form 307 catalog 304 cube 304 dimension 306 hierarchy 306 MicroStrategy Tutorial 267 data model. 343 OLAP Cube Editor 349 OLAP cube reports authentication 297 managed objects 348 OLTP 3 one-to-many relationship defined on 160 example 31 relate table 45 N nonrelated attributes 161 normalized schema 53. Inc. viewing 279 logical data model 271. general 280 view physical schema 289 MicroStrategy Web Universal 13 migrating tables 232 moderately normalized schema 54 MOLAP defined on 242 multidimensional data model. user 10 ODS object 299 OLAP BAPI certification 293 Cube Catalog 309 Cube Editor 349 cube. 280 physical warehouse schema 281 schema. 55 © 2007 MicroStrategy.

436 pre-aggregation defined on 243 aggregate table 241 base table 244 compression ratio 248 integrate aggregate table 249 logical table size 249 parent-child relationship 246 query frequency 246 prefix 230 project defined on 14 adding tables to 79. opening Project Creation Assistant 78 Warehouse Catalog 219 Operational Data Store object.See ODS object. integrating 248 creating 75 data warehouse 79 integrating aggregate tables 248 managing tables for 220 planning 76 Project Builder 74 Project Creation Assistant 78. .Index Project Design Guide one-to-one relationship defined on 160 lookup table 44 online analytical processing. See OLTP. 197 project source defined on 65 connecting to 72 creating 77 prompt. 254 metadata 251. 255 partition mapping defined on 250 application-level 251 attribute qualification 253 data slice 253 heterogeneous 252 homogeneous 252. Inc. 255 PBT. See project source tables. perspective 324 physical warehouse schema defined on 39 design factors 59 for MicroStrategy Tutorial 281 sample 289 planning a project 76 PMT. See partition base table. defined on 255 types 251 warehouse 254. See joint child relationship. P parent attribute 24 parent-child relationship 246 dynamic 247 overview 25 static 247 partition base table defined on 251. See OLAP. 80 removing tables from 80 sample project 267 schema 216 source. 255 partition base table 255 server-level 251 table 222. managing 220 Warehouse Catalog 79 warehouse tables in 79 Project Builder 74 Project Creation Assistant 77. in metrics with custom MDX 366 properties for SAP BW 311 Q qualification for an attribute form 253 quality. online transaction processing. © 2007 MicroStrategy. 80 aggregate table. See partition mapping table.

See attribute relationship.Project Design Guide Index query cubes 299 query frequency 246 R ragged hierarchy 355 ratio for an attribute 35 RDBMS defined on 5 server-level partitioning 251 read operations for database 227 relate table 45 related attributes. relationship dynamic 247 many-to-many 164 parent-child 246 relate table 45 static 247 remapping OLAP cubes 356 removing compound metric from OLAP cube 368 OLAP cube 347 table from project 80 report display form 190 row count for table 230 S SAP BW characteristics 300 connecting to 327 on UNIX/Linux 330 on Windows 328 database instance 329. configuring 331 schema for project 216 highly denormalized 57 highly normalized 53 MicroStrategy Tutorial project 280 moderately normalized 55 object 14 physical warehouse defined on 39 star 58 © 2007 MicroStrategy.sh 331 structures 311 terminology 298 variable properties 309 variables 300. 304 relating objects 302 virtual level 306 SAP. 437 . 330 key figures 300 mapping cubes 349 metadata models 302 OLAP Cube Catalog 309. relating objects to MicroStrategy from Analysis Services 2000 317 from Analysis Services 2005 322 from Essbase 311 from SAP BW 302 relation. 343 query cubes 299 relating objects to MicroStrategy 302 SAP. 308 SAP BW to MicroStrategy characteristic attribute 307 characteristic value 307 characteristics 305 hierarchy 306 InfoCube 303. 333 hierarchies 300 InfoObjects 299 InfoProviders 299 Java Connector 328. fact 114 relational database management system.sh. See RDBMS. Inc.

See joint child relationship. defined on 197 T table adding to a project 79 aggregate 241 alias 178. 261 many-to-many 259 mapping types 264 member attributes 263 member expressions 263 member tables 263 438 © 2007 MicroStrategy. Inc. See SQL. 228 name spaces 230 physical warehouse schema 40 prefixes 230 primary key 42 relation 110 row counts 230 sample data 225 simple key 42 size defined on 249 summary 241 transformation 259 updating structure 223 viewing structure 222 warehouse tables in Project Creation Assistant 79 table-based member expressions 264 transformations 259 creating 260 member tables 263 technical support xxv international xxiii text fact. summary table 241 support. See technical support. . 28 sparse aggregation 244 SQL defined on 5 attributes and columns in 22 catalog 233 default catalog SQL 239 facts and columns in 21 star schema 58 static relationship defined on 247 structure in SAP BW query cube 311 of hierarchy 199 of table 222 Structured Query Language. time-series analysis 257 transformation defined on 258 components 263 double-counting 264 expression-based 259. 5. 44 managing for a project 221 migrating 232 name space 222. updating 217 schema type 51 comparison 60 searching for OLAP cubes 348 server-level partitioning 251 simple expression 148 key 42 source system defined on 3. 86 key 42 Logical Table Editor 250 lookup 43. system hierarchy 159.Index Project Design Guide type. See schema type. 180 calculating logical sizes 231 calculating size 231 compound key 42 fact table defined on 46.

260 transformation metric defined on 258 joint child attributes 265 troubleshooting column data type changed 240 column missing 241 data warehouse connection 239 tables missing 240 V variables overview 300 properties. metrics 258 one-to-one mapping types 264 table-based 259. Inc. user hierarchy defined on 197 browse attribute 207 browsing 207 browsing. See fact expression. See transformation metric. connecting to SAP BW 330 updating project schema 217 updating table structure 223 URL for Analysis Services 2000 339 for Analysis Services 2005 342 for Essbase 336 user defined object. W Warehouse Catalog accessing 219 column missing 241 connection operations 227 data types 240 database gateway support 225 default catalog SQL 239 displaying information 230 managing 221 mapping schema objects 231 read operations 227 troubleshooting 239 updating table structure 223 usage and settings 218 viewing table structure 222 warehouse partition mapping overview 254 partition base table 255 partition mapping table 255 versus metadata partition mapping 255 warehouse table in Project Creation Assistant 79 439 . enabling 209 creating 194 displaying 201 drilling 209 entry point 205 filtering attributes in 203 limited 202 locked 201 structure 199 user object 10 using attribute form vs characteristic attribute 158 © 2007 MicroStrategy. setting 311 supporting 308 variance calculation 257 viewing sample data model 279 sample table data 225 sample warehouse schema 289 table structure 222 virtual level 306 U unbalanced and ragged hierarchy 355 unique identifier 34 UNIX/Linux.Project Design Guide Index metric.

281 Windows. Inc.Index Project Design Guide warehouse. . physical schema defined on 39. connecting to SAP BW 327 X XMLA 293 Analysis Services 2000 317 Analysis Services 2005 322 Essbase 312 provider for Analysis Services 2000 338 provider for Analysis Services 2005 341 provider for Essbase 335 440 © 2007 MicroStrategy.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful

Master Your Semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer for students: Only $4.99/month.

Master Your Semester with a Special Offer from Scribd & The New York Times

Cancel anytime.